the_thesis_archive.
Mastering Electro-Mechanical Dynamics of Large
Off-Shore Direct-Drive Wind Turbine Generators
Proefschrift
ter verkrijging van de graad van doctor
aan de Technische Universiteit Delft,
op gezag van de Rector Magnificus prof. ir. K. C. A. M. Luyben,
voorzitter van het College voor Promoties,
in het openbaar te verdedigen op donderdag 31 maart 2016 om 12:30 uur
door
Michael Kirschneck
Diplom Ingenieur
geboren te Hamburg, Duitsland.
Dit proefschrift is goedgekeurd door de promotor:
Prof. dr. D.J. Rixen
Copromotors: Dr. ir. H. Polinder and dr. ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen
Samenstelling promotiecommissie:
Rector Magnificus,
Prof. dr. D.J. Rixen,
Dr. ir. H. Polinder,
Dr. ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen
voorzitter
Technische Universiteit Delft/ TU München, promotor
Technische Universiteit Delft, copromotor
Technische Universiteit Delft, copromotor
Onafhankelijke leden:
Prof. dr. C. Vuik
Prof. dr. A. de Boer
Prof. dr. G. van Bussel
Prof. Dr.-Ing. K. Hameyer
Technische Universiteit Delft
Universiteit Twente
Technische Universiteit Delft
Rheinisch-Westfälische Technische Hochschule Aachen
Printed by:
Ridderprint BV
Front & Back:
Michael Kirschneck
Copyright © 2016 by Michael Kirschneck
ISBN 978-94-6299-323-5
An electronic version of this dissertation is available at
http://repository.tudelft.nl/.
iii
Abstract
The ever growing population of human beings on earth introduces
the challenge of providing affordable, sustainable energy for everyone. Emerging markets, such as China, India or Brazil, quench
their thirst for cheap energy by fossil fuels and nuclear power. At
the same time researchers from all over the globe warn the public of the advent of a new, civilisation threatening disaster: climate
change.
Over the last two centuries mankind has gotten used to cheap but
polluting energy provided by burning coal, gas and oil. The challenge arises in the form of the transition of our current economy
towards a sustainable way of living. Renewable energy sources such
as wind, tidal currents, the sun and geothermal heat have seen enourmous growth rates since the early nineties, as they are seen as
the best approach to overcome this challenge.
Of these renewable energy sources, wind energy is one that has received major attention. In the quest for expanding wind energy
capacity, focus has shifted towards the sea in recent years. The
potential energy yield is higher off-shore caused by higher average wind speeds. Maintenance and availability are key issues offshore, due to the more complex logistics. In recent years, the price
of on-shore wind energy has decreased to a level that is competitive with prices for energy from some types of fossil fuel. However,
the prices for off-shore wind energy remain above the ones of fossil
fuels. It is, thus, not surprising that the reduction of off-shore wind
energy costs is one of the main innovation drivers within the wind
industry.
With the advent of off-shore wind energy more and more companies started investigating a new turbine topology called direct-drive
wind turbines. This turbine type eliminates the gearbox found in
other types of wind turbines, as this might lead to increased availability and lower maintenance costs.
In the search for the best design of direct-drive wind turbines, every
part of the turbine is investigated, analysed, measured and optimised to improve the functionality of that part. At the heart of the
turbine, where the mechanical is transformed into electrical energy, is the generator. Also this component needs to be optimised
with respect to weight and efficiency.
This thesis aims to find the structural design that optimally utilises the mass of the generator structure to minimise deformation.
This is done for the dynamic loads encountered in the generator.
Special focus is given to the interaction between the structural dynamics and the magnetic field. This is important as the interaction
iv
between these two physical domains can lead to unexpected dynamic behaviour of the system.
In Part I of this thesis, the modelling techniques that accurately
include the interaction between the structural part of the turbine
and the magnetic field in the generator are introduced. These techniques can, for the first time, predict the modal parameter changes,
including damping changes, due to the interaction by forming a
monolithic eigenvalue problem of the coupled system. The model
neglects certain nonlinear influences on the dynamics, such as hysteresis and saturation. Its ability to predict changes of the modal
parameters is validated by vibration measurements of a magnetomechanical coupled system.
Furthermore, this part develops new methods to handle huge magneto-mechanical coupled models that emerge when magnetic fields
and structural dynamics of a direct-drive wind turbine are modelled. The bottleneck is the memory requirements of the monolithic formulation that makes it necessary to solve for all degrees of
freedom simultaneously.
Part II applies the techniques developed in Part I to the generator
of the XD-115, a 5 MW direct-drive wind turbine and conducts the
first two-way coupled analysis of such a generator type. The detailed dynamic analysis of the generator gives new insights in the
dynamic behaviour of the generator. Furthermore, the eigenfrequencies, modes and possible causes for excitation are identified.
An experimental validation of the XD-115 models was conducted
using in-situ experimental and operation modal analyses. Various
techniques are compared for the challenging task of exciting the
rotor structure.
In the second part of Part II, the loads identified during the dynamic analysis are used as load case for a structural optimisation.
Topology and shape optimisation were used to identify the optimal
mass distribution for the rotor structure that minimises the deformation in the air gap. This way, the weight of the structure could
be reduced significantly without compromising the static and dynamic performance of the generator structure. During the optimisation the suitability and potential of topology optimisation for
direct-drive wind turbines was evaluated.
Although the introduced methodology can be applied to any electric machine, the implications for direct-drive wind turbine generators are most significant, as for these machines the ratio between
produced torque and weight is especially high. Important influences on and encountered challenges for improving the design are
collected to improve future turbine designs.
v
Samenvatting
De groeiende bevolking op aarde werpt de kwestie op, hoe de mensheid toegang krijgt tot goedkope, duurzame energie. Groeimarkten
zoals China, India of Brazilië stillen deze dorst met goedkopere fossielen brandstoffen of kernenergie. Tegelijkertijd waarschuwen wetenschappers overal ter wereld voor een nieuwe wereldwijde ramp:
de klimaatverandering.
Tijdens de afgelopen twee eeuwen is de mensheid gewend geraakt
aan goedkope maar vervuilende energie. De toekomstige uitdaging schuit in de transitie van een economie gebaseerd op fossiele
energie naar een duurzame. Duurzame energie zoals windenergie,
zonne-energie, aardwarmte of getijdenenergie kennen een enorme
groei sinds de jaren negentig, omdat zij als beste alternatief worden
gezien om de fossiele uitdaging aan te gaan.
Van de genoemde duurzame energiebronnen heeft windkracht verreweg de meeste aandacht ontvangen. De zoektocht naar nieuwe
locaties voor windturbines werd in de afgelopen jaren naar zee uitgebreid. De mogelijke energieopbrengsten zijn hoger op zee vanwege de gemiddeld hogere windsnelheden. Onderhoud en beschikbaarheid van windturbines zijn essentiële aspecten op zee, omdat
de logistiek op deze locaties ingewikkelder is. In de afgelopen jaren
is de prijs van windenergie op land gedaald tot een niveau dat kan
concurreren met olie- of kolengestookte energieproductie. Daarentegen zijn de kosten van windenergie op zee nog steeds hoger
dan die van energie uit fossiele energiebronnen. Daarom zijn de
stroomkosten een van de hoofdredenen voor innovatie in offshore
windenergie.
Met de introductie van offshore windenergie overwegen steeds meer
bedrijven een nieuwe turbinesoort, namelijk de direct-drive windturbine. Direct-drive windturbines hebben geen versnellingsbak
tussen generator en wieken/wiekennaaf zoal in andere turbinesoorten. Dit zou mogelijk kunnen leiden to hogere beschikbaarheid en
lagere onderhouds- en energiekosten.
Voor de optimalisatie van het design van direct-drive windturbines
is een analyse van elk onderdeel op mogelijke verbeteringen noodzakelijk. Een essentieel deel van elke windturbine is de generator,
waar de mechanische energie in elektrische energie wordt omgezet. Zoals elk ander onderdeel wordt ook de generator kritisch beschouwd. Vooral de optimalisatie ten aanzien van efficiëntie en
gewicht zijn belangrijk.
Dit proefschrift heeft de doelstelling om de generatorstructuur van
windturbines, met optimaal gebruik van massa, te minimaliseren
voor de deformatie ten gevolgen van dynamische belastingen. De
vi
wisselwerking tussen magnetisch veld en structuurdynamica krijgt
daarbij bijzondere aandacht, vanwege het onverwachte gedrag als
gevolg van deze afhankelijkheden tussen deze twee aspecten.
In Deel I van dit proefschrift worden modelleringstechnieken geïntroduceerd, die een nauwkeurig berekening van de interactie tussen structuur dynamica en het magnetisch veld mogelijk maken.
Met behulp van een monolitisch eigenwaardeprobleem kan men
voor het eerst de verandering van de modale parameters van het gekoppelde systeem ten opzichte van het ongekoppelde systeem berekenen. De modeleringstechnieken laten de niet-lineaire effecten,
zoals magnetische verzadiging en hysterese buiten beschouwing.
De methoden zijn gevalideerd aan de hand van metingen aan een
gekoppeld magneto-mechanisch systeem.
Vervolgens ontwikkelt Deel I nieuwe methoden voor de modelreductie van grote magnetische en magnetisch-mechanisch gekoppelde eindige element modellen. Het grote aantal elementen is nodig voor een nauwkeurige beschrijving van de interactie tussen de
structuurdynamica en het magnetisch veld. De uitdaging is de grote
behoefte aan geheugencapaciteit voor het monolitisch eigenwaardeprobleem.
Deel II past de methoden, die in Deel I ontwikkeld zijn, toe op de
generator van de XD-115, een 5 megawatt windturbine. Een gedetailleerde analyse van de generator heeft nieuwe inzichten in de
dynamica van dit onderdeel geleverd. Daarnaast zijn de resonantiefrequenties, modale vormen en mogelijke excitatie bronnen geïdentificeerd. De experimentele validatie van de modellen is door
middel van trillingsmetingen ter plaatse gedaan. Verschillende technieken voor de excitatie van de generator zijn getest en geëvalueerd.
Vervolgens worden in Deel II de magnetisch krachten, die tijdens
de metingen en simulaties zijn geïdentificeerd, gebruikt voor een
optimalisatie van de generatorstructuur. Topologie- en vormoptimalisatie zijn toegepast om de optimale massaverdeling te vinden
voor het minimaliseren van de vervormingen in de luchtspleet. Op
deze manier is het gewicht van de generator aanzienlijk verminderd
zonder daarbij de functionaliteit te beïnvloeden. Tijdens de optimalisatie werd de geschiktheid van topologieoptimalisatie voor de
verbetering van het design van generatoren in windturbines geëvalueerd.
Hoewel de methoden op elke elektrische machine kunnen worden
toegepast, hebben zij in het bijzonder een grote implicatie voor
direct-drive generatoren, omdat de verhouding tussen aandrijfmoment en massa zeer hoog is. Belangrijke invloeden op de dynamica
van generatoren en andere geïdentificeerde uitdagingen zijn verzameld voor de verbetering van toekomstige windturbines.
vii
Zusammenfassung
Die wachsende Erbevölkerung wirft die Frage auf, wie die Menschheit mit günstiger und erneuerbarer Energie versorgt werden kann.
Wachstumsmärkte, wie China, Indien oder Brasilien, decken ihren
Bedarf an Energie mit fossilen Energieträgern oder durch Kernenergie. Gleichzeitig warnen Wissenschaftler auf der ganzen Welt
vor einem neuen, weltumspannenden Desaster: dem Klimawandel.
In den letzten zwei Jahrhunderten hat sich die Menschheit an billige, aber Umweltbelastende Energiequellen gewöhnt. Die Herausforderung ist der Übergang von dieser auf fossilen Quellen basierten hin zu einer nachhaltigen Wirtschaft. Erneuerbare Energien,
aus Sonne, Wind, Gezeiten oder Geothermie, haben enorme Zuwächse erreicht seit Anfang der Neunziger, da sie als bestes Mittel
zur Bewältigung der fossilen Herausforderung gesehen werden.
Von den genannten erneuerbaren Energien hat Windkraft große
Aufmerksamkeit erhalten. Die Suche nach neuen Standorten für
Windräder wurde in den letzten Jahren auf die Meere ausgeweitet. Die möglichen Energieerträge sind auf See höher wegen der
höheren Windgeschwindigkeiten. Wartung und Verfügbarkeit der
Windkraftanlagen sind wichtige Aspekte auf See, weil die Logistik
an diesen Standorten komplexer ist. In den vergangenen Jahren ist
der Preis von on-shore Windenergie stark gesunken auf ein Niveau
das mit fossilen Energieträgern wettbewerbsfähig ist. Im Gegegensatz dazu ist der Preis von off-shore Windenergie immer noch höher als konkurrierende öl- oder kohlebasierte Energieproduktion.
Daher sind die Energiekosten einer der Hauptgründe für Innovationen bei off-shore Windenergie.
Mit dem Aufkommen von off-shore Windenergie haben sich immer mehr Turbinenhersteller einer neuen Turbinenart zugewandt.
Direkt getriebene Windräder verzichten auf das Getriebe zwischen
Generator und Flügelnaben, um die Verfügbarkeit zu erhöhen und
so die Wartungs- und Energiekosten zu senken.
Die Verbesserung des Designs von direkt getriebenen Windrädern
macht eine Überprüfung jedes Bauteils auf mögliche Verbesserungen notwendig. Zentrales Bauteil eines jeden Windrades ist der Generator, in dem die mechanische in elektrische Energie umgesetzt
wird. Insbesondere die Optimierung des Generators hinsichtlich
der Effizienz und des Gewichtes sind interessant.
Diese Dissertation befasst sich mit der Optimierung der Generatorstruktur hinsichtlich der optimalen Nutzung der Masse, um Verformungen durch dynamische Lasten so weit wie möglich zu vermeiden. Die Wechselwirkung zwischen dem magnetischem Feld
im Generator und der Strukturdynamik findet dabei besondere Be-
viii
achtung, da diese unerwartetes Verhalten des Systems zur Folge haben kann.
In Teil I werden die Modellierungstechniken, die die präzise Berechnung der Wechselwirkung zwischen magnetischem Feld und
Strukturdynamik ermöglichen, eingeführt. Diese Techniken können erstmalig die Veränderungen der modalen Parameter, inklusive Veränderung der Dämpfung, des gekoppelten Systems gegenüber ungekoppelten Systemen berechnen. Die Modellierungsmethoden vernachlässigen nichtlineare Effekte, wie magnetische Sättigung und Hysterese. Die Genauigkeit der Methode wird anschließend durch Labormessungen bestätigt.
Des weiteren entwickelt Teil I neue Methoden zur Modellreduktion von großen magnetischen und magnetisch-mechanisch gekoppelten Finiten Elemente Modellen. Diese Modelle entstehen, wenn
die Interaktion zwischen der Struktrudynamik und dem magnetischen Feld berechnet wird. Die Herausforderung bei diesen Modellen besteht im großen Speicherbedarf bei der monolithischen
Formulierung des Eigenwertproblems.
Teil II wendet die in Teil I eingeführten Methoden auf die XD-115,
eine 5 MW direkt getriebene Windkraftanlage, an und führt erstmalig eine analyse der gekoppelten Dynamik eines solchen Generators durch. Eine detaillierte dynamische Analyse des Generators
gab neue Einsichten in die Dynamik des Generators. Des weiteren
werden die Resonanzfrequenzen, Eigenschwingformen und mögliche Anregungsquellen identifiziert. Eine experimentelle Validierung der Modelle wurde durch Schwingungsmessungen vor Ort erreicht. Verschiedene Anregungstechniken für den Generator wurden getestet und evaluiert.
Weiterhin werden in Teil II die während der Messungen und Simulation identifizierten magnetischen Kräfte für eine Optimierung
der Generatorstruktur genutzt. Topologie- und Parameteroptimierung wurden verwendet, um die optimale Massenverteilung zur
Minimierung der Luftspaltverformung zu finden. Auf diese Weise konnte das Gewicht des Generators erheblich reduziert werden,
ohne die Funktionalität des Generators zu beeinflussen. Dabei wurde das Potential von Topologieoptimierung für die Verbesserung
des Designs von Generatoren von Windkraftanlagen evaluiert.
Obwohl die Methoden auf jede elektrische Maschine anwendbar
sind, haben sie die größte Auswirkung auf direkt getriebene Windkraftanlagen, da hier das Verhältnis zwischen Drehmoment und
Masse besonders hoch ist. Wichtige Einflüsse auf die Dynamik von
Generator von Windkraftanlagen und identifizierte Herausforderungen wurde zusammen getragen für die Verbesserung zuünftiger Turbinen.
ix
Acknowledgement
When I started studying in 2005, I would have contradicted anyone
strongly who told me I would end up doing a PhD. The idea was
planted into my head by Prof. Mark A. Shannon, my supervisor
during a summer internship at the University of Illinois, who sadly
passed away in 2012. At that time I discovered that I have a liking
for the working style that is required for Master and PhD theses.
Besides Marc Shannon, there are several individuals whose input
were crucial for finishing this thesis. These person I would like to
thank at this place.
First, I would like to thank my supervisors Daniel Rixen, Henk
Polinder and Ron van Ostayen, for all their support and the good
ideas. Thank you for the quick answers to my questions from where
ever you were in the work at that moment and for asking all the
question during our meetings that always made me rethink my argumentation, in particular the parts that seemed clear to me but
turned out not to be.
I would like to thank all my colleagues at the TU Delft for their support and technical knowledge they provided for this thesis. I will
never forget the various activities at conferences, in the weekends
and the many fun nights in Delft for which I stayed out longer than
I should have.
In addition, I would like to thank the staff of XEMC-Darwind for
their support during the measurements in the turbine and the help
organising them. In particular, I would like to thank Jan Kastelijn
who helped me conduct the measurements in the turbine, carried
the equipment to the nacelle and was even willing to stay until 10
pm to finish my measurements.
Furthermore, I would like to thank my master students, Anoop and
Didier, I had the honour to supervise during the last 4 years.
Finally, I would like to thank my parents, Christa and Erich Kirschneck, and my sister, Katharina Kirschneck, who have supported me
during the last four years. Sorry, that you mainly experienced the
bad times when things were not going as planned. Thank you for
your support especially in those hours when I wondered why I started doing a PhD and I was on the phone again complaining.
Michael Kirschneck
Delft, September 2015
Abstract
iii
Samenvatting
Zusammenfassung
1
v
vii
Acknowledgement
ix
Nomenclature
xii
Introduction
1.1
1
I Modelling Magneto-Mechanical Coupled
Dynamics
20
2
Modelling Techniques
21
2.1
Introduction
22
Bigger, Higher, Further Off-shore – Trends in
Wind Turbines
2
2.2
Basic Magnetic Field Modelling
23
1.2
Generators in Wind Turbines
6
2.3
Lumped Magneto-Mechanical Systems
30
1.3
Magneto-Mechanical Coupling and Vibrations
2.4
Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical
in Electric Machines
10
1.4
Problem Definition
14
2.5
Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical
1.5
Thesis Outline
15
Coupling
58
1.6
Scientific Contributions
18
2.6
Linearized Coupled Eigenvalue Problem
83
2.7
Summary
84
Coupling
3
4
36
Experimental Validation
85
3.1
Introduction
86
3.2
The Test Set Up
86
3.3
Verification Measurements
92
3.4
3D Finite Element Model
96
3.5
Results
97
3.6
Summary
97
Model Reduction
99
4.1
Introduction
100
4.2
Modal Analysis for Quasi-Static Magnetic Fields
102
4.3
Introduction to Model Order Reduction and
4.4
Linear Reduction Methods Based on Modal
Analysis
114
4.5
Application to the 600 W Ampair Wind Turbine
121
4.6
Reduction of Magneto-Mechanical Coupled
Systems
125
4.7
Discussion
130
4.8
Summary
131
Dynamic Substructuring
107
II Application to Large Off-Shore
Wind Turbine Generators
134
5
135
6
Application to the XD-115
III Discussion and Conclusions
224
7
Design Considerations
225
5.1
Introduction
136
7.1
Introduction
226
5.2
The XD-115 Wind Turbine
137
7.2
The Influence of Bearings
227
5.3
The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
139
7.3
The Influence of the Static Magnetic Field
229
5.4
Experimental Validation
161
7.4
Excitation by Magnetic Forces
231
5.5
Conclusion
185
7.5
Cyclic Symmetry
233
5.6
Summary
187
7.6
Summary
234
Optimisation
189
8
Conclusions and Outlook
235
6.1
Introduction
190
8.1
Conclusions
236
6.2
The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
192
8.2
Research Outlook
239
6.3
Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
204
6.4
Double Bearing Configurations
216
6.5
Conclusions & Summary
219
Appendix A - Magnetic Energy in Deformable Structure
245
Appendix B - Measurements
257
Appendix C - Magnetic Torque Harmonics
261
Curriculum Vitae
267
References
268
xii
Nomenclature
Notation Convention
In this thesis, a lot of algebra is used to explain the mathematical
methods used. In this thesis, scalars are denoted by regular letters.
Small letters stand for a value per cubic meter or square meter, i.e.
a density, whereas capitalised letters denote the total quantity. For
example, f stands for a force density whereas F denotes a force.
Because the theory is first explained in a continuous analytical way
and then in a numerical way, this thesis distinguishes between numerical vectors, which denote a set of nodal values, and analytical
vectors, which denote a direction at a certain point of a vector field.
Bold roman letters, F, denote the numerical vectors, whereas ⃗f denotes the vector of a vector field.
Matrices are denoted by a bold capital letter M, whereas tensors are
denoted by a double underlined letter, T. Block diagonal matrices
are indicated by diag(●, ●). For instance
X
diag(X, Y) = [
0
⎡m
⎢ 1
⎢
diag(mm ) = ⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
0
]
Y
⋱
⎤
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎥
mm ⎥⎦
The transposed of a matrix is indicated by the superscript T:
T
0
[
Y
X
0
] =[ T
0
X
YT
]
0
In some equations the Einstein notation or index notation is used.
This notation sums over an index if that index appears twice in a
term. The inner product of the two vectors ⃗x and ⃗y is thus given by
∑ xi yi = xi yi
i
The integral sign is used only once even when the integration domain is two dimensional or three dimensional. The domain is indicated below the integration sign and its dimension becomes clear
from the context.
tr(●) denotes the trace of a tensor or matrix, defined as
x
tr ([ 11
x21
x12
]) = x11 + x22
x22
The imaginary number is denoted by i.
xiii
A variation of a quantity is denote by δ. When a certain other
quantity, x, is constant under the variation δ, this is indicated by
δ(●)∣δx=0
General meaning of sub- and superscripts, unless otherwise noted in context
(●)(s)
●b
●A
ˆ
●
●s
Belonging to substructure s
Boundary
Magnetic
Amplitude, especially of sinusoidal functions
quantity on side s of an interface
●i
●u
̃
●
ˇ
●
Internal
Structural
Reduced
Block diagonal form
[●]x
skew symmetric matrix for cross product
FEM
LCOE
LDV
MMF
MOR
MTA
OMA
PM
POD
Finite Element Method
Levelised Cost of Energy
Laser Doppler Vibrometer
Magneto Motive Force
Model Order Reduction
Mode Truncation Augmentation
Operational Modal Analysis
Permanent Magnet
Proper Orthogonal Decomposition
POM
POV
SSI
SVD
TF
Proper Orthogonal Modes
Proper Orthogonal Value
Stochastic Subspace Identification
Singular Value Decomposition
Transfer Function
Often Used Abbreviations
ACB
CB
CMS
CVA
DCB
DFIG
DOF
DS
EFDD
FDD
FRF
EM
EMA
DAQ
FE
Augmented Craig Bampton Method
Craig Bampton Method
Component Mode Synthesis
Canonical Variate Analysis
Dual-Crag-Bampton Method
Doubly Fed Induction Generator
Degrees of Freedom
Dynamic Substructuring
Enhanced Frequency Domain Decomposition
Frequency Domain Decomposition
Frequency Response Function
Electro-Magnetic
Experimental Modal Analysis
Data Acquisition System
Finite Element
xiv
List of Symbols
nb
Ab
E∗
Fbearing
Felem
Pnom
Tnom
δ
kbearing
ωref
⃗fb,rad
⃗fmag,dyn
Discrete normal vector of raceway
5.8
Surface of bearing raceway
5.7
Equivalent Young’s modulus
5.1
Total bearing force
5.5
Force per bearing element
5.1
Nominal power of turbine
1.1
Nominal turbine torque
1.3
Indentation of bearing element
5.1
Bearing stiffness matrix
5.8
Reference frequency for normalisation
5.20
Bearing force density, radial on race way 5.7
Dynamic magnetic force applied to rotor 5.17
⃗fmag,stat
⃗frel
fpos
kelem
lblade
lelem
nb
npoles
nslots
nsym
nsym
rr,out
Static magnetic force applied to rotor
radial - tangential relation vector
Position of Magnets
Stiffness of bearing element
Length of turbine blade
Length of bearing element
Normal vector on bearing raceway
Number of poles
Number of slots
number of cyclo-symmetric parts
number of cyclo-symmetric parts
Outer radius of rotor
ΦB
Ψelt
Ψmag
ρ
ε
σ
τ
Ξ
T
⃗
A
⃗
B
⃗r
B
⃗
D
⃗
E
⃗′
E
⃗i
E
⃗s
E
⃗
Fmag
⃗
H
⃗j
⃗j
⃗jsource
⃗jsurface
⃗
n
⃗v
dWeddy
dWfric
fmag
Hpm
ic
Nc
q
Rc
u
V
V
vext
vind
Wcoil
Total magnetic flux
Electric enthalpy
Magnetic enthalpy
Density
Strain tensor
Stress Tensor
Shear Stress
Material Stiffness Tensor
Maxwell’s stress tensor
Magnetic Vector Potential
Magnetic Flux Density
Remanent flux density
Displacement Field
Electric Field
Electric field in structure reference frame
Irrotational electric field
Solenoidal electric field eddy currents
Total force on an object
Magnetic Field
Current Density
Eddy current density
Source term for magnetic field
Current sheet on interface
Normal vector of an interface
Velocity field of a structure
Energy change due to eddy currents
Energy change due to friction
Scalar magnetic force
Magnetic field within a magnet
Current in a coil
Winding number of a coil
Electric Charge Density
Resistance of coil
Scalar displacement
Electric Potential
Volume of domain
External voltage applied to coil
Induced voltage in coil
External energy of a coil
5.16
5.16
5.16
5.3
1.1
5.1
5.7
5.9
5.9
5.11
5.17
5.15
Magneto Mechanical Coupling
Γ
γ
γ
Γc
Γw
Γw
λ
λc
D
Dmag
Fcoil
Fpm
R
T
Tmag
Velt
Vext
Vint
Ξ
Bu
Dk
N
μ
C
K
M
γ
Φ
BA
B2u
F2
F3
mag
Kuu
fext
Nu,s
q
qc
Ωc
Ωc
Boundary with mechanical b.c.
Conductivity
Electric conductivity
Cross section of coil core
Cross section of coil
Cross section of coil
Eigenvalue of the dynamic system
Flux linkage of a coil
Dissipation function
Dissipation function of eddy currents
Magneto motive force of a coil
Magneto motive force of a magnet
Reluctance
Kinetic energy
Kinetic Energy
Electric potential energy
Total external energy potential
Potential internal energy
Material Stiffness Matrix
Matrix of shape fun. spatial derivatives
Matrix of mech. damping coefficients
Shape function
Permeability of a lin. magnetic material
The damping Matrix
The tangent stiffness Matrix
The mass Matrix
Conductivity matrix
Matrix of eigenvectors
Derivatives of magnetic shape functions
Derivative of mechanical shape function
Derivatives of magnetic shape functions
Derivatives of magnetic shape functions
Magnetic structural stiffness
Nodal values of forces applied externally
shape function to discretise Γsigma
DoFs of discrete system
Discrete values of coil current
Coil Domain
Coil Domain
2.36
2.38
2.4b
2.50
2.52
2.53
2.171
2.16
2.118
2.81
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.59
2.106
2.113
2.64
2.59
2.129
2.128
2.133
2.104
2.5
2.126
2.126
2.126
2.140
2.171
2.135
2.155
2.158
2.159
2.130
2.132
2.132
2.104
2.146
2.52
2.53
2.14
2.113
2.114
2.35
2.34
2.34
2.34
2.34
2.98
2.38
2.3d
2.6
2.3d
2.3d
2.4b
2.2
2.4b
2.101
2.1
2.1
2.46
2.4b
2.48
2.48
2.4b
2.60
2.62
2.17
2.13
2.12
2.50
2.2
2.49
2.16
2.40
2.92
2.49
2.49
2.60
xv
Wex,m
W′ex,m
Wext,m
Wint
Wmag,lin
Wmag,pm
Wmag
Exchanged energy
Exchanged co-energy
External mechanical energy
Internal energy
Energy of linear magnetic field
Total energy within a permanent magnet
Total magnetic energy
2.28
2.30
2.62
2.59
2.66
2.33
2.20
wmag
W′mag
Wmech
wpm,0
wpm
Wstrain
Wtot
Specific magnetic energy
Total magnetic co-energy
Internal mechanical energy
Internal specific energy of PM
Specific magnetic energy of a PM
Strain energy
Total energy of the system
2.8
2.22
2.59
2.10
2.10
2.59
2.63
4.2
4.1
4.49
4.44
4.44
4.36
4.36
4.31
4.32
4.36
4.30
4.26
4.29
4.32
4.51
4.19
4.15
4.14
4.14
4.14
4.14
4.1
4.3
4.14
gγ
J
Jeddy,m
q
qhom
uγ
ωr
ωext
ωr,cpl
Φr
̃
C
̃f
̃
g
̃
K
̃
M
cm
km
kr
kr
mr
mr
Wex,m,r
Wr
Unique interface forces/currents
Nodal Values of external current Density
Eddy Currents of mth mode
DoFs of the system
Homogenous solution
Unique interface DoFs
eigenfrequency of the rth mode
Excitation frequency
Coupled eigenfrequency of the rth mode
Participationfactor of the rth mode
Reduced Damping Matrix
Reduced external forces
Reduced interface forces
Reduced Stiffness Matrix
Reduced Mass Matrix
Modal magnetic damping factor
Modal magnetic stiffness
Modal structural stiffness
modal stiffness of the rth mode
Modal structural mass
modal mass of the rth mode
Exchange energy for rth mode
Energy for rth mode
4.26
4.2
4.10
4.1
4.5
4.19
4.51
4.6
4.55
4.50
4.16
4.17
4.17
4.16
4.16
4.6
4.6
4.6
4.52
4.6
4.49
4.53
4.54
6.12
6.19
6.25
6.25
6.37
6.13
ρn
gconstr
gobj
vn
Wdyn
Density associated with a node
Constraint function
Objective Function
Volume associated with a node
Dynamic mechanical energy
6.35
6.12
6.6
6.35
6.9
Model Reduction
Φ
ηm
ηr
Ccpl
Kcpl
Φf
Φr
ΦCB
ΦM
Ψr
Ψs
Bb
D
F
KAΦ
Lb
R
qb
qi
qr
qr
φm
φm
gb
Column matrix of modes
Modal DoF
Participation factor of the rth mode
Multi-physical damping coupling matrix
Multi-physical stiffness coupling matrix
Free vibration modes
Rigid body modes
Fixed interface used for CB reduction
Column matrix of MTAs
Residual attachment modes
Static condensation matrix
Signed Boolean assembly matrix
Collocation Matrix
Column matrix of applied Forces
Coupling Matrix for spectral expansion
Boolean assembly matrix
Reduction Matrix
Boundary DoFs
Internal DoFs
Non reduced DoFs
Reduced DoFs
mth Mode
mth eigen value
Forces/Currents between substructures
Optimisation
χ
λ
ξ
ζ
qu,0
ρf
Indicator function
Adjoint Variable
Adjoint Variable
Adjoint Variable
Static Solution
Density design parameters
xvi
’Of all the forces of nature, I should think the wind contains the largest amount of motive
power.’
Abraham Lincoln 1860
Introductio
1
2
I
1 Introduction
1.1
Bigger, Higher, Further Off-shore – Trends in Wind
Turbines
Introduction
Since the beginning of the utilisation of wind as a power source
back in the first millennium, the technology employed has undergone quite some significant improvements. The rate of change has
increased over the last 40 years since the technology became a focus
of the renewable energies development.
1.1.1
A Short History of Wind Energy
When looking at recent developments in and the ongoing discussion about wind energy, one can easily be mislead to think that
wind energy has been developed only recently. In fact, windmills
and the concept of harvesting the wind for work is much older.
There are speculations about the existence of wind mills 3000 years
ago [78]. The first reliable information about windmills dates back
to 644 A.D. [49].
The horizontal axis wind mills, the one which is most commonly
used even today, is probably a European invention [58]. The first
reliable information dates back to 1180 about a windmill in Normandy. Another source points to Brabant where a post windmill
was supposedly built as early as 1119 [58]. These early European
post windmills were made entirely of wood. The tower windmill,
which made its appearances about two centuries later, consists of a
stone tower, on which the wind wheel rests. According to [58], this
windmill spread across Europe starting in the south of France.
In the 16th century, the ”Dutch windmill” was developed in the
Netherlands. This windmill consisted of a fixed mill house. Only
the wooden top of the house and the wind wheel were rotated into
the wind for operation. This system was improved until the middle
of the 19th century and they can still be seen throughout the Netherlands today.
At the end of the 19th and the beginning of the 20th century the
development of windmills slowed. Steam engines and combustion
engines took over power production and energy production at that
time, eliminating the necessity to harvest the wind for power. However, the development of the first wind mill producing electricity
falls into this time span, which was done by Poul La Cour in 1891
[58].
The idea of wind mills gained popularity again in the 70s after the
first oil crisis. Consequently, development of new types of wind
turbines picked up again. In Denmark, due to the idea of decentralized power production in rural areas, there was a tradition of
installed capacity in MW
1.1 Bigger, Higher, Further Off-shore – Trends in Wind Turbines
10000
3
installed capacity on-shore
installed capacity off-shore
5000
1000
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014
year
building small three bladed wind turbines for farms. Small companies that were producing these turbines throughout the whole
20th century (e.g. Vestas) started to increase their business in the
70s [58]. Since then the installed capacity of wind turbines has
increased enormously. Fig. 1.1 shows the development of the installed wind turbines in Europe since 2000. Together with the installed capacity in total, the rated power of each turbine increased
over the years as well.
Figure 1.1
Annual total Installed wind turbine
capacity in Europe. [42, 54]
The first off-shore wind farm was inaugurated in 1991 [43]. Until
2001 the major share of installed capacity was contributed by near
shore projects in Denmark and the Netherlands. In 2001 the first
”utility scale” off-shore wind farm went on-line. Since then, the installed annual capacity has increased tremendously. In 2014 a capacity of 1483 MW was installed in Europe. For the future, predictions state that the installed capacity will increase further, reaching
a total European capacity of 40 GW and an annual energy production of 148.2 TWh by 2020 [43]. The largest part of the off-shore
capacity will be installed in Germany and the UK.
cost reduction – the driving force behind innovation in wind
energy
Since the first wind park in 1980 [154], wind energy had a reputation of being an expensive alternative to energy production based
on fossil fuels and nuclear energy. While this might have been the
case in the beginnings of wind energy, the prices of on-shore wind
energy have dropped to a level which is very much competitive with
energy prices of coal and gas [80]. Off-shore wind energy is still
more expensive than the energy produced by on-shore wind turbines. The outlook into the future, according to [80], sees an increase in prices for coal and gas combined with a decrease of prices
1.1.2
4
1 Introduction
120
600
400
200
Distance to Shore [km]
Capacity of windfarm [MW]
100
Geared Turbine: 0.5,2,4 MW
Direct-Drive Turbine: 0.5,2,4 MW
80
60
40
20
0
1993
1999
2004
2010
2015
date of construction
Figure 1.2
Capacity of windfarms, individual
turbine size, water depth and date
of construction of off-shore wind
farms in the UK, Germany,
Denmark, The Netherlands and
Sweden. The size of the marker
indicates the individual turbine
size. Data from [172]
for wind energy. Nontheless off-shore energy will remain more expensive than coal power in the near future. The incentive to invest
in off-shore wind energy does thus not originate from a decreased
levelised cost of energy (LCOE) but from the large amount of possible turbine sites. Additionally, off-shore wind turbines do not face
opposition by local residents, which leads to discussion and rejection of on-shore turbine projects.
Analysing the LCOE only gives a distorted picture of the real cost
of energy, as it does not include additional costs, so called external
costs. For each energy source there are certain additional costs that
have to be taken into account for the total cost of energy. For fossil
fuel based power sources this includes the environmental cost as
well as transporting the fuel to the power plant. However, the energy can be produced close to the customer decreasing the cost for
electrical transmission lines. For wind energy, the source of the energy, i.e. wind, is free, but the energy is not readily available at all
times and needs under certain circumstances be transported from
the location where it is produced to the customer (This triggered
a nation wide discussion in Germany, where an extension of the
power grid is strongly opposed by some parts of the population and
politicians, mainly in Bavaria [7]). [121] is a report for the European
commission quantifying the external costs of various sources of energy. It lists the external cost for coal and oil at 4 and 5 Euro cent per
kWh, while the external cost for wind energy are listed at around
0.1 - 0.2 Euro cent per kWh.
The external costs of nuclear power are difficult to calculate. Estimates for decommissioning range widely and costs for long-term
waste storage are unknown [25]. Furthermore, no insurance for
1.1 Bigger, Higher, Further Off-shore – Trends in Wind Turbines
nuclear power plants is available, as the possible liabilities in case
of a worst scenario are too high to be insured. Therefore, the government insures these kinds of accidents indirectly by helping victims of nuclear disasters, as happened in Fukushima, Japan. It can
be argued that these are hidden costs that do not appear on the bill
for nuclear energy and, hence, distort the picture that LCOE give
about the prices of nuclear energy.
Although the cost of wind energy has already decreased by a factor
of 5 since the 1980s [83], there is still a strong incentive for wind
turbine manufacturers to decrease the cost of energy. Utility companies strive to maximise their profit. A reduction of production
cost is only beneficial for that goal. Because wind turbines and wind
turbine technology has received little attention at the beginning of
the 20th century, its technology is less developed than the one of
fossil fuel based power production. The potential for cost reduction in wind turbines is thus considered to be larger compared to
conservative power production methods.
In off-shore wind energy, there are two trends visible to reach this
goal.
1. The wind parks tend to locations further away from shore in
deeper waters (see Fig. 1.2 for the trend towards larger distances to shore). At those locations the average wind speeds
are higher than at locations closer to shore [35]. Higher average wind speed amounts to more kinetic energy in the wind.
More energy can, therefore, be harvested from the same rotor diameter, leading to generators with a higher nominal
power.
2. Larger wind turbines entail decreasing maintenance costs,
because less individual turbines need to be maintained in a
wind farm of the same capacity. This trend can be seen in
Fig. 1.2 by an increasing size of marker towards the right of
the plot and also in Fig. 1.3, which shows the average individual turbine capacity over the years.
Another idea that is currently debated in the industry is a transition
towards direct-drive wind turbines. This topology has the advantage that there is no gear box present in the turbine. [45] shows that
although the occurrence of gear box failures of wind turbines is not
the most common failure, it leads to the longest down time of all
failure types recorded. For off-shore turbines maintenance is especially expensive. Waiting times are longer, logistics more complex
and the weather plays a major role when planning repairs. Directdrive turbines are intended for off-shore use, as they promise to
decrease downtime and maintenance cost by eliminating gear box
failures.
5
1 Introduction
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010
2009
2008
2007
2006
2005
2004
2003
2002
2001
2000
1999
1998
1997
1996
1995
1994
1993
1992
500
1991
installed power in KW,
average of individual turbine
6
year
Figure 1.3
Average individual turbine
capacity of off-shore wind turbines
for Europe. Data from [42]
1.2
Fig. 1.2 shows that there are hardly any direct-drive wind turbine
off-shore wind farms at the moment. However, some manufacturers have developed direct-drive wind turbines mainly for their offshore business (Siemens, Alstom, XEMC-Darwind). Other manufacturers believe that geared topologies have an advantage even
for off-shore applications (Vestas, RePower, Gamesa). Enercon is
a special case, as they have been exclusively producing on-shore
direct-drive turbines since the early 90s. [76] gives an overview of
current direct-drive designs in use by the major wind turbine manufacturers.
Generators in Wind Turbines
The topology used for the drive train in a wind turbine determines
the type of the generator. It is, therefore, impossible to describe
developments and trends in wind turbine generator design without
looking at the wind turbine as a whole.
[9, 116, 117] give an overview over all generator topologies currently
in use as well as their advantages and drawbacks. The most important topologies at the moment are
• A fixed speed squirrel cage induction motor with a gear box.
No frequency converter is needed
• A variable speed doubly fed induction machine with a gear
box and a partly rated converter
• A variable speed direct-drive synchronous generator without
gear box and a full converter
• A variable speed turbine with gear box, a generator and a full
converter
1.2 Generators in Wind Turbines
7
The first topology in this list is an outdated topology that is no
longer used for new commercial scale multi-megawatt wind turbines.
As mentioned above, the direct-drive generator is currently debated among the off-shore turbine manufacturers. In this topology, the generator rotor rotates at the same speed as the blades.
The speed is determined by the tip speed ratio which is maintained
at a certain level to extract the most energy from the wind [58]. The
resulting low generator rotation speed requires a large torque in order to achieve the nominal power of the turbine. The generators for
direct-drive wind turbines are, therefore, very special machines as
these need to produce a very large torque at low rotation speeds.
The torque per unit surface in the air gap depends on the magnetic
flux density in the air gap. In order to produce this large torque a
large air gap surface is needed. This can be achieved by increasing
the axial length and the diameter of the machine.
Considering the trend towards larger turbines further off-shore, the
direct-drive topology might not be feasible any longer for larger
turbines. Assuming a linear relation between the mass of the drive
train and the torque, the mass would increase more than linearly
with an increase in nominal power. This can be shown with a short
calculation.
The nominal power of a turbine is determined by the surface that
the blades cover
Pnom ∝ l2blade
(1.1)
The rotation speed of the rotor is determined by the tip speed ratio
which is as close to an ideal figure as possible. The rotation speed
decreases thus with an increasing blade length
ω∝
1
lblade
(1.2)
The torque of the turbine is given by
Tnom =
Pnom
ω
(1.3)
Now it is possible to deduce that the torque will increase with the
exponent of 32 when the nominal power increases.
3
2
Tnom ∝ Pnom
(1.4)
The increased torque will lead to heavier constructions, as more
material is needed to transmit this torque. In order to ensure the
feasibility of direct-drive wind turbines for larger machines in the
future, the mass of the generator needs to be reduced dramatically.
[137] deduces the scaling laws in more detail of direct-drive generators for static forces and yields even larger exponents than above.
8
1 Introduction
Double vs. Single Bearing Topologies
1.2.1
There are various bearing topologies that are discussed for directdrive generators. Because of the size of the generator, distances
between parts where forces are applied and support structures, i.e.
bearings, can be larger than in generators with a higher rotation
speed. Various designs have been proposed for bearing placements.
[145] gives an overview of the various bearing placements and topologies, including designs with one, two, or even three bearings.
Coil
Coil
Nacelle
Blade
Magnet
Stator Stiffener
Rotor Stiffener
Hub
Nacelle
Blade
Magnet
Stator Stiffener
Rotor Stiffener
Hub
Bearing
Bearings
a) Schematic of a direct-drive single bearing wind turbine b) Schematic of a direct-drive kingpin design wind turbine
Figure 1.4
Various bearing topologies for
wind turbines
The two most used designs, the single bearing design and the king
pin design, will be discussed in more detail here.
The single bearing topology incorporates a single bearing that consequently supports the rotor in all three direction. Fig. 1.4a shows
a direct-drive generator that is supported by a single-bearing. This
bearing usually features a large diameter as this increases the leverage of the bearing elements while supporting the rotor against wind
induced torque and consequently reduces loads on the bearing elements.
The advantages of a single bearing design are its compactness in
axial direction and an easy access to the hub and thus to the blades,
which need to be accessed regularly for maintenance purposes. The
drawbacks are a highly complex bearing, due to its diameter. Slipping of bearing elements is difficult to avoid, because the diameter
difference between the inner and outer edge of the axial raceway is
large. This will likely increase the wear of the bearing elements.
The kingpin design features one bearing at the very front of the
hub that is supported by a long cone extending all the way on the
inside of the hub to its front. The other bearing is located within
the generator. In Fig. 1.4b such a design is shown. The location
1.2 Generators in Wind Turbines
9
of the bearings maximise the distance between the two bearings,
giving them more leverage while supporting the rotor against wind
induced torques. The smaller diameter of the bearings make each
of them simpler. The drawback is the more difficult access to the
blades that has to be done on the outside of the turbine.
Weight Reduction of Direct-Drive Wind Turbine Generators
In the past several approaches were suggested to reduce the weight
of direct-drive generators. The first step was to use a permanent
magnet generator instead of electrical excited generators which has
been done by Enercon since the early nineties [116].
Besides this method, which is widely used in the industry by now,
there exist a couple of methods that can be split up in four categories according to [136]:
Load or load path reduction: This approach aims to reduce the
amount of mass by decreasing the load on the structure by
changing the design of the support structure. This involves
either using iron less generators [143] or keeping the distance
between the air gap and the bearing of the rotor as small as
possible. [41, 136]
Size reduction: This method proposes to increase the current or
the flux in the air gap to produce the same amount of torque
at a smaller diameter and/or axial length of the generator.
Various ways to accomplish this increase in flux density have
been proposed. The methods include using superconducting
generators [1, 81, 101], better cooling by either forced air or
water cooling or transverse flux machines [37, 168]
Use of lighter materials: This approach uses light weight materials (mainly aluminium, carbon fibre) to reduce the weight
of the support structure. However, the price of these materials are significantly higher than the more commonly used
structural steel. The life cycle cost need therefore be carefully analysed. [100]
Flexibility: This method was proposed in [136] and [138]. The idea
is to use designed flexibility to reduce weight of the support
structure of the generator. The method can be applied to the
rotor as well as the stator side. [136] investigated the feasibility of this method taking static forces in the generator into
account
Besides the approaches above, there were several investigations on
optimising the support structure of direct-drive wind turbines. [145]
1.2.2
10
1 Introduction
gives an overview of all possible topologies for the support structure of direct-drive turbines, including topologies with one two
and three bearings. [104, 175, 176] covers structural optimisation
for direct-drive wind turbine generators and [118] developed a slipsynchronous permanent magnet generator.
1.2.3
Functions of the Generator Rotor Support Structure
The structure in the rotor of a direct-drive wind turbine generator
has to fulfil the following functions. The performance of a certain
design can thus be measured by how well these functions are fulfilled.
1. Hold the electro-magnetic active material in place relative
to other electro magnetic active parts on the rotor. This ensures that all electro-magnetic active parts move synchronously. The placement of the electro-magnetic active parts on
the rotor is crucial, because a displacement relative to each
other will influence the performance of the generator.
2. Transmit the torque generated by the blades from the hub
to the electro-magnetic active parts on the rotor, where the
electro-magnetic torque is applied to the structure.
3. Hold the electro-magnetic active parts in place relative to the
electro-magnetic parts on the stator, i.e. maintain the air gap
length between stator and rotor. To do this any attractive
forces between stator and rotor need to be transferred to the
supporting element that connects the rotor and the stator, i.e.
the bearing.
Another factor that influences the performance of the structure is
its weight and its cost. The three functions mentioned above should
be fulfilled with as little weight as necessary.
1.3
Magneto-Mechanical Coupling and Vibrations in
Electric Machines
The coupling between magnetic fields and the mechanical world
has been at the interest of research endeavours for as long as Maxwell’s Equations have been around. In fact, one of the original equations that Maxwell wrote down in 1865 was the Lorentz force equation [66, p. 22].
Since electric machines depend heavily on this interaction, it was
always at the heart of electric power generation as well as electric
motors. In that sense, the development and research on electric
1.3 Magneto-Mechanical Coupling and Vibrations in Electric Machines
11
machines was always also partial the research on magneto-mechanical coupling.
According to [148, p. 145], the derivation of the magnetic and electro static forces from an energy principle has first been proposed
by the Dutch mathematician Korteweg in 1880 [79]. It was further
developed by Helmholtz in [61]. Heaviside, who also brought Maxwell’s equations into the form we still use today, picked up the idea
and formed stress tensors from the idea in his work ’On the Forces,
Stresses, and Fluxes of Energy in the Electromagnetic Field’ [60].
In the beginning, the coupling could only be accounted for on a
global variable scale. The research on magneto-mechanical coupling changed radically when the finite element method was introduced both for electro magnetic fields and elastic deformations.
Now, it was possible to calculate local displacements and magnetic
fluxes and the magneto-mechanical coupling could be analysed on
a local level rather than a global level.
Computation of Magnetic Forces in Finite Elements
The first paper to exploit the finite element method to calculate
magnetic forces were J. Coulomb and G. Meunier in their papers
from 1983 and 1984 [27, 28]. They discuss the calculation of the
magnetic force acting on a body. For that, the principle of virtual work is used. They already discuss the problems arising using
Maxwell’s Stress Tensor and proposes most of the techniques introduced in Sec. 2.5.8. Further, the moving mesh associated with a
distorted body is mentioned. This method has been vastly implemented and is seen as the standard for calculating magnetic force in
either edge elements [17, 125] and other finite elements [107]. Various papers address the problem of comparing various formulas of
calculating forces [77, 105, 123]
[62] picks up the topic and includes the underlying material and its
deformation into his considerations. This is done for various magnetic materials including permanent magnets. It addresses a problem at the heart of the principle of virtual work which assumes a
virtual displacement. However, this displacement will have an influence on the magnetic field. This opens up the discussion about
energy and co-energy and how the magnetisation of permanent
magnets behaves under deformation.
[135] gives a detailed outline over surface forces between arbitrary
linear materials and permanent magnets.
1.3.1
12
1 Introduction
1.3.2
Modelling the Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
Besides [62], no-one of the above mentioned publications took into
account the effects of the displacement on the magnetic field formulation. [31, 32] formulates a linear coupling in both directions
for the static case. Although, it takes magnetostriction into account, the dynamic coupling terms are neglected. However, the
modal analysis done on the stator of an electric machine includes
modal participation factors, to describe which modes are excited
by a certain distribution of magnetic forces. It is, however, not a
coupled eigenvalue analysis.
[124] derives a fully coupled monolithic formulation for the interaction between mechanical deformation and magnetic fields. It is
applied to a simple system consisting of a yoke, a coil and a moving
armature. Belahcen extends this approach and uses it to analyse
electric machines [11–13, 48]. This formulation is used to calculate extensive time dependent problems of vibrational behaviour
of electric machines.
[36] and [120] derive the system equations for magneto-mechanical coupled systems, starting from the Lagrange equations. The
variational formulation for electro-mechanical coupled dynamics
is also covered in [2, 131] and [146]. The derivation for magnetic
fields is almost analog.
1.3.3
Vibrations of Electric Machines
The investigation of vibrational behaviour of electric machines is
almost as old as the machines themselfs. In the past, there were
mainly two reasons to look into vibrational behaviour of electric
machines. The first interest is the torsional vibrational behaviour
for electric machines. This is mainly caused by torque ripple and
consequently the aim of the research was the reduction of torque
ripple [97, 112, 134]. The methods to reduce vibrations mainly focus on changing the current input of the machine to counteract the
torque ripple created by either the supply harmonics or the torque
ripple created by torque cogging and space harmonics. Other techniques to reduce torque cogging incorporate skewed rotors [70] or
changing the magnet layout of the rotor using unsymmetrical rotors. [15] describes various design techniques for reducing cogging
torque in permanent magnet drives.
The other area of interest is noise generation of electric machines.
This is mainly caused by the oscillations of the stator [51, 86, 153].
The topic has also relevance for wind turbines as noise annoyance
is a problem for on-shore wind turbines [111]. The generator is one
1.3 Magneto-Mechanical Coupling and Vibrations in Electric Machines
13
of the main sources of noise in such a turbine.
The dynamic modelling of the structural parts of the turbine are
complex because the stator lamination stack shows nonlinear behaviour. How to approximate this nonlinear behaviour has been
the topic of many research projects [55, 95, 114, 140, 141, 161, 162,
166, 169]. All approaches model the stator lamination as an orthotropic material. The macro-mechanical parameters for this material are either determined by vibration measurements [95, 169] or by
modelling a part of the stator lamination in great detail to extract
the parameters from that model [114]. However, all above mentioned papers discuss stator laminations which are not separated.
As far as the author is aware there is no research on the dynamics
of interlinked and segmented stator laminations.
Approximating the nonlinear behaviour by a linear model using
orthotropic material models, makes it possible to include the dynamic behaviour of lamination in a modal analysis to estimate resonance frequencies. Nonlinear dynamics decreases the accuracy of
vibration behaviour that is approximated using these modes.
Reducing the vibrations of permanent magnet (PM) direct-drive
generators has been the focus of previous research. Valavi et al.
[155–157] identifies which design parameters in such a generator
are of importance for the harmonic excitation forces. They neglect
the two-way coupling that is analysed in this thesis.
Model Reduction for Electric Machines
Model order reduction methods for large linear time invariant dynamic systems can be split in three categories [3]: Singular value
decomposition (SVD) based, Krylov-based and the Singular Value
Decomposition Krylov based method. These methods project the
system onto a subspace which is of much smaller dimension. The
three methods mentioned above have various approaches to find
the smaller subspace, which should contain the dominant dynamics of the system in order to yield an accurate approximation.
The methods introduced in [3] approach the system that is reduced
in state space configuration. Reduction for finite element models
work differently, as here no input and output is given. Instead all
DoFs of the model can be input and output.
The methods used in structural dynamics [8, 130, 132] are singular value decomposition based methods. Because the matrices encountered in a structural FE model are square, the SVD becomes
an eigenvalue problem. For structural systems, the eigenvalues and
modes identified this way correspond to the physical properties of
resonance frequencies and mode shapes.
1.3.4
14
1 Introduction
Although SVD-based methods have been around for a while and
are commonly applied in structural dynamics, no survey on the
practicality of these methods for magnetic fields in electric machines has been conducted. In the case of electric machines, the
singular value decomposition does not yield physical quantities as
it does in structural dynamics. The application to electric machines
facilitates the identification of a dominant subspace the system is
projected on.
Another advantage of this approach is its easy integration into existing structural model order reduction techniques when reducing
magneto-mechanical coupled systems.
1.3.5
Topology Optimisation of Electric Machines
Using topology optimisation to reduce the deformation caused by
magnetic forces, has been around for a couple of years. [72] uses topology optimisation to reduce the vibrations caused by a harmonic
magnetic force. [63] uses the same method to optimise a static
magneto-mechanical coupled system. [88] uses topology optimisation to not only minimise the compliance of the structure, but
simultaneously maximise the magnetic force.
The systems used in these studies are all not generators or motors
but simple actuators. Nonetheless the developed methods can be
used in electric machines too. [69] uses topology optimisation in
combination with a genetic algorithm, to maximise the torque of
the machine. Manufacturability was specifically taken into account
in a second optimisation step.
All of these methods however do not look at the dynamic behaviour
of the systems at hand or do not look at rotating electric machines.
1.4
Problem Definition
The project aims at developing the needed knowhow and methodology to properly model the magneto-mechanical coupling, determining the dynamic behaviour and the electro-magnetic performance of the generator/drive-train of a direct-drive wind turbine. Modelling the electro-dynamics between the rotor and the
stator will enable designers and engineers to converge to the best
design for future generators by properly balancing cost, performance and lifetime.
In particular, the project was planned to reach the following objectives:
1.5 Thesis Outline
15
• Modelling:
– Determine the appropriate modelling approach for the
magneto-mechanical dynamics in generators in order
to design for the lowest weight of the structure, which
facilitates a lower cost of energy.
– Build a model that can describe the electromagnetic
and structural phenomenon determining the dynamical behaviour and the electromagnetic performance of
the generator, taking into account the strong two-way
magneto-mechanical coupling. Such a model must be
validated in such a way that it accurately describes the
phenomenon most relevant for performance, fatigue
and wear.
– Identify modelling techniques and calculation methods, that make the modelling of coupled dynamics possible in the future for larger generator size and more
complex geometries.
• Design:
– Clarify the role of the magneto-mechanical behaviour
of the generator/drive-train in determining the design
trade-offs of the overall turbine design.
– Identify methods to optimise the design of direct-drive
wind turbine generators.
– Develop innovative ideas for the design of future drivetrain/generator systems.
Thesis Outline
According to the problem definition in Sec. 1.4 the thesis is structured in three parts. The first part will cover the modelling techniques appropriate to simulate the magneto-mechanical coupling
in wind turbine generators. The second part will cover the application of the previously introduced modelling techniques to large
direct-drive wind turbine generators and the optimisation of them.
The last part draws the conclusions and gives an extensive overview
over possible research topics in the future.
Fig. 1.5 shows an overview how the various topics of the thesis are
related to each other.
1.5
16
1 Introduction
Part I – Modelling Magneto-Mechanical Coupled Dynamics
1.5.1
Part I covers the modelling of magneto-mechanical coupling in
wind turbine generators, the validation of the models and model
reduction techniques. It consists of the chapters 2, 3 and 4.
The second chapter of the thesis starts with the basics of magnetic
fields modelling and continuum mechanics. As most of the modelling theory has been done in the past, this introduction is rather
short. On the contrary, the chapter is rather specific on how the two
physics are coupled. Furthermore, the coupled eigenvalue problem
is introduced in detail.
MagnetoMechanical
Coupling
Chapter 4
Reduction
Methods
Lab Measurements
Defines
System
Chapter 3
Simplifies Model
Validating
Model
Chapter 2
Measurements
Validating
Apply to Geometry
Chapter 7
Identifies
influences
Design
Guidelines
XD-115
Application
to XD115
Identifies possible solutions
Topology
Optimization
Figure 1.5
Various topics of the thesis and
how they are interlinked
Optimization
Identify measurement position
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Shape Optimization
The third chapter covers validation measurements for the magnetic
coupling introduced in Chapter 2. These measurements are necessary to insure that the techniques introduced previously reflect
1.6 Thesis Outline
17
reality and indeed can be used for the optimisation of wind turbine generators. For the validation a test set up consisting of two
permanent magnets and a flexible beam was used.
The fourth chapter covers reduction methods for quasi-static magnetic field problems. These problems are discovered when magnetic forces have to be calculated in the time domain. The methods
introduced are based on a modal analysis of quasi-static magnetic
fields which will be introduced shortly. In the linear case various
reduction methods known from structural dynamics can be used.
It will be shown that these reduction methods are also applicable
to magnetic field problems. Further, the chapter introduces some
ideas how to reduce magneto-mechanical coupled systems.
Part II – Application to Large Off-Shore Wind Turbine
Generators
1.5.2
In the second part of the thesis the focus shifts from methods towards application. It consists of the chapters 5 and 6.
In the fifth chapter the methods developed in Chapter 2 are applied
to the XD-115, yielding an accurate analysis of the excitation forces
and system dynamics of the generator. The models are validated
with in-situ vibration measurements of the turbine.
In Chapter six the models developed in chapter five are used to explore design improvements for the current design. For this shape
optimisation as well as topology optimisation is used. Further, a
short look at topologies including two bearings and their optimal
design was taken.
Part III – Conclusion and Outlook
The last part contains the conclusion and the outlook into the future.
In the seventh chapter the various effects and influences identified
during the research leading up to this thesis are summarised. Their
influence is mentioned and possible solutions and changes to the
current design are discussed.
The eighth chapter draws the conclusions for the thesis and identifies opportunities and challenges future research can concentrate
on.
1.5.3
18
1 Introduction
1.6
Scientific Contributions
This thesis makes scientific contributions to the field of magnetomechanical coupling, design of wind turbine generators and model
reduction for quasi-static magnetic fields:
• A consistent set of equations for modelling magneto-mechanical coupled vibrations in electric machines is formed. For
that all relevant modelling techniques and equations needed
to be collected from various sources in literature. It is differentiated carefully between effects that are important for electric machines and effects that play a minor role. (Chapter 2).
• The damping terms for a monolithic formulation resulting
from the magneto-mechanical coupling are added to the formulation for monolithic magneto-mechanical coupling formulation found in literature. (Chapter 2).
• This formulation is cast in a monolithically coupled eigenvalue formulation which makes it possible to see the effects
of the magnetic field on the modal parameters. (Chapter 2).
• The modelling technique introduced is experimentally verified (Chapter 3).
• It is investigated to what extent the concept of modes of magnetic fields can be used for model order reduction of time
depend analysis and eigenvalue problems (Chapter 4).
• The importance of the two-way magneto-mechanical coupling is investigated for direct-drive wind turbine generators
(Chapter 5).
• A dynamic analysis of the XD-115 wind turbine generator
is conducted, establishing structural excitation sources and
how they interact with the resonance frequencies (Chapter
5).
• Optimised generator rotor designs for the XD-115 are presented, minimising the amount of structural material used while
retaining the same compliance (Chapter 6).
• Topologies incorporating the king pin design are analysed
by employing the same method. This way optimal bearing
placement and density distributions for this type of topology
can be identified (Chapter 6).
• An overview is given of the parameters which influence the
dynamic behaviour of the structural part of the generator
and its excitation. Recommendations are given how to avoid
unwanted vibrations (Chapter 7).
PART I
Modelling Magneto-Mechanical
Coupled Dynamics
This Chapter is based on the papers:
Abstract:
Kirschneck, M., Rixen, D.J., Polinder, H.,van Ostayen, R.A.J.
Electro-Magneto-Mechanical Coupled Vibration Analysis
of a Direct-Drive Off-Shore Wind Turbine Generator.
Journal of Computational and Nonlinear Dynamics. 2014
The dynamic behaviour of wind turbine generators
is influenced by the coupling between the
structural dynamics and the magnetic field in the
generator. Multi-physical modelling necessitates
specialised approaches to accurately capture the
dynamics and, especially, the influence of the
magnetic field. This chapter introduces an
approach for a multi-physical modal analysis that
makes it possible to predict the dynamics of
strongly coupled magneto-mechanical systems.
Modelling Technique
2
22
2 Modelling Techniques
2.1
Introduction
This chapter will introduce the necessary theoretical background
for modelling magneto-mechanical coupled systems including permanent magnets (PMs) and coils in 3D. Although in theory the
method can be used for all applications where structural deformation and quasi-static magnetic fields interact, the introduced formulation will concentrate on describing vibrations in electric machines. With that in mind, certain simplifications, such as neglecting hysteresis of the magnetic field and magnetostriction or using
orthotropic materials to simulate the lamination, will be applied to
the formulation. It might be possible, therefore, that for other applications some of the introduced simplifications cannot be applied
and in fact will yield wrong results for those systems.
As this is a multi disciplinary thesis, the basics of both physics will
be explained in detail. Therefore, depending if the reader has a
mechanical or a electrical engineering background, some of the
parts of this chapter might seem trivial and can be skipped. This
chapter will start with a general introduction to magneto-mechanical couplings and will include more details with every section.
Several aspects are, thus, revisited in successive sections, increasing
the detail and complexity of the model.
The chapter starts with a general description of magnetic fields in
Sec. 2.2. That subsection will cover the basics of modelling magnetic fields. It can be skipped by the reader, when he/she is familiar
with Maxwell’s equations and modelling of magnetic fields. Next,
the modelling of magnetic fields and mechanical systems in introduced in Sec. 2.3. The section follows the structure in [173], which
introduces lumped coupled models. It is intended to give a better insight into the concepts of magneto-mechanical coupling such
as the relation between co-energy and energy, but the content will
hardly be used in the rest of of the thesis. Readers that are already
familiar with these concepts can skip Sec. 2.3. In Sec. 2.4, the continuous version of the coupled magneto-mechanical formulas will
be introduced. This section is fundamental to understand Sec. 2.5,
where the equations from Sec. 2.4 will be discretised. However, for
the rest of the thesis, mainly the discretised formulas from Sec. 2.5
will be used. Sec. 2.6 will finally introduce the monolithic eigenvalue problem used for analysing the magneto-mechanical coupled
dynamics in electric machines.
2.1.1
Strong Coupling vs. Weak Coupling
In literature, there is some ambiguity about the terms strong coupling and weak coupling. For clarity, the terminology used in this
2.2 Basic Magnetic Field Modelling
23
thesis will be explained briefly. It should be noted that the definition differs to some definitions found in literature, e.g. [53].
One-way coupling: A one-way coupled system takes the coupling
in only one direction into account. This can either be the
dependency of the magnetic field on the deformation of the
structure or the magnetic force affecting the structural deformation. Usually, the effect of the magnetic field on the
mechanical system, i.e. the magnetic forces, are accounted
for. From a dynamic point of view, the magnetic forces in a
one-way coupled system can be treated as excitation forces
for the mechanical system, as they do not depend on the
mechanical system itself.
Two-way coupling: For two-way coupled systems, the magnetic
field affects the structural dynamics as well as the displacement affects the magnetic field.
Strong coupling: A strong coupling is a coupling that has a large
influence on the system. The system should be analysed taking both physics into account.
Weak coupling: Contrary to a strongly coupled system, a weakly
coupled system is a system where the effects of one physical domain hardly affects the other physically domain. An
analysis of two physical domains separately yields a good approximation of the system.
The modelling techniques covered in this chapter are suited to describe any of the system types above. Depending on the type of
coupling, certain parts of the introduced equations and terms can
be omitted.
Basic Magnetic Field Modelling
2.2
This section will introduce the basics of modelling magnetic fields
and the electric circuits generating them. It will cover energy in
magnetic systems and lumped modelling to give a general overview
of the interactions between magnetic fields and mechanical forces
and displacements.
Maxwell’s Equations
By adding the displacement term in his publication ’A Dynamical
Theory of the Electromagnetic Field’ [99] to the set of equations describing the dynamics of electro-magnetic fields, James Clerk Maxwell completed our understanding of electro-magnetic dynamics.
2.2.1
24
2 Modelling Techniques
Before that, various laws describing certain aspects of the electromagnetic field were previously discovered by Ampere, Gauß and
Faraday.
Ampere formulated the law that bears his name in 1826. It describes
the relation between magnetic fields and currents. It reads as
⃗ ⋅ d⃗l = ∬ ⃗j ⋅ d⃗S
∮ H
∂S
S
(2.1)
⃗ denotes the magnetic field, ⃗j the electric current density
where H
and dl an infinitesimal small part of the closed path ∂S, which encloses the surface S. Ampere’s law makes it possible to calculate the
field strength of magnetic fields depending on the path of a field
line and the material. It is, therefore, directly used in analytical
models of magnetic circuits and electric machines to estimate the
magnetic field at a certain point.
Faraday’s law describes the interaction of a closed loop of a conductor and a changing magnetic field.
’The induced electromotive force in any closed circuit
is equal to the negative of the time rate of change of the
magnetic flux through the circuit.’
from [59]
When Faraday published his experimental work in 1831 the law was
only formulated in words [30]. Maxwell later casted the ideas of
Faraday in mathematics which yielded the formulation (2.3a).
The third important law that made its way into Maxwell’s formulation is Gauß’s law. It was formulated in 1835 by Carl Friedrich
Gauß. The law describes the relation between a distribution of electric charges and the resulting electric field for media with constant
permittivity ε0 .
⃗i = q
∇⋅E
(2.2)
ε0
⃗ i is the electric field that is created by a charge density, q the
where E
electric charge density and ε0 the vacuum permittivity.
The last of the four equations that constitute Maxwell’s equation is
Gauß’s law for magnetics, which is named so because of its resemblance to the electric Gauß law in (2.2).
At the time when Maxwell published his ’A Dynamical Theory of
the Electromagnetic Field’ [99], the three laws above where already
known. Maxwell assembled these equations to a complete set of
equations describing electro-magnetic dynamics. Some of the equations needed to be extended or adapted. Faraday’s law needed to be
formulated in mathematical terms all together. This way, Maxwell
compiled his theory to comprise of 20 equations. The final set of
2.2 Basic Magnetic Field Modelling
25
equations, the one that is still used today, was not formulated before 1884 when Oliver Heaviside used vector notation to rewrite the
equation from 1864. (2.3) shows Maxwell’s four equation as formulated by Heaviside.
⃗
⃗ = − ∂B
∇×E
∂t
⃗
⃗ = ⃗j + ∂ D
∇×H
∂t
⃗
∇⋅D=q
⃗=0
∇⋅B
(2.3a)
(2.3b)
(2.3c)
(2.3d)
⃗ denotes the magnetic flux density, E
⃗ the electric field and
where B
⃗ the electric displacement. Assembling these equations using the
D
constitutive modelling introduced in Sec. 2.2.2 will result in a 2nd
order partial differential equation in space and time. The resonance frequencies of this equation for systems of the size of electric
machines are so high that they play no role for magnetic fields in
⃗
electric machines. Therefore, the so called displacement term ∂∂tD
can be dropped from (2.3b) leaving a first order system of partial
differential equations. This set of equations is called the quasi-static
Maxwell’s equations.
Constitutive Modelling
2.2.2
To be able to solve Maxwell’s equations (2.3), it is necessary to do
some constitutive modelling of the materials. For the conductivity of materials, a linear material law is assumed with a constant
conductivity.
⃗s + E
⃗ i +⃗v × B)
⃗ +⃗jsource
⃗j = γ (E
´¹¹ ¹ ¸¹¹ ¹ ¶
(2.4a)
⃗
E
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
⃗′
E
⃗ = εE
⃗
D
(2.4b)
where γ denotes the conductivity of the material and ⃗v the velocity
of the conducting structure. (2.4b) is given here for completeness,
as it is needed to solve all parts of Maxwell’s equations. It is not
used for the rest of the thesis.
⃗ can be split up in two parts, a solenoidal part, E
⃗ s , which is induced
E
⃗ i , which is
by changing magnetic fields and a rotation free part, E
⃗
created by potential gradients. jsource denotes an additional source
term for magnetic fields, which accounts for all sources of magnetic fields that are not created by electric potential gradients or
the Lorentz’ force.
26
2 Modelling Techniques
⃗ ′ in (2.4), instead of FaraFor moving structures the Lorentz force, E
day’s law (2.3a) needs to be used to compute the electro motive force
⃗ ′ is zero.
(EMF). For fixed structures, the second term of E
For the relation between the magnetic field and the magnetic flux
density, the constitutive modelling is more complex, as several different materials are included in the models presented here. Most
materials, such as air or copper or plastic, are linear magnetic materials. That means, a linear relation between the magnetic flux
density and the magnetic field is sufficient to describe the material
behaviour
⃗ = μH
⃗
B
(2.5)
where μ denotes the permeability of the material. Permanent mag⃗ r that is still
nets are special, as they have a remanent flux density B
present when there is no external magnetic field is applied to the
magnet. Their relation can be expressed by
⃗=B
⃗ r + μH
⃗
B
(2.6)
Because of this remanent flux, the permanent magnet can act as a
source of magnetic fields.
The last types of material are ferromagnetic materials where the
relation between the flux density and the magnetic field is expressed
as nonlinear function that includes hysteresis and saturation.
⃗ = B(
⃗ H)
⃗
B
(2.7)
Usually, the nonlinear material law is expressed in terms of the
norm of the magnetic field and the magnetic flux density. The direction of both fields is the same. Therefore, only the magnitudes of
the fields need to be related to each other.
Nonlinear material behaviour can usually be encountered in ferromagnetic materials such as iron or cobalt. These materials exhibit
saturation, which leads to a flattening H-B curve at strong magnetic fields. Saturation is an important effect in electric machines,
because most machines are designed to operate in or close to saturation. It affects the coupling between the magnetic domain and
the mechanical domain. An accurate magneto-mechanical model
will, thus, need to account for this effect.
Another important effect for ferromagnetic materials is hysteresis.
This effect is not easily incorporated into a linear magneto-mechanical model. In this thesis, we develop our understanding-modelling of the electromagnetic-structural coupling without considering hysteresis.
2.2 Basic Magnetic Field Modelling
27
Energy in Magnetic Fields
2.2.3
Energy of magnetic fields, and how to calculate it, is fundamental
for the discretisation of the magnetic field and the coupling with the
mechanical system. While the calculation in nonlinear and linear
magnetisable materials is rather straight forward, the calculation of
energy in permanent magnets is still a topic that is being debated
[23, 50, 92, 147].
The energy in permanent magnets has a fundamentally different
character as in magnetisable media, such as air or iron. In general,
the specific magnetic energy for a domain can be calculated by
B
⃗
⃗ d˚
⃗ ˚
wmag = ∫ H(
B
B)
(2.8)
B0
B0 denotes the value of the magnetic flux density for which the energy wmag is equal to zero. For magnetisable media, this point is
⃗ = 0, H
⃗ = 0. This yields the following expreseasily identified at B
sion for the specific energy for linear magnetic materials
B
wmag = ∫
0
˚
⃗ ˚ B
⃗T ⃗
B
⃗= B
dB
μ
2μ
(2.9)
⃗ denotes an integration variable. This lower integration
In (2.9), ˚
B
limit holds even for nonlinear materials that are not permanently
magnetised.
⃗ = 0 and H
⃗ = 0 do not coincide at the
For permanent magnets, B
same point as (2.6) applies. This is shown in Fig. 2.1. Instead, the
BH-curve passes the abscissa at H = Hc and the ordinate at B = Br .
Hc is the value of H for which B = 0 within the permanent magnet.
It is called the coercivity.
[147] explains thoroughly that for permanent magnets the distinction between recoverable energy and non-recoverable energy needs
to be made. Recoverable energy, is the energy stored in a permanent magnet that can be used for generating magnetic fields outside
the permanent magnet. Non-recoverable energy is energy that cannot be used for this purpose. It was stored in the magnet when it
was magnetised and will be transformed to heat by hysteresis losses
in the magnet.
According to [147], the recoverable energy for a permanent magnet
⃗=B
⃗ r and H
⃗ = 0. Setting B0 = Br and inserting (2.6) into
is zero at B
28
2 Modelling Techniques
B
Br
wpm
Figure 2.1
magnetisation curve of a
permanent magnet and its
recoverable energy
H
−Hc
(2.8) yields
B
˚
⃗−B
⃗r ˚ ˚
⃗ B
⃗ T˚
⃗ RRRR
⃗ Tr˚
B
B
B
B
R
⃗
R
wpm = ∫
dB =
−
R
μ
2μ
μ RRRR
Br
RBr
T⃗
T⃗
T⃗
T⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
B B Br Br Br B H H
+
=
μ
−
=
2μ
2μ
μ
2
²
B
(2.10)
wpm,0
for permanent magnets. wpm,0 denotes the maximal recoverable
energy in the magnet, represented by the whole triangle formed by
the axes and the magnetisation line.
2.2.4
1D Magnetic Circuit
This subsection introduces the equations for 1D magnetic circuits.
Although not used extensively afterwards in this thesis, these equations will illustrate the basic relations between fundamental quantities of magnetic and electric fields. Furthermore, they can explain
certain effects of magneto-mechanical coupling, which will be discussed in Sec. 3.2.2.
Maxwell’s equations can be simplified to a set of linear equations,
when certain assumptions are made. Using Ampere’s law in integral form (2.1) and assuming that the magnetic field is constant
within each material, a 1D magnetic circuit equation can be established [46].
(2.11)
∑ Hn ln = I
n
(2.11) can be derived from (2.1) by dividing the path of a magnetic
flux line in n sections. Within each section the magnetic field is
constant over the length ln . ln denotes the length of the flux line
2.2 Basic Magnetic Field Modelling
29
that is followed in the nth section and Hn the according magnetic
field magnitude. Adding the magnetic flux over all sections of the
flux line yields the total current I that particular flux line encloses.
Applying (2.11) results in a formulation for magnetic flux lines that
is similar to electric circuits. Each of the n elements can be seen
as a component of a magnetic circuit. Such a circuit comprises of
magnetic reluctance, magnetic fluxes and magneto motive forces
(MMF). These elements corresponds to an Ohmic resistance, a current, and the electro motive force in electric circuits, respectively.
More complex concepts, such as saturation or fringe effects, cannot be taken into account with this model. However, the magnetic circuit makes it possible to estimate the magnetic flux density
of more complicated magnetic devices such as electric motors or
transformers without solving partial differential equations first.
The magnetic circuit is governed by a handful of equations. The
MMF drives the magnetic flux through the magnetic circuit. It can
be seen as a potential difference within the circuit similar to the
voltage in an electric circuit. The MMF which is generated by a
coil can be computed by
Fcoil = Nic
(2.12)
where ic denotes the current in the coil and N the number of turns.
This law is derived from Ampere’s law (2.1), which relates the magnetic field to the total current it encircles. For permanent magnets,
the MMF can be calculated by
Fpm =
Hpm lpm
μr,pm
(2.13)
where Fpm denotes the MMF created by the permanent magnet,
Hpm the magnetic field within, lpm the length of and μr,pm the relative permeability of the permanent magnet.
The total magnetic flux of the circuit can be calculated by dividing
the MMF by the magnetic ’resistance’, called reluctance
ΦB =
F
R
(2.14)
where R denotes the reluctance. It can be calculated by
R=
l
μA
(2.15)
where l denotes the length of the material within the magnetic circuit with the permeability μ and A the cross section of the material
perpendicular to the field line. It is, thus, assumed that the cross
30
2 Modelling Techniques
section of the material is constant within one section. This formula
can be used for any magnetic material that shows linear magnetisation behaviour. For more complicated systems several reluctances
can be placed in series or parallel. The laws for calculating the total
reluctance are identical to the calculations of Ohmic resistances in
series or parallel.
Lumped Magneto-Mechanical Systems
2.3
Electrical
Network
Circuit
Coupling
Figure 2.2
The three different parts of the
coupled system and how they
interact with each other
Magnetic Field
MagnetoMechanical
Coupling
Mechanical
System
In Sec. 2.2.1, the focus was laid on basic magnetic modelling. In
this section, the focus shifts towards the interaction between the
magnetic field and the mechanical system.
To get a fundamental understanding of how magneto-mechanical
coupled systems work, we will start examining lumped systems.
Analysing these systems can explain many phenomena of magnetomechanical coupled systems. For that, the interface between the
three subsystems depicted in Fig. 2.2 are considered. The inside of
the three systems will be considered later in Sec. 2.4 and are treated
as black boxes for now.
There are some fundamental differences for magneto-mechanical
interaction between systems in which the magnetic field is created
by a permanent magnet and systems with a magnetic field generated by a coil. In this section, both types of systems will be analysed to show the difference and give a deeper understanding of
magneto-mechanical coupling.
2.3.1
Systems Including Coils
Fig. 2.3 shows a magneto-mechanical coupled system, in which the
magnetic field is created by a coil. This system contains an electric
circuit as well as a mechanical system. The two physics are coupled
in one or two directions by means of a magnetic force and/or a
dependency of the magnetic field on the geometry and, thus, on
the displacement of the mechanical system.
As mentioned above, the magnetic field is considered to be a black
2.3 Lumped Magneto-Mechanical Systems
31
Rcoil
fmag (i, u)
m
L(u)
V
u
icoil
fmag
λcoil
Figure 2.3
A mechanical and a electric system
interacting by means of a
magnetic field
box with energy entering and leaving the system. It creates forces
acting on the mechanical system and is created by a current flowing
through a coil. This approach yields a black box with two terminals. The mechanical terminal consists of the magnetic force and the
displacement, whereas the circuit terminal consists of the two variables, coil current and flux linkage. The flux linkage of a coil λc is
the total magnetic flux that flows through the coil, which is denoted
by Φc . The flux linkage of the coil depends on the displacement u
as well as on the current in the coil ic
λc = λc (u, ic )
(2.16)
where λc is the flux linkage of the coil. From this relation, it can
be concluded that the flux linkage of the coil will change, when the
mechanical system deforms.
A similar relation can be established for the magnetic force
fmag = fmag (ic , u)
(2.17)
When the current increases the magnetic force increases. It can
also be determined that the displacement has an effect on the force.
Energy and Co-energy Considerations
Applying the principle of energy conservation, it is possible to make
some fundamental statements about the coupled system in Fig. 2.3.
32
2 Modelling Techniques
The black box in that figure contains a magnetic field, which is considered to be lossless. The only way for exchanging energy with another system is either by means of an electric power applied to the
coil or by a mechanical power. The relation for the energy change
in the dashed box can, therefore, be written as
dWmag
dλc
du
= ic
− fmag
dt
dt
dt
(2.18)
In (2.18), Wmag denotes the total energy stored in the magnetic field.
This energy is not known, but some statements about the energy
change can be made. The first term on the right hand side of (2.18)
is the power input through the electric circuit, which is determined
by the change of the total flux multiplied with the coil current. The
second term denotes the power input through the mechanical system. The minus sign in front of the second term results from the
definition that the force acts on the mechanical system and, thus,
introduces energy into the mechanical system, while, reducing the
energy of the magnetic system, when the magnetic force and the
displacement it causes point in the same direction.
Multiplying (2.18) with dt yields the conservation of energy for a
magnetic field:
dWmag = ic dλc − fmag du
(2.19)
Because the system at hand is a conservative system, the energy for
a certain set of variables is unique. It does, thus, not depend on the
way how the system got into its current state [46, 173]. The energy
for a certain configuration can thus be computed by
λc
Wmag (λc , u0 ) = ∫ ic ( λ̊c , u0 )d λ̊c
(2.20)
0
where λ̊c denotes an integration variable and u0 an arbitrary system
displacement.
(2.16) and (2.17) show that only two of the four variables introduced
so far can be set independently. Therefore, two of the variables describe the total energy sufficiently and the energy can be expressed
by:
Wmag = Wmag (u, λc )
(2.21)
In fact, any two of the four variables u,i,λc and fmag are sufficient to
describe the energy stored in the magnetic field distinctively. This
is because they can be expressed by one another. It is possible to use
a Legrendre transformation to express the energy by any of the four
variables, identical to thermodynamics where this can be done for
the state functions [22]. Using such a transformation, it is possible
to substitute λc for the current ic in (2.21) resulting in the co-energy
W′mag = W′mag (u, ic )
(2.22)
2.3 Lumped Magneto-Mechanical Systems
33
λc
Energy
Figure 2.4
Illustration of energy and
co-energy for a system with a
nonlinear relation between λc and i
Co-energy
ic
and
dW′mag = λc dic + fmag du
(2.23)
for the co-energy change of the system. As stated in [46], the integration path does not matter, because the co-energy is a state function, of which the value do not depend on the history of the system.
An integration analog to the energy yields
ic
W′mag (i, u0 )
= ∫ λc (i̊) di̊
(2.24)
0
where i̊ denotes an integration variable. Fig. 2.4 shows the relation
between energy and co-energy in a magnetic field excited by coils.
Using the co-energy simplifies calculations in systems, in which the
current in coils is known.
Force-Energy Relations
Assuming a conservative system, the energy in the magnetic field
is fully determined by the independent variables u and λc . It is possible to take the total derivative of (2.21) yielding
dWmag =
∂Wmag
∂Wmag
dλc +
du
∂λc
∂u
(2.25)
Subtracting (2.25) from (2.19) yields
0 = (ic −
∂Wmag
∂Wmag
) dλc − (fmag +
) du
∂λc
∂u
(2.26)
34
2 Modelling Techniques
Because the variables u and λc are independent, (2.26) must be true
for any combination of du and dλc , resulting in
ic =
∂Wmag (λc , u)
∣
∂λc
u=const.
∂Wmag (λc , u)
∣
fmag = −
∂u
λc =const.
(2.27)
(2.27) shows that the principle of virtual work can be used to calculate the forces acting on the mechanical part of the system. Furthermore, it is now possible to calculate the exchanged energy between
the magnetic field and the mechanical system, which depends on u
and λc . (2.25) shows that the energy exchanged with the magnetic
field can be calculated by:
dWex,m = fmag du∣λ =const.
c
(2.28)
assuming that u is the independent variable. In (2.28), dWex,m denotes the total energy exchanged between the mechanical domain
and the magnetic domain. It is positive for energy that leaves the
magnetic systems and enters the mechanical system.
Co-energy-Force Relation
For certain systems, it is beneficial to use the current instead of the
flux linkage as an independent variable. This is especially true for
electric machines, where the current is controlled and, hence, can
be considered constant for the force computation. Using the magnetic energy for force calculations in systems, in which the currents
are constant, is quite complicated. To clarify this consider the system in Fig. 2.3 again.
(2.16) shows that the flux linkage will change when the displacement changes and the currents in the system are held constant. Because λc as well as u change, the force calculation in (2.27) is no
longer valid. In this case, energy enters through the coil because
dλc ic is not longer constant. This energy change has to be taken
into account when calculating the magnetic force.
The calculation can be simplified by using the current in the coil
as the independent variable. Starting from (2.23) and following the
same reasoning as for the energy yields
λc =
fmag =
∂W′mag (i, u)
∂i
∂W′mag (i, u)
∂u
∣
u=const.
∣
i=const.
(2.29)
2.3 Lumped Magneto-Mechanical Systems
35
for the magnetic force and the flux linkage. Note that now the force
is calculated for a constant current. Analog to the exchanged energy between the magnetic field and the mechanical system, it is
possible to define an exchanged co-energy:
dW′ex,m = − fmag du∣i=const.
(2.30)
Note that the change of the co-energy is opposed to the change of
the magnetic energy for the same force and movement.
It is possible to calculate the force that is associated with a displacement at constant current using the magnetic energy. In that case,
an additional term needs to be introduced that accounts for the energy that enters the system during the movement. Using (2.19) we
can express the force as
fmag (u) = −
dWmag (u, λc )
dλc
+ ic
du
du
(2.31)
Compared to (2.27) we get a correction term that takes the change
of the flux density into account. Expressing the energy in terms of
the co-energy yields
d
dλc
(λc ic − W′mag (u, i)) − ic
du
du
′
dW
(u,
i)
dλc ic
dλc
mag
fmag (u) =
−
− ic
du
du
du
fmag (u) =
(2.32)
As ic is constant during the deformation, it can be moved in front of
the derivation in the first term and the total derivative can be substituted for a partial derivative in the second term. Multiplication
with du yields the same expression as in (2.30) for the magnetic
force. In some circumstances, using the co-energy is more convenient from an algebraic point of view. In that case, the current
needs to be used as independent variable which might cause some
challenges.
The equations for systems including PMs and coils hardly differ
from the equations of systems which include coils only. A permanent magnet will introduce an additional energy source for the
system. The equations for the energy and co-energy change (2.19)
and (2.23), respectively, will not change. Therefore, the force computation will also stay the same.
Systems with Permanent Magnets
Let us now consider a system where the magnetic field is created
by a permanent magnet. In this case, the electric circuit that was
2.3.2
36
2 Modelling Techniques
present in the system in Fig. 2.3 disappears. The system has, therefore, no terminal at the left side of the black box. As there is no
electric circuit, there is also no flux linkage and inductance. The
only two variables present are the magnetic force and the displacement
fmag
Figure 2.5
Black box of a coupled system in
which the magnetic field is created
by a permanent magnet
Energy and Co-energy Considerations
Systems in which the magnetic field is created by a permanent magnet show a different energy behaviour. Now, the energy depends
only on the displacement u or force fmag , depending which variable is chosen to describe the system. There is a certain amount
of energy stored in the system, which is concentrated in the PM.
When work is done on the system the recoverable energy of the
PM changes.
Using (2.19) without the circuit part of the equation yields
dWmag,pm = −fmag (u) du
(2.33)
where dWmag,pm denotes the energy change of the magnetic field
which is only created by a permanent magnet. (2.33) shows that the
energy of the system decreases, when the force and displacement
are aligned.
Co-energy is a concept that was specifically introduced for the system including coils and electric circuits. The concept is pointless
to introduce to systems where the magnetic field is excited by permanent magnets only, as the two variables λc and ic do not exist in
those systems.
2.4
Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical
Coupling
In the last section, only the energy entering and leaving a magnetic field were analysed. This way of viewing a coupled system
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
37
can already tell much about energy fluxes and the state of the system. However, it is not possible to make statements about the inner
state of the system, because only the interface variables are known.
This chapter extends the model introduced in Sec. 2.2.1 and Sec.
2.3 by a formulation that describes the spatial distribution of the
⃗ ⃗x), and the displacement u
⃗(t, ⃗x). For that the
magnetic field, A(t,
variables ic , λc , u and fmag will be expressed by the new vector fields
introduced above.
Consider the domains depicted in Fig. 2.6, to get an understanding
of the spatial relations in magneto-mechanical coupled systems.
It depicts the domains for the magnetic field and the mechanical
system. The model consists of a mechanical domain that overlaps
partly with the magnetic domain.
In electric machines, the magnetic field of interest is located in the
electro-magnetic active part of the stator and rotor as well as the
air gap between them. The air gap has no structure and does not
need to be included in the structural model. That is why, a part
of the magnetic domain is not part of the mechanical domain in
Fig. 2.6. The support structure of the generator has no influence
on the magnetic behaviour of the machine. It does not need to be
included in the magnetic field calculation. This explains the part
of the mechanical domain that is not included in the magnetic domain.
The magnetic domain Ωmag consists of a large part of linear materials (depicted in white), a part that shows nonlinear material behaviour (Ωnl ), a part that are permanent magnets (Ωpm ) and a part
where external currents can be applied (Ωc ). The boundary conditions for the magnetic domain are either a magnetic insulation,
i.e. no magnetic flux crosses that boundary, or a periodic condition where the vector potential at one boundary is the same as at
another one. The mechanical model is not separated in various
Γu
Ωpm
Ωmag
Ωc
Ωmech
Ωcpl
Ωnl
Γσ
Figure 2.6
Magnetic and mechanical domain
38
2 Modelling Techniques
material sub-sections. All parts of the model are assumed to behave linearly. The boundary can be separated in two sections. On
the first section the displacement of the material is set to a certain
value. This section is denoted by Γu . On the second boundary section a surface force is applied. This section is denoted by Γσ . A free
boundary is realised by a surface force of zero.
The description of the modelling techniques in this thesis will concentrate on Ωcpl , the coupled part of the system, which is depicted
by the hatched domain in Fig. 2.6. In that part, the magneto-mechanical coupling takes place as it is part of both physical domains.
2.4.1
The Governing Equations of the Elastic Field
The formulas for continuous elastic fields can be found in any book
for continuum mechanics. For a more detailed description of continuum mechanics refer to [73] or [65].
The material is assumed to be linear elastic. The stress tensor σ can
therefore be calculated from the strain tensor ε by multiplication
with a constant stiffness tensor Ξ
σ = Ξε
(2.34)
The stress tensor σ is symmetric, because the shear stresses τ xy = τ yx
⃗ can
are equal. The PDE describing the structural displacement u
therefore be described as
∂σ ij
∂
∂ 2 ui
(Ξijkl εkl (ui )) + fi ext = ρ 2
+ fi ext =
(2.35)
∂xj
∂xj
∂t
in Einstein’s index notation (see notation section in preamble for
explanation), where fi ext denotes all the external body forces acting
on the structure. ρ denotes the density of the structure.
This PDE is subject to Dirichlet and Neuman boundary conditions
on the boundaries Γu and Γσ
⃗=u
⃗e
u
on Γu
⃗ = ⃗te
σ n
on Γσ
T
(2.36)
where (●)T denotes the transpose, ⃗te denotes surface forces imposed on Γσ . In some cases the external force ⃗te can depend on the
displacement of the boundary. This is the case when an external
spring support is modelled.
2.4.2
The Governing Equations of Continuous Magnetic Fields
The fundamental equations for describing a magnetic field were
already introduced in Sec. 2.2.1. The equations consist of Maxwell’s
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
39
equation (2.3), the material modelling for the conductivity and the
relation between the magnetic field and the magnetic flux density
(2.6), (2.5) and (2.7). The basic equations were adapted to describe
magnetic circuits in Sec. 2.2.4. In this section, the focus is laid on
the continuous magnetic field equations and how they can be used
to describe magnetic fields in two and three dimensions.
The magnetic field can be described by a spatial distribution of the
⃗ x). Just like the formulation for elastic
magnetic flux density B(⃗
fields, the spatial distribution of the magnetic field is governed by a
set of partial differential equations. These partial differential equations can be derived from the quasi static maxwell equations (2.3).
⃗
Starting from (2.3 b) without the displacement term ∂∂tD , inserting
(2.4 a) yields
⃗ = ⃗jsource + γ(E
⃗s + E
⃗ i + ⃗v × B)
⃗
∇×H
(2.37)
Introducing the magnetic vector potential
⃗
⃗ =∇×A
B
(2.38)
(2.3 a) can be written as
⃗s + E
⃗i +
∇ × (E
⃗
∂A
)=0
∂t
(2.39)
⃗ i can be expressed by
Introducing the electric potential, E
⃗i
∇V = −E
(2.40)
Using the identity ∇ × ∇(●) = 0, (2.39) becomes
⃗
∂A
⃗s
= −E
∂t
(2.41)
Inserting (2.40) and (2.41) into (2.37) yields
⃗ = ⃗jsource + γ(−
∇×H
⃗
∂A
⃗
+ ∇V + ⃗v × ∇ × A)
∂t
(2.42)
For electric machines, it is usually assumed that there are no electric
charges present, besides the moving charges of the coil currents self.
Therefore, the imposed electric potential is zero except in the coil
domains. The electric potential applied to the coils is substituted by
an imposed current density ⃗je . For the rest of the model the electric
field is purely solenoidal. This yields for (2.42)
⃗ = ⃗jsource + ⃗je + γ(−
∇×H
⃗
∂A
⃗
+ ⃗v × ∇ × A)
∂t
(2.43)
40
2 Modelling Techniques
The introduction of the magnetic vector potential made the solution to (2.42) non-unique. This can be proven by adding an ar⃗ Since a the curl of any
bitrary gradient of a scalar potential to A.
gradient is zero (∇ × ∇(●) = 0), this will not affect the magnetic
⃗
flux density B.
Several divergence conditions have been proposed to overcome this
non-uniqueness [16]. For the static and time dependent solutions
of magnetic fields, the non-uniqueness is no problem as the mag⃗ is of interest, which is unique. Care needs to
netic flux density B
be taken for eigenvalue problems of quasi-static magnetic fields as
will be explained in Chapter 4.
The set of partial differential equations in (2.45) governs the dynamic behaviour of magnetic fields. The solution is subject to the
boundary conditions applied to Γmag . For an electric machine usually no Neumann boundary condition is applied on the boundary
of the magnetic domain Ωmag . A Dirichlet boundary condition
⃗ = 0 on the outer
is often used to impose magnetic insulation A
boundary of the magnetic system.
For electric machines, the only source of magnetic fields, besides
electric currents in coils, are permanent magnets. Therefore, the
additional source term ⃗jsource only contains the excitation of these
magnets
⃗r
⃗jsource = ⃗jpm = 1 ∇ × B
(2.44)
μ
This yields for the magnetic PDE
⃗ + γ(
∇×H
⃗
∂A
⃗ = ⃗jpm + ⃗je
− ⃗v × ∇ × A)
∂t
(2.45)
In (2.45), the left hand side consists of internal current terms that
determine the static and dynamic behaviour of the magnetic field,
whereas the right hand side consists of the source terms that create the magnetic field. The internal currents that are generated by
a physical effect within the system and, thus, depend on the system are on the left hand side. The internal currents and external
currents have to be in equilibrium everywhere in the system.
⃗
⃗ describe the eddy currents induced
The terms γ ∂∂tA and γ⃗v × ∇ × A
in conducting materials.
⃗
⃗
⃗jeddy = −γ ∂ A + γ⃗v × ∇ × A
∂t
(2.46)
⃗ and the magIn (2.45), the relation between the magnetic field H
⃗
netic flux density B is not defined. For nonlinear magnetic materials, the relation between the magnetic field and the internal cur⃗ and ∣B∣.
⃗ For a
rents is governed by a general relation between ∣H∣
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
41
linear magnetic material, for which (2.5) holds, (2.45) can be further simplified to
γ
⃗
∂A
⃗ + 1∇×∇×A
⃗ = ⃗je + ⃗jpm
− γ(⃗v × ∇ × A)
∂t
μ
(2.47)
At interfaces between materials with varying permeability, the interface conditions apply (see for instance [73, p. 110]).
⃗1 − B
⃗2) = 0
⃗ ⋅ (B
n
⃗1 − H
⃗ 2 ) = ⃗jsurface
⃗ × (H
n
(2.48)
These can be derived directly from Maxwell’s equations. For nonmagnetised materials, i.e. for non-permanent magnets, the surface
current ⃗jsurface is zero. The interface conditions state that the component normal to the interface of the magnetic flux density is continuous across the interface. The same is true for the tangential
component of the magnetic field.
Electric Circuit Coupling
(2.45) and (2.47) make it possible to calculate the magnetic field
distribution when the currents generating that field and properties of the permanent magnets are known. Currents, in general,
cannot be controlled directly. They are created as result of a electric potential difference. In electric machines, this is done within
a conductor. Usually, that conductor is wound to form a coil to
maximise the magnetic field generated with a certain current. It is,
therefore, convenient to express the external current densities in
the equations (2.45) and (2.47) as function of the lumped variables
ic (t) used in Sec. 2.3.
The circuit equation for a coil is
vext = Rc ic (t) +
∂λc
∂t
±
(2.49)
vind
where λc represents the flux linkage of the coil, vind the induced
voltage in the coil, Rc the Ohmic resistance of the coil and vext the
external voltage applied to the coil.
To understand the relation between the external current density, ⃗je ,
in (2.47) and the lumped current variable, ic (t), consider Fig. 2.7.
It depicts a coil domain in a 3D model. In Fig. 2.7, the coil domain
is modelled as a hollow cylinder with the cross section Γw . This
hollow cylinder is the coil domain that is denoted as Ωc in Fig. 2.6.
42
2 Modelling Techniques
+
Γc
Γw
hollow
cylinder
vext
lwire
−
eJ
Figure 2.7
A coil and its simplified
representation as domain
The derivation of the coil equations is done in 3D. The derivation
for a 2D domain is analog. It can be looked up in [73].
For non-deforming, non-moving coil, the flux linkage is the same
as the total flux that flows through the coils cross section Γc . Therefore λc depends on the magnetic field that interacts with the coil
and can be described by Faraday’s equation. The total induced potential difference is equal to the integral of the changing magnetic
field in the direction of the wires over the coil domain.
Faradays law can be used to calculate the induced voltage of a coil.
Assuming that the axial length of the coil is negligible, Faraday’s
law for a coil can be simplified to
⃗
∂B
∂λc
⃗Γ dΓc
= vind (t) ≈ Nc ∬
⋅n
∂t
∂t
(2.50)
Γc
⃗Γ denotes
where Γc represents the surface that the coil encloses and n
its normal direction. (2.50) can be rewritten in terms of the vector
potential. Applying Stoke’s theorem yields:
⃗
∂A
∂λc
= Nc ∮
⋅ ⃗eΓ d∂Γc
∂t
∂t
(2.51)
∂Γc
where ∂Γc denotes the contour of the surface Γc and ⃗eΓ the tangential direction of the contour line ∂Γ. In the case of Fig. 2.7,
the coil is modelled as a volume and the contour ∂Γc as a hollow
cylinder. The integral in (2.51) becomes then an integral over the
whole volume of the simplified coil, i.e. the hollow cylinder. To
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
43
make sure that only the current density change in the direction of
the conductors is taken into account, a vector ⃗ej is introduced that
is tangential to the conductors of the coil. (2.51) becomes then
⃗
⃗
∂A
Nc
∂A
∂λc
= vind (
)=
⋅ ⃗ej dΩc
∫
∂t
∂t
Γw
∂t
(2.52)
Ωc
where Γw denotes the cross section of the hollow cylinder.
Note that (2.52) only holds for non-deforming, non-moving coils.
For moving or deforming coils Faraday’s law in (2.3a) can no longer
⃗ ′ , needs to be used for the
be used. Instead, the Lorentz force, E
calculation of the EMF in the coil. In that case, (2.52) becomes
⃗
⃗
∂A
Nc
∂A
∂λc
⃗ ⋅ ⃗ej dΩc
= vind (
)=
+ ⃗v × ∇ × A)
∫ (−
∂t
∂t
Γw
∂t
(2.53)
Ωc
For the rest of the thesis, coil domains are assumed to be rigid and
stationary, so that (2.52) will be used.
The coil current, ic , in (2.49) can be expressed by the current density
in the coil domain
1
(2.54)
ic (t) = ∫ ⃗je ⋅ ⃗ej dΩc
N
Ωc
Assuming that the external current is equally distributed over the
coil domain, the external current density can be calculated from
the coil current by
⃗je = ⃗eJ ⋅ J = ⃗ej ic (t) N
Γw
(2.55)
(2.55) and (2.52) establish a coupling between the continuos magnetic field and the lumped variables vind and ic .
Coupling the Physics
With the equations introduced in Sec. 2.4.1 and 2.4.2, the magnetic
and elastic field can be modelled separately. However, the aim is
to model magneto-mechanical coupled systems. This section will
explain how the two governing equations (2.45) or (2.47) and (2.35)
can be coupled.
In (2.35), the internal and external forces have to be equal to the
dynamic forces. As mentioned, fi , the external body forces, are all
forces that are not linked to a displacement or movement of the
structure. When the structure is exposed to a magnetic field, which
is the case for magneto-mechanical coupled systems, this external
2.4.3
44
2 Modelling Techniques
force includes forces resulting from the magnetic field acting on the
structure. (2.35) can be rewritten as
2
∂σ ij
⃗ = ρ ∂ ui
+ fi + fi mag (A)
∂ξ j
∂t2
(2.56)
where fi mag represents the components of the magnetic force vector.
In (2.56) the material coordinate, ξ i , is used compared to (2.35) to
indicate, that the elastic field is described in an Eulerian coordinate
frame.
Ω0
⃗ξ
Figure 2.8
The deformation of the structure
and the associated reference
frames
⃗
u
Ω(⃗x)
y
x
⃗x
z
The governing equation for the magnetic field on the other side,
(2.45) or (2.47), is described in Lagrangian coordinates. This means
that the magnetic field moves with the underlying structure and is,
thus, affected by the displacement field. The magnetic vector po⃗ is thus dependent on the spatial coordinates, ⃗x, whereas
tential, A,
the displacement field depends on the material coordinates ⃗ξ. The
spatial coordinate, ⃗x, can be described by
⃗(t, ⃗ξ)
⃗x = ⃗ξ + u
(2.57)
Therefore, all boundaries and all domains of the magnetic domains
move and deform with the structure. Thus, all spatial derivatives
⃗.
and integrals in the formulation of the magnetic field depend on u
The coupled system can be written as a set of three equations
∂σ ij
∂ 2 ui
+ fi + fi mag (Ai ) = ρ 2
∂ξ j
∂t
γ(⃗x)
⃗ x)
∂ A(⃗
∂⃗
u
⃗ x)) = ⃗je (⃗x, ic (t)) + ⃗jpm (⃗x)
⃗ x)) + ∇⃗x × H(
⃗ A(⃗
− γ(⃗x)(
× ∇⃗x × A(⃗
∂t
∂t
⃗ u
⃗)
∂λc (A,
Rc ic (t) +
= vext
∂t
(2.58a)
(2.58b)
(2.58c)
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
45
where ∇⃗x denotes the del operator in the spatial coordinate frame
and ∂(●)
a spatial derivative with respect to the material coordin∂ξ i
ates.
How the magnetic force can be calculated will be covered in Sec.
2.4.5. The dependency of the magnetic field on the displacement
will be covered in Sec. 2.5.10.
Energy Considerations
2.4.4
In Sec. 2.2.3, the equations to calculate the specific energy of various magnetic materials were introduced. In Sec. 2.3.1, the energy
balances of a control volume were investigated. The system within
the control volume was seen as a black box. Based on the equation
in Sec. 2.2.3, the equations to calculate the energy within the control value are introduced in this section. Furthermore, for each of
the sub-systems, i.e. the mechanical and the magnetic system, the
power balance from Sec. 2.3.1 will be extended by energy that is
dissipated and thus leaves the system. Additionally, the model will
be extended by losses such as eddy currents and friction losses.
The magnetic as well as the elastic field can store energy. The elastic
field stores potential energy in the strain of the structure. Therefore,
this energy is also called strain energy. The mechanical system can
also store energy kinetically as movement of masses. The magnetic
field stores energy wherever there is a magnetic field. The internal
energy of the system can, therefore, be calculated by adding up all
the above energies.
Wint = Vint + T = Wmag + Wstrain + T = Wmag + Wmech
(2.59)
where Vint denotes the total potential internal energy of the system,
Wstrain describes the strain energy of the deformation of a structure
and T the kinetic energy of the movement of a structure and Wmag
the magnetic energy. These are internal energies, Wint , as they are
internally stored in the system. Besides these internal energies,
there are potential energies of external loads, also called external
energies, which describe the amount of energy external forces or
currents introduce into the system.
Besides the two mechanisms to exchange energy, that were already
introduced in Sec. 2.3.1, the magnetic domain can dissipate energy
due to eddy currents. The extended energy balance for the magnetic field, which includes this energy, reads as
dWmag = dWcoil − dWex,m − dWeddy
(2.60)
dWcoil denotes the energy that enters the magnetic field by means of
the current in the coils, dWex,m the energy that is exchanged with
46
2 Modelling Techniques
the mechanical system by applying a magnetic force to a moving
object, as established in Sec. 2.3.1, and dWeddy the energy that is
dissipated by eddy currents.
The currents in the coils and magnetic forces represent methods
how energy can enter and leave the magnetic system without losses.
Therefore, these types of energy are recoverable and the loads they
create are conservative. They can be expressed as a potential of external loads Wmag,ext , which means that their instantaneous values
does not depend on the history of the system and it can be com⃗ and the external currents/
⃗ and A
puted from the vector fields u
forces.
Wmag,ext = Wcoil − Wex,m
(2.61)
For dWeddy , this is not the case. Energy always leaves the system
due to eddy currents and is, thus, not recoverable. Furthermore, the
total amount of dissipated energy can only be computed by taking
the history of the system into account and integrating the friction
energy change over time. It is, thus, fundamentally different from
the other two exchange mechanisms.
The energy of the mechanical system can change due to three mechanisms. Friction within the mechanical system can dissipate energy, energy can be transferred from the magnetic field and the
system can exchange energy by means of external forces applied
to the system. The total energy change of the mechanical system
can be written as
dWmech = dWex,m + dWext,m − dWfric
(2.62)
where dWext,m denotes the energy change due to external forces
acting on the system and dWfric the energy change due to friction.
Like the energy change due to eddy currents, dWeddy always decreases the energy of the system and cannot be derived from a potential.
Adding the power balances (2.62) and (2.60) for the separate systems yields the power balance for the coupled system of magnetic
and elastic field
dWtot = dWcoil + dWext,m − dWeddy − dWfric
(2.63)
where dWtot denotes the total energy change of the coupled system. The energy exchanged between the mechanical and magnetic
domain cancels out as the energy that is exchanged between the
mechanical system and the magnetic system does not leave the total
system. The sum of all external energies, the total external energy,
can be written as
Vext = Wcoil + Wext,m
(2.64)
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
47
Energy in continuous Magnetic Fields
The various terms for the internal and external energies need to
⃗ x) and u
⃗(⃗ξ), to be
be expressed in terms of the field variables A(⃗
able to calculate them within the control volume in Fig. 2.3. Using (2.9), the total energy of a linear magnetic domain Ωmag can be
calculated, yielding.
Wmag = ∫ wmag dΩmag
Ωmag
(2.65)
⃗
B
⃗ dΩmag
⃗ ˚
⃗ ˚
B
B)d
= ∫ ∫ H(
Ωmag 0
For linear magnetic materials, (2.65) can be further simplified to
⃗2
B
dΩmag
2μ
Wmag,lin = ∫
Ωmag
(2.66)
The co-energy can be derived from the energy by
⃗
H
W′mag
˚
˚
⃗ dΩmag
⃗ H
⃗ H)d
⃗ mag − Wmag = ∫ ∫ B(
⃗ T HdΩ
=∫ B
(2.67)
Ωmag 0
Ωmag
For linear magnetic materials, the term for the energy can be substituted by (2.66) yielding
⃗ T⃗
⃗2
⃗2
⃗ − B dΩmag = ∫ μ H dΩmag = ∫ H B dΩmag
⃗TH
W′mag = ∫ B
2μ
2
2
Ωmag
Ωmag
Ωmag
Energy and co-energy are, thus, identical for linear magnetic materials.
For nonlinear materials, (2.68) no longer holds. In that case, the
⃗ and H
⃗ makes it impossible to excomplicated relation between B
press the two magnetic fields by one another. Fig. 2.4 shows the
energy and co-energy in a λ i - coordinate system. [148, p. 122 124] shows that
⃗
B
λc
⃗ mag
⃗ ⋅ d˚
BdΩ
∫ ic d λ̊ = ∫ ∫ H
0
(2.69)
Ωmag 0
⃗ and λ̊ denote integration variables, so that
B
where ˚
⃗H
⃗ dΩmag
Wmag − ic λ = Wmag − ∫ B
Ωmag
(2.70)
(2.68)
48
2 Modelling Techniques
for singly excited systems. Therefore, for nonlinear materials the
same diagram can be drawn with the magnetic field on the x-axis
and the magnetic flux density on the y-axis.
Energy and Co-energy in Permanent Magnets
The formula for the specific magnetic energy in permanent magnets has been introduced in (2.10). For the discretisation, it is more
convenient to separate the intrinsically stored energy of a permanent magnet and the energy associated to magnetisation.
Wpm,source = ∫
Ωpm
Wmag = ∫
Ωpm
⃗ 2r B
⃗TB
⃗
B
− r dΩpm
2μ
μ
(2.71)
⃗2
B
dΩpm
2μ
where Ωpm denotes the sub domain of Ωmag , in which describe permanent magnets, Wpm,source denotes the intrinsically stored energy
of the magnet and Wmag the energy that is associated with a varying
magnetic flux. The the total magnetic energy Wpm can be expressed
as the sum of the two.
B
B
Br
Br
wpm
w′pm
Figure 2.9
energy and co-energy of a linear
permanent magnet
H
−Hc
−Hc
H
Using again the convention described in Sec. 2.2.1, the co-energy
for permanent magnets with constant permeability can be computed by
⃗
˚
H
⃗
H
⎡
˚
⃗ 2 ⎤⎥
⎢ T˚
H
˚
˚
˚
˚
⎢
⎥
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
= ∫ B(H) dH = ∫ Br + μH dH = ⎢Br H + μ ⎥
2 ⎥ (2.72)
⎢
0
0
⎣
⎦0
2
⃗
⃗ Tr H
⃗ + μH
=B
2
⃗
H
w′pm
This will be negative, as permanent magnets operate in the second
⃗ and B
⃗ r point in
quadrant of the B-H coordinate system, where H
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
49
⃗r ⋅ H
⃗ negative.
opposite directions rendering the scalar product B
This is denoted in the B-H coordinate system by negative values
for H. Fig. 2.9 shows the energy and co-energy as defined in (2.10)
and (2.72) in the magnetisation curve of a linear permanent magnet
in a B-H coordinate system.
Energy Exchange by Means of a Coil
⃗ and H
⃗ and,
Now that the internal energy is defined in terms of B
⃗ the same can be done for the energy changes
thus, in terms of A,
introduced in (2.60).
The energy change due to an external current density, dWe , can be
expressed by
⃗ dΩmag
dWe = ∫ ⃗je ⋅ dA
(2.73)
Ωmag
(2.73) can be derived by applying the Ampere’s law (2.3 a) and ap⃗ ⋅ (B
⃗ = (∇ × A)
⃗ ⋅B
⃗ ⋅ (∇ × B)
⃗ × A)
⃗−A
⃗ as
plying the vector identity A
shown in [148]. Applying the divergence theorem afterwards yields
⃗ dΩmag = ∫ H
⃗
⃗ ⋅ dB
⃗ dΩmag + ∫ (H
⃗ × dA)d∂Ω
mag
∫ ⃗je ⋅ dA
Ωmag
Ωmag
∂Ωmag
where ∂Ωmag denotes the boundary of Ωmag . Assuming that the
magnetic vector potential is zero on the boundary of Ωmag , as usually done for electric machines, eliminates the second term and
leaves only the magnetic energy in Ωmag .
Assuming that the current density is constant yields
⃗ dΩmag
We = ∫ ⃗je ⋅ A
(2.75)
Ωmag
The energy exchange of a coil is more complicated than that, because the current of a coil is linked to the voltage drop over the
coil. Assuming that the external voltage is set, so that the current
in the coil ic (t) is constant, the energy introduced into the system
by a coil is, indeed, equal to (2.75). Inserting (2.55) into (2.75) yields
Wcoil =
ic (t) N
⃗ dΩmag
∫ ⃗ej ⋅ A
Γw
(2.76)
Ωmag
The change of the magnetic co-energy due to currents in a coil can
be calculated by
⃗ ⃗je ) ⋅ d⃗je dΩmag
dW′coil = ∫ A(
Ωmag
(2.77)
(2.74)
50
2 Modelling Techniques
However, (2.16) shows that the flux linkage and, thus, the magnetic
vector potential cannot be considered constant when the current
changes.
Energy Exchanged with Mechanical Systems
The energy exchanged between the mechanical domain and the
magnetic domain in the continuous case can be derived from the
second term in (2.60)
dWex,m = ∫ ⃗fmag ⋅ d⃗
u dΩcpl
(2.78)
Ωcpl
For the continuous equation, the force density is used instead of
the total force, because the displacement varies over ⃗x. Sec. 2.4.5 is
dedicated to calculating the magnetic force in more detail as it is a
crucial part of the coupling.
Dissipated Energy by Eddy Currents
The last term in (2.60) is the energy dissipated by eddy currents.
This effect is caused by Joule heating in the structure. The instantaneous power that is lost can be expressed by multiplying the current density with the Lorentz force
dweddy
⃗′
= ⃗jeddy ⋅ E
dt
(2.79)
It is possible to define a dissipation function analog to Rayleigh’s
dissipation function for mechanical systems. [102, p. 403] defines
this dissipation function for Ohmic resistances in electric circuits
as
1
(2.80)
Dmag = RI2
2
where R denotes the resistance and I the current in a conductor.
The continuous equivalent to (2.80) can be written as
Dmag = ∫
Ωmag
γ⃗
jeddy ⋅ ⃗jeddy dΩmag
2
(2.81)
Inserting the definition of the eddy currents (2.46) into (2.81) yields
Dmag = ∫
Ωmag
⃗ 2
⃗
γ ∂A
∂A
⃗ + (⃗v × ∇ × A)
⃗ 2 ] dΩmag
[(
) −2
⋅ (⃗v × ∇ × A)
2
∂t
∂t
(2.82)
The eddy current losses depend, thus, on the velocity of the displacement of the structure as well as the magnetic vector potential and its time derivative. The forces and currents acting on the
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
51
system, caused by the dissipation, can be calculated from (2.82) by
expressing the velocity ⃗v as the time derivative of the displacement
⃗˙ and taking the derivative of the dissipation function density (the
u
⃗
part under the integral in (2.82)) with respect to the vector fields u
⃗
and A.
⎤
⎡
⎢ ∂ ⎥
⎥
⎢
−
⃗ 2
⃗
⃗f
∂A
1 ⎢ ⃗˙ ⎥⎥
∂A
⃗ 2 )]
⃗ + (u
⃗˙ × ∇ × A)
⃗˙ × ∇ × A)
[γ
((
) −2
⋅ (u
[⃗eddy ] = ⎢⎢ ∂ u
⎥
jeddy
2⎢ ∂ ⎥
∂t
∂t
⎥
⎢−
⎢ ⃗˙ ⎥
⎣ ∂A ⎦
(2.83)
⎤
⎡
⃗
⎥
⎢
⎢−[∇ × A]
⃗ × ∂ A + [∇ × A]
⃗ ⎥⎥
⃗ × [u
⃗˙ ]× [∇]× A
⎢
∂t
⎥
⎢
= γ⎢
⎥
⃗
⎥
⎢
∂
A
⎥
⎢
˙
⃗
⃗]× [∇]× A
− [u
⎥
⎢
∂t
⎦
⎣
˙
˙
⃗
⃗
⃗ ×∇× A and [●]× is the matrix operator form
⃗]× [∇]× A = u
where [u
of the cross product defined as the skew symmetric matrix:
⎡ 0
⎢
⎢
[⃗a]× = ⎢ a3
⎢
⎢−a2
⎣
−a3
0
a1
a2 ⎤⎥
⎥
−a1 ⎥
⎥
0 ⎥⎦
(2.84)
Energy of the Elastic Field
For the mechanical system the potential energy stored in the strain
of the material can be calculated by:
Wstrain = ∫
Ωmech
1 T
ε σdΩmech
2
(2.85)
where σ denotes the stress tensor and ε the strain tensor. The kinetic energy can be expressed by
T = ∫
Ωmech
1 ˙2
⃗ dΩmech
ρu
2
(2.86)
The energy changes for the mechanical domain are stated in (2.62).
⃗
The external mechanical energy Vext can be expressed in terms of u
by
⃗ ⋅ ⃗te dΓσ
⃗ ⋅ ⃗fext dΩmech + ∫ u
(2.87)
Wext,m = ∫ u
Ωmech
Γσ
where ⃗te denotes the surface forces imposed on the boundary Γe as
defined by (2.36) and ⃗fext the body forces imposed on the mechanical domain Ωmech . The exchange energy was already defined in
52
2 Modelling Techniques
(2.78). The energy loss by friction dDmech can be calculated by
⃗˙ ) ⋅ d⃗
⃗˙ ⋅ d⃗
dWfric = ∫ ⃗ffric (u
u dΩmech = ∫ −cu
u dΩmech
Ωmech
(2.88)
Ωmech
where ⃗ffric denotes the friction forces that are always directed in the
opposite direction of the displacement change d⃗
u and dk the fric⃗˙ .
tion coefficient which relates the force to displacement change u
Now, a dissipation function can be defined as done in [52]
⃗
u˙
⃗ dΩmech
⃗) ⋅ d˚
Dmech = ∫ ∫ ⃗ffric (˚
u
u
(2.89)
Ωmech 0
⃗ is an integration variable. From Dmech the friction force
u
where ˚
can, thus, be derived by
⃗ffric = − ∂Dmech
⃗˙
∂u
2.4.5
(2.90)
Magnetic Force Calculation
(2.28) states that the magnetic force acting on a structure can be
calculated from the magnetic energy. For the continuous case the
⃗ Fur⃗(xξ).
magnetic domain Ωmag depends on the displacement u
thermore, for computing the total magnetic force of a structure, integrating over the total magnetic domain is necessary. Thus (2.28)
becomes
dWmag =
∂Wmag
∂
d⃗
u(⃗x) =
∂⃗
u
∂⃗
u
∫
wmag dΩmag d⃗
u(⃗x)
Ωmag (⃗
u(⃗
x))
∂
⇒ ⃗fmag = −
∫
∂⃗
u
(2.91)
wmag (⃗
u(⃗x)) dΩmag
Ωmag (⃗
u(⃗
x))
So when applying the principle of virtual work, as in (2.91), the dependency of the domain on the displacement must be taken into
account.
Energy and Co-energy for Moving Domain Boundaries
To evaluate the energy change in (2.91), it is important to evaluate
the energy change on an arbitrary magnetic domain, Ωmag , which
depends on a virtual displacement δ⃗
u. For the various magnetic
energy definitions given in (2.10), (2.66) and (2.65), the change of
energy under a virtual displacement can be expressed in terms of a
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
53
change of the magnetic flux density or magnetic field. As explained
in [62], the behaviour of the magnetic flux density and the magnetic
field are very different under deformation.
This is caused by the various independent variables for the magnetic flux and the magnetic field (see Sec. 2.3). The magnetic flux
density has as independent variables the total magnetic flux Φc and
⃗. Consequently, the magnetic flux should be
the dispalcement u
constant under deformation. As the same needs to be true for the
magnetic energy, which also has the fluxes and the displacement as
independent variables, the magnetic flux density should be used to
compute changes to the magnetic energy under deformation.
On the other side, for the computation of the co-energy change,
which has the displacements and system’s currents as independent
variables, the magnetic field should be used as it has the same independent variables.
Assuming a linear magnetic domain, for which the energy is described by (2.66), the change of that energy with respect to a virtual
deformation can be split up in a change of the volume and a change
of the energy density
δWmag,lin ∣δΦ
B =0
= Vδwmag,lin ∣δΦ
B =0
+ δV wmag,lin
(2.92)
where δ(●)∣δx=0 indicates that for the variation δ, x is constant. V
denotes the volume of the domain. (2.28) shows that the magnetic
forces are calculated by evaluating the change of the magnetic energy within the domain under a deformation, while holding the
flux linkage constant. For an arbitrary domain, a constant flux linkage is equivalent to a constant total magnetic flux on any of the
boundaries of the domain. As shown in [62], assuming constant
flux in and out of the magnetic domain under deformation yields
⃗
δB∣
δΦ
B =0
⃗−B
⃗ tr(∇δ⃗
= ∇δ⃗
uB
u)
(2.93)
(2.93) defines the change of the magnetic flux for an arbitrary displacement δ⃗
u when the total flux through all surface of that domain
stays constant over the deformation.
To get a better understanding of the implications of (2.93) let us
analyse the specific energy of a magnetic field under deformation.
With (2.93), it can be shown that the specific energy of a magnetic
domain is always constant under a scaling deformation, i.e. a deformation that only scales the domain but does not contain any
further displacements, when the total magnetic flux is held constant.
Using the definition of the specific magnetic energy for linear materials, (2.66), and (2.93), the change of the specific magnetic energy
54
2 Modelling Techniques
can be described by:
δwmag,lin ∣δΦ
B
⃗2
1 ⃗T
⃗ − B tr(∇δ⃗
u)
B ∇δ⃗
uB
μ
μ
1 ⃗T
⃗
(∇δ⃗
u)rot B
= B
μ
=
=0
(2.94)
where (∇δ⃗
u)rot describes the part of (∇δ⃗
u) without the diagonal.
(2.94) shows that the specific energy under deformation does not
depend on the volume change but only on the rotation of the deformation δ⃗
u. A scaling of the domain will, thus, lead to no change
of the specific energy. It will, of course, lead to a change of the total
energy as the second term in (2.92) will change.
For the magnetic co-energy, the same relation as in (2.92) can be
derived
δW′mag,lin ∣δI=0 = Vδw′mag,lin ∣δI=0 + δV w′mag,lin
(2.95)
(2.29) states that the magnetic force can be computed by analysing
the change of the magnetic co-energy of a domain under deformation, while the currents in the domain are held constant. [62] derives for this case the following relation
⃗
⃗
δH∣
= −∇δ⃗
uH
δI=0
(2.96)
Following the same derivation as for the energy, it can be shown
that the specific co-energy is not constant under a deformation
which only scales the domain.
⃗ T ∇δ⃗
⃗
δw′mag,lin ∣δI=0 = −μH
uH
⃗ − μH
⃗ 2 tr(∇δ⃗
⃗ T (∇δ⃗
u)
= −μH
u)rot H
(2.97)
The specific co-energy will, thus, diminish when the volume of the
domain is increased.
Maxwell’s stress tensor
Maxwell’s stress tensor is an approach to define the magnetic stress
on a material in the same ways as it is done in continuum mechanics. Like the stress tensor σ in (2.35), it collects all shear and normal
stresses of an infinitesimal small cube. The tensor only depends on
the state of the material and magnetic field at its location. It can
be calculated directly from the magnetic flux density and magnetic
field values.
Maxwell’s stress tensor is derived from the principle of virtual work
in (2.91) (The derivation is a bit lengthy. See Appendix A for it). As
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
55
⃗ and ⃗
rel. betw. H
B spec. mag. energy
Description
⃗
⃗
BT H
=
2
linear magnet material
⃗
⃗
B = μH
wmag
Permanent Magnet
⃗
magnetisation behaves like H
under deformation
⃗
⃗ H)
⃗
B = μ(M+
wmag =
Permanent Magnet
remanence flux density behaves
like ⃗
B under deformation
⃗
⃗ +⃗
B = μH
Br
wmag =
⃗
⃗
BT H
⃗⃗
T=H
BT − I
2
⃗
BT ⃗
B ⃗T ⃗
−B M
2μ
(⃗
B−⃗
Br )2
2μ
(2.98)
The operator ⋅ denotes a divergence operation on a second order
tensor. The operation can be written in index notation as
∂Tij
∂xj
(2.99)
The total force on an object can then be calculated by integrating
over the whole volume of that object
⃗mag = − ∫ ∇ ⋅ T dΩcpl
F
⃗
⃗
Br ⃗
BTr
B2 − ⃗
B2r
B⃗
BT ⃗
−
−I
μ
μ
2μ
⃗
Br ⃗
BTr
B⃗
BT ⃗
+
μ
μ
⃗
B⃗
BTr
(⃗
B−⃗
Br )2
−2
− I(
)
μ
2μ
Maxwell’s stress tensor can be used like other stress tensors known
from continuum mechanics. Therefore, the magnetic force density
it generates in a structure can be computed by:
fmag i = −
T=
T=
it is derived from the magnetic energy of a material, the formulation changes with the various sorts of magnetic materials introduced in Sec. 2.2.2. Tab. 2.1 shows the formulations of Maxwell’s
stress tensor for various materials (See the derivation either in Ap⃗ and B
⃗
pendix A or [62]). As explained in the previous section, H
behave differently under deformation. For permanent magnets, it
is not known how the magnetisation/remanence flux density behaves in that case. Tab. 2.1 shows the resulting expressions for
Maxwell’s stress tensor for the various assumptions. In Tab. 2.1,
⃗ is used to indicate that the
the symbol for the magnetisation M
permanent magnetisation of a permanent magnet behaves as the
magnetic field, which was described in (2.96), and the symbol for
⃗ r , when (2.93) is used.
remanence flux density, B
⃗fmag = −∇ ⋅ T
Maxwell’s stress tensor
(2.100)
Ωcpl
Local Force Concentrations
For the coupling between the elastic and the magnetic field, local
forces are of interest as the deformation depends on them. (2.98)
Table 2.1
Different formulation of Maxwell’s
stress tensor for different materials.
I denotes the identity matrix
56
2 Modelling Techniques
implies that the magnetic force depends on the gradient of the magnetic field and the magnetic flux density. The larger those gradients
the larger are the resulting forces.
For the static case, gradients are highest at locations where the permeability changes abruptly. This is usually the case at the surface
of materials with a high relative permeability, such as the surface of
the stator teeth. (2.48) states that an abrupt change in permeability
results in an abrupt change of magnetic flux density. For an object
that has a significantly different permeability than its surrounding,
the main part of the applied magnetic forces is located at the surface
of that object.
For the dynamic case, the second term in (2.46) can create eddy
currents within a structure that contribute significantly to the total
force acting on the structure. Eddy current brakes are based on this
principle.
⋅105
2
0
−2
1,000
Figure 2.10
The Txx component of Maxwell’s
stress tensor plotted for a
permanent magnet (left) and a
piece of iron (right) next to it.
0
−1,000
Fig. 2.10 shows the normal x component of Maxwell’s stress tensor
for the static case, in which a permanent magnet and a piece of iron
attract each other due to the magnetic field.
From Fig. 2.10, two things can be deduced. Firstly, Fig. 2.10 shows
that around corners of permanent magnets, or its enclosing iron
structure, singularities in the magnetic field appear. These singularities contribute strongly to the total force acting on the permanent magnets. They pose a problem for the discrete calculation of
the magnetic force as it can lead to major inaccuracies depending
on which method is used (see Sec. 2.5.8).
Secondly, the lower part of Fig. 2.10 shows for the static case that
the change of the x component of Maxwell’s stress tensor across
the boundary between the iron and the air is significantly larger
than the gradient within the piece of iron. Therefore, the larger
2.4 Continous Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
57
part of the magnetic force in the static case is generated by the discontinuity of the specific magnetic energy at its interface as seen
in Fig. 2.10. This is also the case for nonlinear materials. These
materials are mainly ferromagnetic materials and store less energy
than non-magnetic materials such as copper or air for the same
magnetic field magnitude. For permanent magnets, which have a
permeability slightly higher than the one of air, this approximation
does not hold, as the gradients within the permanent magnet are
significant. This can be seen in the first part of Fig. 2.10.
Approximating Total Forces by Surface Forces
(2.100) states how to calculate the total force acting on a domain
from Maxwell’s stress tensor within that domain. Using Stoke’s theorem, the total force acting on a domain can be calculated by
⃗mag = − ∮ n
⃗T Td∂Ω
F
(2.101)
∂Ω
(2.101) has to be used with caution and is used wrongly in some FE
⃗ ⋅T, does not
packages. The term under the integral sign in (2.101), n
compute the local forces on the surface of the domain ∂Ω. The actual local forces on the surface are computed by taking the gradient
of Maxwell’s stress tensor over that surface.
⃗T T denotes the local forces on
The approximation that the term n
the boundary only holds when the forces within the domain, i.e.
the term ∇T T in Ω but not on ∂Ω in (2.100), hardly contribute to
the total force. This is true for the computation of static forces on
ferromagnetic materials, where the gradients within the material
are relatively low compared to the surface forces and no eddy currents exist.
In most finite element packages, the contribution of the gradient of
the magnetic field and magnetic flux density within ferro-magnetic
materials is neglected. Using Maxwell’s stress tensor simplifies the
force calculation at boundaries. Numerically, it is less complex to
calculate the change of the magnetic field and flux density across
an interface than the gradient within a domain.
Fig. 2.11 shows an interface of two materials over which the force
acting on material I should be calculated. The gradient of the Maxwell’s stress tensor over an interface can be calculated discretely by
taking the difference of each element of the tensor.
⃗fmag = −⃗x(⃗
⃗ − T (A))
⃗
u)T (TII (A)
I
(2.102)
⃗(⃗
where n
u) describes the normal vector of the interface. Because
the magnetic force is evaluated in the spatial coordinate frame, the
normal vector depends on the displacement of the structure.
58
2 Modelling Techniques
⃗
n
Material I
μI , T
I
⃗fmag
Material II
μI , T
II
Figure 2.11
Interface between two materials
with different permeability
For the case that one side has a much lower permeability than the
other side, the contribution of the side with the higher permeability
can be neglected. This is usually the case at an interface between a
ferromagnetic and a non-magnetic material
For the case that μI >> μII , (2.102) simplifies to
⃗fmag = −⃗
⃗
n(⃗x)T TII (A)
(2.103)
This method makes it possible to estimate local forces on nonlinear
materials without the evaluation of Maxwell’s stress tensor within
them.
2.5
Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical
Coupling
Solving coupled problems of complex geometry requires sophisticated discretisation techniques. In this thesis, the finite element
method (FEM) is used. For an extensive explanation see, for instance, [177]. Additionally, the multi-physical coupling requires
special solution approaches. This section covers these solution approaches and shows how the continuous expressions from Sec. 2.4
can be discretised using the FEM.
In this section, matrices for the finite element method are evaluated. All these matrices are element matrices. The domains over
which is integrated is the volume or surface of one element. The assembly process that follows the evaluation of the element matrices
is not included in this elaboration, as it is analogue to the matrix assembly for non-coupled systems and can thus be found in literature
[177].
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
59
Discretisation Using the Finite Element Method
2.5.1
For the discretisation of the coupled equations, the FEM is used.
This method approximates the values of the vector fields for the
⃗ x) by dis⃗(⃗ξ) and the magnetic vector potential A(⃗
displacement u
cretising the domain of the vector fields by a set of nodes. Nodal
⃗ x) at the
⃗(⃗ξ) and A(⃗
values represent the value of the vector fields u
location of the associated node. The values between the nodes are
approximated by so called shape functions.
⃗(⃗ξ) ≈ Nu (ξ)qu (t)
u
⃗ x) ≈ NA (x)qA (t)
A(⃗
(2.104)
In (2.104), Nu and NA denote the shape function of the elastic and
magnetic field, respectively. The generalised coordinates, qu and qA ,
denote the nodal values of the elastic and magnetic field, respectively. Note that the spatial and time information is separated now
in two variables. This simplifies finding a solution for the coupled
equations, (2.58). The magnetic field and the elastic field depend
on different systems of representation. While the elastic field is described in Lagrangian coordinates, the magnetic field depends on
Eulerian coordinates. This is denoted in (2.104) by the different coordinate vectors ξ and x for Lagrangian and Eulerian coordinates
frames, respectively. Note that the magnetic field depends on the
spatial coordinates and thus implicitly on the displacement of the
⃗(⃗ξ, t). This leads to the dependency of NA on qu ,
system as ⃗x = ⃗ξ + u
and subsequently all magnetic matrices depend on it too. This will
play a major role for the coupling terms between the two domains.
Additionally to the above set of coordinates, the currents for the
coils are collected in the current vector qc . In an electric machine,
there are usually three phases and, thus, three different currents.
Therefore, qc consists of three entries.
⎡i ⎤
⎢ c,a ⎥
⎢ ⎥
qc = ⎢ic,b ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢ ic,c ⎥
⎣ ⎦
(2.105)
where ic,a , ic,b and ic,c denote the currents in the coils of phase a,b
and c, respectively. As the currents are lumped variables, they have
no spatial distribution and no shape functions are necessary.
Staggered vs. Monolithic Approach
Solving multi-physical coupled problems requires a more sophisticated algorithm than non-coupled problems. Combining the two
2.5.2
60
2 Modelling Techniques
physics can create dependencies between the physics that are nonlinear. This way, a coupled system consisting of two linear physical
domains that are each for itself linear can become nonlinear when
the relation between the two physics is nonlinear. Most coupled
problems are, thus, nonlinear and require an iterative solution approach compared to a system governed by only one physics, which
can be solved in one step when the system is linear.
Start
Start
Solve Magnetic Field
Initial Configuration
Compute Magnetic
Forces Acting on
Structure
Linearise System around
Current Configuration
Update Spatial
Coordinates
Solve Structure
Check for Convergence
yes
End
Figure 2.12
Flow charts of staggered (left) and
monolithic (right) approaches for
solving two way coupled
magneto-mechanical systems
no
Solve Linearised Current
Configuration
Check for Convergence
Update Spatial
Coordinates
no
yes
End
There are two possible approaches to solving coupled problems.
The staggered approach solves both physics separately of each other.
The values that depend on the other domain are fixed while one
domain is solved. The algorithm goes back and forth between the
physics, updates the values that depend on the other physics and
iterates this way to a solution of the coupled problem.
For magneto-mechanical coupled problems, the magnetic system
is solved first. From that solution, the magnetic forces acting on
the structure can be computed. The elastic field can be solved using
the magnetic forces as given boundary conditions. The algorithm
checks if the two solution fit together, i.e. if the error norm for each
domain is smaller than the tolerance. If that is not the case, the spatial coordinates that depend on the displacement of the structure
are updated and the magnetic field is solved again. The algorithm
iteratively converges towards a solution, in which the errors of both
physics are smaller than the tolerance.
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
61
The alternative is the monolithic approach, which solves the various
physical systems simultaneously. For that, the equations need to be
combined in a single system of equations. This complicates the discretisation process, but it simplifies the iteration process, because
now a genuine Newton-Rhapson algorithm can be used to solve
the coupled problem. Fig. 2.12 shows the flow charts of the two
approaches next to each other.
Both approaches have their advantages and drawbacks. The monolithic approach requires more memory during the solution process
as now one large system of equations needs to be solved rather than
two smaller ones. It does need less iterations than the staggered
approach. Usually, the monolithic approach is chosen for smaller
systems where memory issues are not common. The staggered approach is used for large systems.
The monolithic approach for solving magneto-mechanical problems is introduced here, because only this approach facilitates a
coupled eigenvalue problem, which can compute the changes of
the system’s dynamics due to the coupling.
A Variational Approach to Magneto-Mechanical Coupled
Systems
Using a variational formulation, as done in [131], for the derivation of the system equations leads to a consistent way to derive the
monolithic coupled finite element formulation.
Sec. 2.4 derives two methods to calculate magnetic forces. The type
of system determines which method is used. Closed systems, i.e.
systems in which the total magnetic energy can only be changed by
magnetic forces, use the magnetic energy to determine magnetic
forces. Open systems, i.e. systems in which the magnetic energy
can change due to mechanisms besides magnetic forces, use the
co-energy. Therefore, distinguishing between the type of system is
fundamental for the derivation of the coupled system of equation.
Hamilton’s Principle for Closed Magneto-Mechanical Systems
According to Hamilton’s principle, the system follows a trajectory
so that the integral
t2
∫ T − Vdt
(2.106)
t1
is stationary with respect to any arbitrary virtual variation of the
displacement that is zero at t1 and t2 . [52]. T is the kinetic energy of the mechanical system and V the potential energy of the
2.5.3
62
2 Modelling Techniques
system. For scleronomic kinematic constraints and no dissipative
effects (2.106) can be reformulated to
d
⃗ =0
⃗˙ ) + V(⃗
(T (⃗
u, A))
u, u
dt
(2.107)
(2.107) states that the total energy stays constant, for systems with
only scleronomic constraints and no dissipative effects. For electric machines there are only scleronomic contraints when the rotor stands still. In operation, however, a rheonomic constraint is
applied to the magnetic field of the rotor, which depends on the
rotor’s rotation angle and thus time. However, the magnetic field
has no kinematic energy and, thus, the above transformation can
be done for magneto-mechanical coupled systems describing electric machines. (2.107) differs from variational principles of systems
that include only the structure by inclusion of the magnetic energy
(see for instance in [177]).
Assuming that the displacements are small, the kinetic energy de⃗˙ ). The
pends only on the time derivative of the displacement T (u
Lagrange equations in that case reads as
⎡ d ∂T
∂T ∂V ⎤⎥
⎢
−
)+
⎢− (
⎥
⎢ dt ∂ u
∂⃗
u ∂⃗
u ⎥⎥ = 0
⃗˙
⎢
⎢
⎥
∂V
⎢
⎥
−
⎢
⎥
⃗
⎣
⎦
∂A
(2.108)
∂V
⃗
where ⃗j = − ∂V
are the currents and forces, that follow
⃗ and f = − ∂⃗
u
∂A
directly from the principle of virtual work.
V can be separated in an external potential, Vext , and an internal
potential, Vint . The internal potential describes all energy that is
stored within the domain, it is defined by (2.59). When external
forces are conservative, they can be described by a potential energy,
as was done in (2.64). The external potentials are defined in such a
way that they are positive when they have introduced energy into
the system so that
V = Vint − Vext
(2.109)
In the same way, the currents and forces can be separated into internal and external ones. They can be derived by applying the principle of virtual work to the potential energy V. That leads to
⎡ ∂V ⎤
⎢
⎥
⎢−
⎥
⃗fext
⃗fint
⎢ ∂⃗
⎥
u
⎥
[⃗ ] − [⃗ ] = ⎢
⎢ ∂V ⎥
jext
jint
⎢−
⎥
⎢ ⃗⎥
⎣ ∂A ⎦
(2.110)
where ⃗fint denotes the internal forces and ⃗jint the internal currents,
whereas ⃗fext and ⃗jext denote the external forces and currents, respectively.
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
63
Inserting the various energy terms from (2.64) and (2.59) and inserting (2.86) for the kinetic energy term in (2.108) yields
⎤
⎤ ⎡
⎡
⎢⃗fkin (u
¨
⃗ ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢⃗fext,mech (⃗
⃗) + ⃗fstrain (⃗
u)⎥⎥
u) − ⃗fmag (⃗
u, A)
⎢
⎥
⎥=⎢
⎢
⎥
⎥ ⎢ ⃗j (⃗
⎢
⃗
⃗jint (⃗
u, A)
⎥ ⎢ pm u) ⎥
⎢
⎦
⎦ ⎣
⎣
(2.111)
where ⃗fkin is the inertia force computed by
⃗fkin = −ρu
¨⃗
(2.112)
⃗fstrain (⃗
u) the elastic forces caused by the deformation of the system,
⃗ the mag⃗jint the internal currents of the magnetic field, ⃗fmag (⃗
u, A)
⃗
u) the external forces acting
netic forces defined in (2.91), fext,mech (⃗
on the system and ⃗jpm (⃗
u) the currents representing the excitation of
the permanent magnets. The coil energy and coil currents are not
included here, as in closed magnetic systems no coils are present.
In (2.111), it becomes apparent, why the energy of permanent magnets was split in a source part and a linear part in (2.71). The currents that are computed by deriving Wpm,source are denoted by ⃗jpm in
(2.111) and are written on the right hand side. The currents repres⃗ The curent a source for the magnetic field and are constant over A.
rents computed from the other energy in (2.71), Wmag , are denoted
by ⃗jint , as these currents are created by the change of the magnetic
⃗
field within the magnet and change with A.
(2.111) can be used to simulate the dynamic behaviour of a lossless
mechanical system under influence of a magnetic field that reacts
instantaneously. The eddy currents that introduce a delay into the
behaviour of the magnetic field and the influence of friction losses
will be introduced in Sec. 2.5.3.
Hamilton’s Principle for Open Magneto-Mechanical Systems
For open magnetic systems, i.e. magnetic systems including coils,
the magnetic co-energy instead of the magnetic energy is used to
calculate magnetic forces, as explained in Sec. 2.3. Hamilton’s principle includes the magnetic enthalpy instead of the magnetic energy
in such a case.
The idea for the magnetic enthalpy was taken from the analysis of
electro-static mechanical coupled systems. These system’s equations resemble the equations of magneto-mechanical coupled systems [113, 131, 151]. They also can be categorised in open and closed
systems and according to the system type different state functions
are used to calculate the force. Electro-static mechanical coupled
systems have been receiving more attention than magneto-mechanical systems, because they describe the vibration behaviour of
64
2 Modelling Techniques
piezo electric transducers and microsystems. [151] introduces the
electric enthalpy for open electro-static mechanical systems.
⃗
⃗T D
Ψelt = Velt − E
(2.113)
where Velt denotes the total potential energy of the electric and
mechanical systems combined and Ψelt the electric enthalpy. For
magneto-mechanical systems, a magnetic enthalpy can be introduced for open systems
⃗
⃗TH
Ψmag = V − B
(2.114)
where Ψmag denotes the magnetic enthalpy and V the potential energy of the elastic and the magnetic field combined as defined in
(2.109). Splitting up the potential energy in its mechanical part and
magnetic part and using the definition for the magnetic co-energy,
(2.67), (2.114) can be written as
⃗⋅H
⃗
Ψmag = Wstrain + Wmag − B
⃗
⃗ −B
⃗TH
⃗TH
= Wstrain − W′mag + B
=
(2.115)
Wstrain − W′mag
Using the magnetic enthalpy changes the set of variables used to
describe the system. Instead of the magnetic vector potential, the
current densities are used as independent variables. As explained
in Sec. 2.3.1, this makes it possible to calculate the force of the magnetic field acting on the structure for a known coil current.
Consequently, the forces and vector potential can be calculated by
⎡ ∂Ψmag ⎤
⎥
⎢−
⎥
⎢
⃗fext
⃗fint
⎥
⎢ ∂⃗
u
⎥
[⃗ ] − [⃗ ] = ⎢
⎢ ∂Ψmag ⎥
Aext
Aint
⎥
⎢−
⎢
∂⃗j ⎥⎦
⎣
(2.116)
which are the open magnetic system’s equivalents to mechanical
forces and currents in the closed magnetic system. Inserting again
the various definitions of energy in (2.59), (2.86) and (2.64) yields
⎤
⎤ ⎡
⎡
⃗fext (⃗
⎥
⎢⃗fkin (⃗
u)
u) + ⃗fstrain (⃗
u) − ⃗fmag (⃗
u,⃗j)⎥⎥ ⎢⎢
⎥
⎢
⎥ (2.117)
⎥=⎢
⎢
⎢
⎥
⎢
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
u, j) + Apm (⃗
u)⎥⎥
Aint (⃗
u, j)
⎥ ⎢Acoil (⃗
⎢
⎦
⎦ ⎣
⎣
Since the currents are the independent variable now, the magnetic
field needs to be described in terms of them, rather than in terms
of the magnetic vector potential. It is possible to rewrite the finite
element formulation in terms of the currents, but this will deviate
from the FE formulation of magnetic fields in literature. Using the
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
65
current density as independent variable is convenient for calculating the magnetic force of an open system but it complicates the
calculation of the magnetic field.
Mixing the formulations of energy and co-energy in one system
facilitates the monolithic description of the open coupled system.
The force terms are evaluated on an element level in the discrete
model. Most of the elements, found in the FE model of an electric machine will not include a mechanism by which energy can
enter or leave the system, i.e. will not be part of a coil domain. For
these elements, the magnetic energy is used as a basis to compute
the magnetic forces. For elements, which are part of a coil, i.e. are
within Ωc in Fig. 2.6, are considered open systems and the magnetic enthalpy is used to compute the force term.
On an element level, the above considerations lead to the formulation in Sec. 2.4.5, where the change of co-energy and consequently
the force for deformation under constant currents is considered
which eventually leads to (2.96).
The Variational Approach including Dissipation Energies
For a system containing dissipation (2.107) can be extended by a
dissipation function D that contains the energy associated with
friction losses in the mechanical system and eddy current losses
in the magnetic field
D = Dmech + Dmag
(2.118)
where Dmech and Dmag are the dissipation energies defined in (2.89)
and (2.82), respectively. (2.107) becomes
δ (T + V) = −mD
(2.119)
as stated in [52, p. 26]. m is a factor that depends on the sort of
dissipation. m = 2, for viscous damping, when the general damping
force is proportional to the first derivative of the DoFs. In this case,
the equation of motion can be derived by the Lagrange equations
⎡ d ∂T
∂T ∂V ∂D ⎤⎥
⎢
⎥
⎢− (
)
+
−
−
⎢ dt ∂ u
∂⃗
u ∂⃗
u ∂u
⃗˙
⃗˙ ⎥⎥ = 0
⎢
⎥
⎢
∂V
∂D
⎥
⎢
−
−
⎥
⎢
∂A
⃗ ∂( )
⎥
⎢
∂
A
⎦
⎣
∂t
(2.120)
where only the two terms including the dissipation function, D,
distinguishes (2.120) from (2.108). Inserting the energy terms from
(2.64) and (2.59) and the dissipation function from (2.118) yields for
closed systems:
66
2 Modelling Techniques
⎤
⎤ ⎡
⎡
⃗
⎥
⎢⃗ ¨ ⃗
⃗fstrain (⃗
⃗ffric (u
˙ ) + ⃗feddy ( ∂ A , A,
˙ )⎥⎥ ⎢⎢⃗fext (⃗
⃗ u
⃗ u
⎥
⎢fkin (u
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
f
(
A,
)
+
u
)
+
)
+
u
)
mag
⎥
⎥ ⎢
⎢
∂t
⎥
⎥=⎢
⎢
⎥
⎥ ⎢
⎢
⃗
∂
A
⎥
⎢
⎥
⎢
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗) + jeddy (
)
jint (A, u
⎥ ⎢ jpm ⎥
⎢
⎦
⎦ ⎣
⎣
∂t
(2.121)
For open systems, the external current term ⃗je is added to (2.121),
yielding
⃗
⎡
⎤
∂A
⎢⃗fkin (u
¨
⃗ u
⃗ u
⃗˙ )⎥⎥
⃗˙ ) + ⃗feddy (
⃗) − ⃗fmag (A,
⃗) + ⃗fstrain (⃗
, A,
u) + ⃗ffric (u
⃗ u)
⎢
⎢
⎥ = [ fext (⃗
∂t
]
⎢
⎥
⃗
⃗
∂A
jpm + ⃗je
⎢
⎥
⃗
⃗
⃗
⃗) + jeddy (
⎢
⎥
jint (A, u
)
⎣
⎦
∂t
(2.122)
Introducing Circuit Equations
To better analyse the effects of the magneto-mechanical coupling
on the currents in coils, the circuit equation (2.49) can be added
to the set of equations in (2.122). This addition to (2.122) cannot
be achieved in a consistent way, i.e. deriving it from a potential
energy, without going deeper into modelling of electric fields and
charge densities. This is beyond the scope of this thesis.
The addition of (2.49) changes (2.122) in two ways. First, the external current density ⃗je is no longer constant, because it depends
on the current in the coils, which are now included in the system.
⃗je , therefore, no longer represents an external current density but
an internal one. It is moved to the left side of the equation.
The second change concerns the eddy currents in the coil domains
of the FE model. The circuit equations collect all electric potential
differences and currents in the coils. The potential difference that
a changing magnetic field has and the resulting eddy currents are
part of that. Therefore, the potential difference created by a changing magnetic field needs to be collected and added to the circuit
equation. This is done by (2.52), which is part of the circuit equation. To ensure that these potential differences and resulting currents are not accounted for twice, the eddy current term in (2.122)
needs to be omitted in coil domains.
The coupled equations for a domain where the external current is
determined by an extra circuit equation reads as
⎤
⎡⃗ ¨ ⃗
⎤
⃗ u
⎢fkin (u
⃗˙ )⎥⎥ ⎡⎢⃗fext (⃗
⃗) − fmag (A,
⃗) + ⃗fstrain (⃗
u) + ⃗ffric (u
u)⎥⎥
⎢
⎢
⎥ ⎢
⎢
⎥
⎥ ⎢ ⃗
⎢
⃗ u
⃗jint (A,
⃗) − ⃗je (ic )
⎥ = ⎢ jpm ⎥⎥
⎢
⎥ ⎢
⎢
⎥
⎥ ⎢
⎢
⃗
∂A
⎥ ⎢ vext ⎥⎥
⎢
)
+
v
(i
)
v
(
⎥ ⎣
⎢
ohmic c
ind
⎦
⎦
⎣
∂t
(2.123)
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
Discretisation of the Equations
67
2.5.4
The set of nonlinear equations, (2.123), are the same coupled partial differential equations that were already stated in (2.58). In Sec.
2.4.3 the physics were coupled by the use of physical understanding. In Sec. 2.5.3 on the other hand, the derivation started from the
Hamiltonian of the coupled system and used a variational principle.
The equations are so complex that they cannot be solved analytically. Therefore, a discretisation is necessary, in order to solve them
numerically. After discretisation, a nonlinear solver such as the
Newton-Rhapson algorithm can be employed to solve the system
of coupled equations (2.123).
Because all nonlinear solving algorithms use an iterative scheme,
in which linear systems at a certain system state are evaluated, it
is convenient to write the coupled nonlinear system of equations
(2.123) in matrix form, in which the entries of the matrices depend
on the nodal values qA and qu . After applying the discretisation in
(2.104) and (2.105), (2.123) becomes
⎡ q ⎤ ⎡F (q )⎤
⎡ q˙ ⎤
⎡ q¨ ⎤
⎢ u ⎥ ⎢ ext u ⎥
⎢ u⎥
⎢ u⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥
⎢˙⎥
⎢¨⎥
M ⎢qA ⎥ + C(qA , qu ) ⎢qA ⎥ + K(qA , qu ) ⎢qA ⎥ = ⎢ Jpm ⎥ (2.124)
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢ qc ⎥ ⎢ vext ⎥
⎢ q̇c ⎥
⎢ q̈c ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣
⎦
⎣ ⎦
⎣ ⎦
with
⎡K
⎢ uu
⎢
K = ⎢KAu
⎢
⎢ 0
⎣
⎡M
⎢ uu
⎢
M=⎢ 0
⎢
⎢ 0
⎣
KuA
KAA
0
⎡ ∂ 2 V2int
0 ⎤⎥ ⎢⎢ ∂q
u
⎥
∂ 2 Vint
KAc ⎥ = ⎢⎢ ∂q
∂q
u
A
⎥
Kcc ⎥⎦ ⎢⎢ 0
⎣
∂ 2 Vint
∂qu ∂qA
∂ 2 Vint
∂q2A
⎡
0 0⎤⎥ ⎢⎢ ∂∂¨⃗q ( dtd ( ∂∂T⃗q˙ ))
u
⎥ ⎢ u
0 0⎥ = ⎢
0
⎥ ⎢
0 0⎥⎦ ⎢
0
⎣
0
T
⎤
⎡ ∂ ⎤
⎤T ⎞
⎥ ⎛⎢ ∂qu ⎥ ⎡⎢
F
(q)
int
⎥
⎢ ⎥
∂ 2 Wcoil ⎥
⎥ = ⎜⎢ ∂ ⎥ ⎢⎢Jint (qA ) − Je (qc )⎥⎥ ⎟ (2.125)
− ∂q
⎜⎢ ∂qA ⎥ ⎢
A ∂qc ⎥
⎥ ⎟
⎥
∂ ⎥⎢
∂vohmic ⎥ ⎝⎢
⎥ ⎣ vohmic (qc ) ⎥⎦ ⎠
⎢ ∂q
⎦
⎣ c⎦
∂qc
0
⎤
0 0⎥⎥
⎥
0 0⎥
⎥
0 0⎥⎦
(2.126)
and
⎡C
⎢ uu
⎢
C = ⎢CAu
⎢
⎢ 0
⎣
CuA
CAA
CcA
⎡ ∂2D
0⎤⎥ ⎢⎢ ∂2q̇2u
⎥
0⎥ = ⎢⎢ ∂ q̇∂u ∂Dq̇A
⎥
0⎥⎦ ⎢⎢ 0
⎣
∂2D
∂ q̇u ∂ q̇A
∂2D
∂ q̇2A
∂vind
∂ q̇A
T
0⎤⎥ ⎛⎡⎢ ∂∂q̇ ⎤⎥ ⎡F (q̇ ) + F (q̇)⎤T ⎞
u
⎢
⎥
fric
eddy
u
⎥
⎢ ∂ ⎥⎢
⎥ ⎟
⎢ ⎥
0⎥⎥ = ⎜
Jeddy (q̇)
⎥ ⎟
⎜⎢ ∂ q̇A ⎥ ⎢⎢
⎥
⎥
⎢ ∂ ⎥
⎥ ⎠
vind (q̇A )
0⎥⎦ ⎝⎢⎣ ∂ q̇c ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣
⎦
where K denotes the tangent stiffness matrix, M the mass matrix of
the system and C the damping matrix.
The following sections (Sec. 2.5.5 - Sec. 2.5.10) will show derive
the various terms in (2.125), (2.126) and (2.127), using the equations
derived in Sec. 2.4. To do so, the various energies introduced in
(2.127)
68
2 Modelling Techniques
Sec. 2.4.4 need to be express discretely in terms of the nodal values of the two variable fields and then differentiated with respect
to them. Once that is done, a nonlinear solver can be used to solve
the discretised equations as described in Sec. 2.5.2.
In this section, the introduced matrices are element matrices. Depending on which physics are present in a certain element, various
formulation have to be used and certain matrices can be neglected.
2.5.5
Discretisation of the Elastic Field
The internal mechanical energy of the system can be calculated according to (2.86) and (2.85). Using the discretisation introduced in
(2.104), it is now possible to express the strain tensor ε in a discretised way.
ε ≈ Bu qu
(2.128)
where Bu is a matrix containing the spatial derivatives of the shape
functions Nu . For the finite element formulation the strain tensor
is usually written in Voigt notation [163], i.e. as a vector, listing all
elements of the strain tensor in a predefined order. Using the Voigt
notation, (2.34) can be expressed as a multiplication of matrices. In
this notation, the mechanical energy can be written as
Wmech = ∫
Ω
1 T T
1
qu Bu ΞBu qu + q̇Tu NTu ρNu q̇u dΩ
2
2
(2.129)
Ξ denotes the material stiffness matrix, introduced in (2.34). In
Voigt notation, it can be represented by a matrix instead of a fourth
order tensor. For an isotropic linear material, Ξ is constant over
time and for a domain of the same material. It can be calculated
from the material properties, Young’s modulus and Poisson ration.
Differentiating twice with respect to the displacement yields the
structural stiffness matrix. It consists of a part that is derived from
the mechanical energy, Kmech
uu , and one that is derived from the
mag
magnetic energy, Kuu . For a linear elastic material, which was assumed in (2.129), the structural part of the tangent stiffness matrix
Kmech
uu is constant.
Kuu =
∂ 2 Wmag
∂ 2 Wtot
T
=
ΞB
dΩ
+
B
u
∫
u
∂q2u
∂q2u
Ω
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸
¹¹¹¹¹¹¶
mag
(2.130)
Kuu
The second term in (2.130) is a coupling term. It will be discretised
in Sec. 2.5.8 together with the other coupling terms.
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
69
Differentiating the kinetic energy twice with respect to the time derivative of the displacement yields the structural mass matrix
Muu = ∫ NTu ρNu dΩ
(2.131)
Ω
External force distributions can be derived by discretising the external mechanical energy (2.87) and differentiating it with respect
to the mechanical degrees of freedom qu . That yields:
Fext = ∫ NTu fext dΩ + ∫ NTu,σ te dΓσ
Ω
(2.132)
Γσ
where Fext denotes a vector of nodal values for the external forces,
fext a vector of the external body force density evaluated at the coordinates of the nodes, te a vector of external force density applied
to the boundary Γσ , evaluated at the nodal points and Nu,σ 2D shape
functions of the finite element discretisation of Γσ .
The damping matrix can be derived differentiating D, as defined
in (2.118), twice with respect to the nodal values of the velocity.
The structural damping matrix consists, like the structural stiffness
matrix ,of two components. The first component is derived from
the mechanical dissipation function, whereas the other component
is derived from the magnetic dissipation function. The structural
damping matrix reads as
Cuu =
∂ 2 Dmecmagh
∂2D
T
=
N
D
N
dΩ
+
u
k
∫
u
∂ q̇2u
∂ q̇2u
Ω
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸
¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¶
mag
(2.133)
Cuu
where Dk denotes a diagonal matrix containing the viscous damping coefficients dk . The second term in (2.133) is a coupling term
and will be derived in Sec. 2.5.10. Now the PDE (2.35) can be written in its discrete uncoupled form as a system of linear equations.
Muu q̈u + Cuu q̇u + Kuu qu = Fext
(2.134)
Discretisation of the Magnetic Field
2.5.6
In (2.104), the discretisation for the magnetic vector potential was
introduced.
The magnetic field – magnetic flux density relation is used for the
energy equations introduced in Sec. 2.4.4. The magnetic flux density can be numerically expressed in terms of the nodal values of the
magnetic vector potential by
⃗ ≈ BA qA
B
(2.135)
70
2 Modelling Techniques
where BA represents a matrix containing the spatial derivatives of
the shape functions NA . The curl operator that is used to calculate
the magnetic flux density (see (2.38)) is included in the matrix BA .
Linear Materials and Permanent Magnets
Starting from the magnetic energy, the linear approximation of the
PDEs can be derived. Every magnetic material has a different numerical formulation. The magnetic energy in linear magnetic materials and permanent magnets can be expressed by (2.71), assuming that the magnetisation characteristic of permanent magnets is
also linear, as has been done in (2.6). Discretising this equation,
using the relation in (2.104), and the definition for the magnetic
vector potential, (2.38), yields
wpm ≈
1 T T
BT BA qA
qA BA BA qA + wpm,0 − r
2μ
μ
(2.136)
where wpm,0 is a constant depending on the magnetic properties of
the permanent magnet defined in (2.10). For materials that are no
permanent magnets the last two terms in (2.136) are zero.
The stiffness matrix is derived by taking the second derivative of
(2.136) with respect to the degrees of freedoms of the system, i.e.
qA .
1 T
KAA = ∫
B BA dΩmag
(2.137)
μ A
Ωmag
The magnetic stiffness matrix is the same for permanent magnets
and linear magnetisable materials. The two extra terms for permanent magnets in (2.136) depend only linearly on the nodal values of the magnetic field, qA . They can be discretise as source terms
Jpm . This term can be derived by taking the first derivative of the
third term in (2.136)
Jpm = −
qTA BTA Br
∂
+ wpm,0 dΩpm
∫
∂qA
μ
Ωpm
=−∫
Ωpm
BTA Br
dΩ
μ
(2.138)
As a source term, (2.138) should be written on the right hand side
of the PDE.
Discretising the dissipation function defined by (2.82) yields
1
Dmag = ∫ ( q̇TA NTA γNA q̇A + q̇Tu NTu [BA qA ]× γNA q̇A )
2
Ωmag
(2.139)
+q̇Tu NTu [BA qa ]× γ[BA qa ]T× Nu q̇u dΩmag
where [BA qA ]× is the skew symmetric matrix that defines the vector product. The operator [●]× is defined by (2.84).
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
71
For now, no movement is assumed and the second and third terms
in (2.139) are neglected as they are zero in that case. The dependency on the first derivative of the the displacement DoFs, q̇u , will
create a coupling term depending on the velocity of the structural
displacement. The second and third terms will be covered later in
Sec. 2.5.10. Without movement the discretised energy of the eddy
currents can be differentiated twice with respect to the nodal values
of the magnetic field to yield
CAA =
∂ 2 Dmag
= ∫ NTA γNA dΩmag
∂ q̇2A
(2.140)
Ωmag
where γ denotes a diagonal matrix which contains the conductivities in the various directions on its diagonal. For an isotropic
material, this matrix can be substituted by a scalar, because in that
case the conductivities for all directions are the same.
The magnetic mass matrix is also called magnetic damping matrix.
It results from a dissipated energy and, thus, decreases the energy
of the systems just like a damping matrix. Accordingly, MAA as well
as CAA are used for the magnetic mass matrix in literature. In this
thesis, the symbol CAA is used.
The magnetic mass matrix, CAA , is the same for the linear and nonlinear case, because the induced currents stay the same for the linear and nonlinear case. Laminated structures are usually modelled
as orthotropic materials. The conductivity normal on the lamination sheets is usually set to a lower values than the real conductivity
of the lamination material, to account for the effects of the lamination.
Nonlinear Materials
⃗ and H,
⃗ the procedure for solving
For a nonlinear relation between B
the equation differs to the linear case, as now the tangent stiffness
matrix depends on the values of the magnetic vector potential qA .
As shown in (2.125), the tangent stiffness matrix for the magnetic
field can be derived by
Kmech
AA =
∂Jint ∂ 2 Wmag
=
∂qA
∂q2A
(2.141)
The definition of the BH-curve plays a major role in computing
⃗ and B
⃗ is defined as an
this term. When the relation between H
analytic function, then (2.141) can be expressed analytically too. If
the relation is only defined as a set of points then the term can only
be evaluated numerically.
72
2 Modelling Techniques
Discrtised Mangetic System Equations
For a closed system, without any external currents, the derivation
of the magnetic field formulation is complete at this point. The
system can be written in its discrete form as
CAA q̇A + KAA qA = Jpm
2.5.7
(2.142)
Discretising Open Magnetic Systems
Systems that include coils, considered open magnetic systems, need
to include the extra terms resulting from the coils in the discrete
formulation. The additional terms result from the additional term
in the external energy for open systems and the corcuit equation
that was added to (2.123).
Discretising Coils
The discrete coupling terms for the interaction between the electric
circuit and the magnetic field can be derived from the voltage that a
changing magnetic field creates in the coil, vind , and the energy that
enters the magnetic field through a coil, Wcoil . Discretising (2.52)
yields
Nc
T T
(2.143)
vind =
∫ q̇A NA eJ dΩc
Γw
Ωc
where vind collects the induced voltages for all coils. For a three
phase coil system in electric machines it consists, thus, of three
components, one for each phase. ej denotes a matrix that defines
the direction of each phase current, i.e. for each component of qc ,
in an element.
Je = ej qc = qc
(2.144)
The coupling term in the damping matrix can then be computed to
by
CcA =
⎞
∂vind
∂ ⎛ Nc
⎜ ∫ q̇TA NTA eJ dΩc ⎟
=
∂ q̇A
∂ q̇A ⎝ Γw
⎠
Ωc
Nc
T
=
∫ NA eJ dΩc
Γw
(2.145)
Ωc
The term resulting from Wcoil is derived by taking the derivative of
the discretised version of the term with respect to qA and qc . Wcoil
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
73
in the continuous system is given by (2.76). Discretising it yields
KAc =
∂ 2 Wcoil
∂2
Nc T T
=
q B ej qc dΩc
∫
∂qA ∂qc ∂qA ∂qc
Γw A A
Ωc
(2.146)
Nc T
=∫
B ej dΩc
Γw A
Ωc
Finally, the resistance of the coil needs to be modelled. For this, a
’stiffness’ matrix Kcc is introduced, which contains the resistances of
the various coils. For electric machines, Kcc consists of three values.
⎡R
⎢ a
⎢
Kcc = ⎢ 0
⎢
⎢0
⎣
0
Rb
0
0 ⎤⎥
⎥
0⎥
⎥
Rc ⎥⎦
(2.147)
where Ra , Rb , and Rc represent the resistances of phase a,b and c,
respectively.
The Discrete Magnetic Field Equation for Open Systems
Bringing the various equations for the open magnetic system together, yields the coupled discrete equations for open magnetic systems.
0
[
CcA
K
0 q̇A
] [ ] + [ AA
0
0 q˙c
J
KAc qA
] [ ] = [ pm ]
vext
Kcc qc
(2.148)
For coil elements, there is no dissipating term in the magnetic mass
matrix, because the electric potential differences created by a changing magnetic field are collected in the coil inductance. The dissipation is modelled by the resistance of the coil circuit and is computed by the Kcc term.
Discrete Calculation of Magnetic Forces
So far, the elastic and the magnetic field have been discretised separately. For the coupling of the two physics, it is necessary to discretise the mechanisms that couple the physics. One of these mechanism is the magnetic force acting on the structure, denoted by
Fmag . This force will depend on the magnetic field and the displacement and influences the mechanical displacement.
The continuous formulation of the magnetic force was introduced
in Sec. 2.4.5. In this section, the continuous formulation is discretised and adapted for the finite element method.
2.5.8
74
2 Modelling Techniques
There are three methods to calculate the force on mechanical structures. All are based on the principle of virtual work. The methods
differ how the quantities are discretised. All three methods where
discussed in the passed. Since [79], the magnetic energy and its
change under deformation were in the focus of magnetic force calculation. Maxwell’s stress tensor was introduced shortly after. The
implementation for the FEM was done by [28], in which the nodal
method is introduced deriving the magnetic forces on the nodes of
a finite element mesh.
The system in Fig. 2.13 will be used to explain the drawbacks and
advantages of the various methods.
Using the Principle of Virtual Work Globally
The most accurate method for calculating forces on the whole domain is to use the principle of virtual work on a global level. That
means that the global energy of the magnetic field is calculated and
its sensitivity with respect to a defined displacement qu def is computed.
∂Wmag
Fmag = −
(2.149)
∂qu def
where Fmag denotes the nodal force values for all nodes that are
included in the defined displacement qu def . Usually, this defined
displacement is a rigid motion of a body within the magnetic field
such as the rigid rotation of a rotor in an electric machine. For a
defined rotation, it is possible to numerically differentiate the energy by the defined displacement after the simulation is done. With
this method, it is not possible to calculate local forces on individual
nodes.
Using Maxwell’s Stress Tensor
Maxwell stress tensor, which was introduced in Sec. 2.4.5, can also
be discretised and expressed by the variables introduced in (2.104).
For a linear magnetic material, such as air, the first line in Tab. 2.1
is applicable yielding for Maxwell’s stress tensor
⃗T ⃗
⃗B
⃗ T − I B H dΩ
T(qu , qA ) = ∫ H
2
Ω
1
1
≈ ∫ qA BA BTA qTA − I (qTA BTA BA qA ) dΩ
μ
2μ
(2.150)
Ω
The force on a surface can then be approximated by (2.103). The
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
75
discrete form of (2.103) reads as follows:
fmag = nT (qu )T(qu , qA )
(2.151)
The coupled part of the tangent stiffness matrix KuA can be derived
by taking the derivative of the magnetic force (2.103) with respect
to the nodal values of the magnetic vector potential. This yields
KuA = nT (qu )
∂T(qu , qA )
∂qA
a matrix.
∂T(qu , qA )
(2.152)
∂qA
is a 3rd order tensor. Multiplying it with a vector yields
As can be seen from (2.152), only elements that share an interface
with the structure create a magnetic force. In Fig. 2.13 only the
elements IV and VI have this common interface. The force created
by the other elements is, thus, neglected.
The magnetic contribution to the structural stiffness matrix can be
derived by
T
Kmag
uu = n (qu )
∂T(qu , qA )
∂qu
+
∂nT (qu )
T(qu , qA )
∂qu
(2.153)
Using the Principle of Virtual Work Locally
The method using Maxwell’s stress tensor has the disadvantage that
it does not compute forces within the structural domain. For that,
the gradient of Maxwell’s stress tensor needs to be evaluated numerically. Furthermore, for the force computation around corners,
it neglects elements that do not share a surface with the structure,
as showed in the previous section.
1m
y
z
2m
IV
x
III
Az = 1
3
II
VI
1m
I
V
2m
2
1
There is another technique of calculating the magnetic forces. Instead of multiplying the tensor with the surface of the interface it
Figure 2.13
Example system including a
singularity at the centre point of
the system
76
2 Modelling Techniques
calculates the change of magnetic energy associated with a change
of displacement of each node. This method was first discussed in
[28], where it was called nodal method. Although Maxwell’s stress
tensor is also derived from the principle of virtual work, using it introduces some inaccuracies in the calculation of the magnetic force
that the nodal method does not introduce.
Starting from the magnetic energy, wmag , the magnetic force can
be calculated by deriving the magnetic energy with respect to the
⃗. As shown in Appendix A this approach leads
displacement field u
to
⃗ T (∇δ⃗
⃗
⃗TB
⃗
B
u)B
B
δWmag = V
− tr(∇δ⃗
u)
(2.154)
μ
2μ
which is the same as (A.7), for a virtual displacement, δ⃗
u, in a linear
magnetic material. In (2.154), V denotes the volume of the element
and tr(∇δ⃗
u) denotes the traces of the tensor ∇δ⃗
u. Instead of using this formula to derive Maxwell’s stress tensor, it can be used to
calculate the magnetic force directly. Discretising ∇δ⃗
u, using the
finite element method (2.104), yields a matrix, B2u , containing derivatives of the shape function Nu , which is define by
∇⃗
u = [ ∂u
∂x
∂u
∂y
∂v
∂x
T
∂v
∂y ]
≈ B2u qu
(2.155)
for a 2D mesh. Because the tensor ∇⃗
u is not symmetric, all elements need to be written out.
Using the approximation in (2.155), the magnetic force vector can
be written as
Fmag = −
∂Wmag
1
= − ∫ BT2u F(qA )dΩ
∂qu
2μ
(2.156)
Ω
where F denotes a matrix that contains various products of magnetic flux density components.
F = [B2x − B2y
2Bx By
2By Bx
B2y − B2x ]
(2.157)
See Appendix A for a detailed derivation of this formula.
The submatrix of the tangent stiffness matrix denoting the coupling between the magnetic field and the structural mechanics, KuA ,
can be derived by taking the derivative of the magnetic force with
respect to the nodal value of the magnetic vector potential, as seen
in (2.125). The derivation, which leads to
KuA (qA ) =
1
T
∫ B2u F2 (qA )BA dΩ
2μ
Ω
with
B
F2 = [ x
−By
By
Bx
By
Bx
T
−Bx
]
By
(2.158)
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
77
is written out in Appendix A.
The last term of the stiffness matrix is the mechanical stiffness that
is created by the magnetic field. It can be computed by deriving the
magnetic energy with respect to a mechanical displacement. This
is shown in Appendix A
Kmag
uu =
1
T
∫ B2u F3 (qA )B2u dΩ
2μ
(2.159)
Ω
with
⎡
2Hx Bx
⎢
⎢
0
⎢
F3 = ⎢
⎢
2H
y Bx
⎢
⎢−(Bx Hx + Hy By )
⎣
0
2Hx Bx
(Bx Hx + Hy By )
2By Hx
2Hy Bx
−(Bx Hx + Hy By )⎤⎥
⎥
(Bx Hx + Hy By )
2Hx By
⎥
⎥
⎥
2By Hy
0
⎥
⎥
0
2Bx Hx
⎦
The Local Virtual Work Method applied to Permanent Magnets
As shown in [62], the energy and co-energy change of permanent
magnets under deformation depends on the behaviour of the magnetisation of the PM. In Sec. 2.4.5 it was shown that the magnetic
flux density and the magnetic field behave differently under deformation. This results from the dependence of the magnetic flux
on the flux linkage and, thus, on the total flux of the system, whereas
the magnetic field depends on the currents of the system. It is unclear how the magnetisation of a permanent magnet behaves under
deformation and if the magnetic fluxes or the ’imaginary’ currents
of the permanent magnet are constant. Therefore, both cases are
presented here.
The derivation for the two cases presented in this subsection can be
found in Appendix A.
For the first case the magnetic remanence changes like the mag⃗ r = δB
⃗r∣
⃗r −
netic flux density under deformation: δB
= ∇δ⃗
uB
δΦB =0
⃗ r . For this case the force acting on a permanent magnet
tr(∇δ⃗
u)B
can be written as
Fmag = −
1
T
∫ B2u F(qA )dΩ
2μ
Ω
1
T
−
∫ B2u FPM (qA )dΩ
2μ
Ω
+
1
T
∫ B2u FPM2 (qA )dΩ
μ
Ω
in its discretised from with
(2.161)
(2.160)
78
2 Modelling Techniques
FPM (qA ) = [B2rx − B2ry
FPM2 (qA ) = [Brx Bx
2Brx Bry
2Brx Bry
Brx By + Bry Bx
T
B2ry − B2rx ]
Bx Bry + Brx By
(2.162)
T
Bry By )]
(2.163)
For the second case, the remanence flux density behaves like the
magnetic field, and the ’imaginary’ currents in the permanent mag⃗ r . The discretised
⃗ r = δB
⃗r∣
= −∇δ⃗
uB
net are held constant: δB
δI=0
form of magnetic force reads as
Fmag = −
1
∫ B2u F(qA )dΩ
2μ
Ω
1
−
∫ B2u FPM (qA )dΩ
2μ
(2.164)
Ω
The coupling matrices for permanent magnet materials can be derived analog to the derivation for the linear magnetic material in
Appendix A, starting from (A.21) and (A.23).
Nonlinear Materials
For nonlinear materials, i.e. where the magnetic flux density and
the magnetic field are not linked by a constant scalar, it can be assumed that (2.96) and (2.93) are still valid because the intensity of
the magnetic field is assumed constant for their derivation. Therefore, the coupling matrices can be derived in the same way as in
Appendix A. However [62] claims that further research on the thermodynamic relations of ferromagnetic materials is necessary to ensure (2.96) and (2.93) are indeed valid for this type of material.
2.5.9
Comparing Different Methods of Calculating Magnetic
Forces
To illustrate the difference between the two methods of calculating
magnetic forces, consider the simple example depicted in Fig. 2.13,
of which the solutions is shown in Fig. 2.14. The magnetic field
in vacuum was simulated around a magnetically non-conducting
piece of structure. The singularity that is generated in such a system
is clearly visible in the right part of Fig. 2.14.
The system’s solution can be calculated analytically using conformal
mappings. This type of analysis has been done in [146] for an electric field. Conformal mappings and their applications to magnetic
fields are thoroughly explained in [16]. The computed solution for
this problem can be seen in the right part of Fig. 2.14, which shows
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
79
Force Distribution [N/m]
⋅106
0
−1
Analytical Solution
Maxwell’s Stress Tensor 100 elements
local virtual work 100 elements
local virtual work 10 elements
Maxwell’s Stress Tensor 10 elements
−2
−3
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
0
x [m]
2
4
norm of magnetic flux density [T]
the magnetic field lines and the magnetic flux norm of the solution.
Tab. 2.2 presents the computed forces in y direction for the three
methods described above and for the analytic solution. In the left
part of Fig. 2.14 the force density in y-direction is depicted over the
horizontal boundary of the system at y = 1, indicated by the red
dashed line in the right part of Fig. 2.14.
Method
Analytic Solution
Globally applied virtual work
Maxwell’s stress tensor
Locally applied virtual work
Figure 2.14
Magnetic field around corner
including singularity. The dashed
red line indicates the surface for
which the force is computed.
Calculated Force in y direction 100 elements Calculated Force in y direction 10 elements
absolute value of force
rel. error
absolute value of force
rel. error
−791 153 N
−795 630 N
0%
0.6%
−791 153 N
−766 050 N
0%
3.2%
−721 158 N
−793 659 N
8.8%
0.3%
−586 236 N
−766 050 N
25.9%
3.2%
The singularity at the corner results in an increased magnetic force
at the corner. This increase is not properly accounted for in the
force calculation method using Maxwell’s stress tensor. This can be
seen by the bad match of the force distribution between the analytical solution and the method using Maxwell’s stress tensor on
the left part of Fig. 2.14. From Tab. 2.2, it becomes clear that for
coarse meshes the method using the method of virtual work (globally and locally) yields more accurate results for the total force than
the forces computed by Maxwell’s stress tensor. The error that is associated with Maxwell’s stress tensor will decrease with increasing
numbers of elements in the model.
Table 2.2
Comparison of the various
methods to calculate magnetic
forces
80
2 Modelling Techniques
2.5.10
The Moving Mesh
Magneto-mechanical coupled systems of electric machines necessitate the distinction between two mechanisms that require a moving mesh. The first mechanism is the rotation of the machine’s rotor. This rotation depends on the rotor position and can easily be
computed from the rotation angle. The other mechanism is the deformation of the structure.
In the past, various methods for handling deformation and movement of the underlying structure of the magnetic field have been
proposed. The two most common ones are the method employing
Lagrange multipliers [56, 96] and the method using a moving mesh
[96, 126, 133]. The first one is mainly used to simulate the rotation
of the machine. The second method mainly for the simulation of
deformation of a structure.
In this thesis, only the moving mesh method will be discussed in
detail, because the method using Lagrange multipliers is rather well
known and is used in magnetic finite element models or structural
finite element models that include rotation or movement.
For a structural object in a magnetic field, the PDEs (2.47) or (2.45)
and (2.35) need to be solved for Ωcpl in Fig. 2.6. The magnetic field is
based on Eulerian coordinates, whereas the structural PDE is based
on Lagrangian coordinates. Implementing an Eulerian coordinate
system in the FE formulation means that each node of the mesh
of the magnetic field needs to move with the displacement of that
node qu . It is therefore necessary that a moving mesh is implemented in the finite element formulation for the magnetic field.
Because the PDEs of the magnetic field are based on the spatial coordinates, the integrals for the magnetic stiffness and mass matrix
(2.140) and (2.137) depend on the displacement of the structure.
The exact position of each node within the domain is arbitrary,
when solving the magnetic PDE (2.142) without mechanical interaction. It is, however, required that the distance between the nodes
is small enough so that the mesh can describe the gradients of the
magnetic field. Otherwise, the partial differential equation cannot
be solved accurately. The position of the boundary of a domain at
which the material properties change is important. The boundary
conditions in (2.48) depend on it and it has, therefore, an influence
on the solution of the magnetic PDE (2.142).
When deformation is introduced into the system, the above statement is no longer true. In that case, a distinction between domains
with a structure and fluids or gaseous domains has to be made.
For magnetic materials that have no structure, e.g. air, the position
2.5 Discrete Modelling of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling
81
air
structure
Figure 2.15
Moving Mesh around Structure
of the nodes of the mesh of the magnetic field is still not important.
Important is that the position of the boundaries of the air domain
follows the displacement of any adjacent structural domain. The
position of the magnetic nodes on the boundary have to change
according to the displacement of that boundary. The position of
the other nodes can be chosen freely, and thus, can be fixed. The
various categories of nodes and elements are depicted in Fig. 2.15.
The moving boundary, represented by the thick line, only has an influence on the grey elements. Because the nodal placement within
the domain is arbitrary, the other nodes, depicted by crosses, can
be fixed.
For domains that have a structure, however, the nodal position is
very much of importance. Firstly, the force computed in (2.98)
needs to be applied to the nodes of the elastic field. It is therefore
convenient to evaluate (2.98) at the position of the nodes of the
elastic field. Secondly, the movement of the structure can induce
eddy currents. These eddy currents, need to be applied to the magnetic PDE at the location of their generation. In order for the magnetic nodes to follow the deformed structure, the magnetic nodes
have to follow the displacement of the structure and thus depend
on the deformation.
Influence of the Moving Mesh on the Magnetic Field
The moving mesh, introduced in the previous section, is a tool to
simulate the influence of the displacement of the structure onto the
magnetic field. Because the moving mesh follows the displacement
of the structure, the resulting changes on the magnetic field are actually the influences of the deforming and moving structure.
To discretise the effect, the moving boundary has on the magnetic
field in the air domain, the magnetic stiffness matrices of the elements directly adjacent to the structure (in Fig. 2.15 the light grey-
82
2 Modelling Techniques
ish elements) need to be expressed in terms of the displacement qu .
Starting from the total energy Wtotal , the internal currents Jint can
be derived by taking the partial derivative of the energy with respect
to the magnetic displacement. The influence of the displacement
on these internal current can be expressed in the coupling matrix
KAu
∂Jint
∂ 2 Vint
KAu (qA , qu ) = −
=
(2.165)
∂qu ∂qu ∂qA
Vint can be substituted by Wmag , because of all energies in (2.59)
only the magnetic energy, Wmag , depends on both types of nodal
values, the displacement and the magnetic field. All other energies
will yield zero when derived with respect to the nodal values of the
displacement and the magnetic field.
For a potential, the order of taking derivatives does not matter. It
is therefore possible to write
KAu =
∂
∂
(
Wmag )
∂qu ∂qA
∂
∂
∂
=
(
Wmag ) = −
Fmag = KTuA
∂qA ∂qu
∂qA
(2.166)
And indeed, when the correct method is chosen for the calculation
of the coupling matrix KuA , the method using the local principle
work, the top left part of the coupled stiffness matrix K in (2.125)
becomes symmetric.
Eddy currents represent the other effect, how the magnetic field is
influenced by the mechanical deformation. In (2.46), it was stated
that the eddy currents depend on the time derivative of the magnetic conductor’s deformation. For the derivation of the magnetic
mass matrix in (2.139), this dependency was neglected. This term
is especially important for the simulation of rotating machinery.
Taking the derivative of the eddy current’s energy with respect to
the nodal values of the change of the magnetic vector potential and
the nodal velocities yields the coupling term
CuA (q) = CAu (q)T =
∂ 2 Dmag
∂ q̇u ∂ q̇A
= ∫ NTu [BA qA ]× γNA dΩmag
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
Ωmag
(2.167)
Fc (qA )
where [BA qA ]× is again the matrix representing the cross product
defined in (2.84) and already used in (2.139). The third and second
term of (2.139) does not contribute to this term as they do not depend on q̇u and q̇A .
2.6 Linearized Coupled Eigenvalue Problem
83
For a 2D model with triangular elements, Fc (qA ) can be evaluated
to read as
BN
Fc (qA ) = [ y A,A
−Bx NA,A
By NA,B
−Bx NA,B
By NA,C
]
−Bx NA,C
(2.168)
Like the coupling matrices KuA and KAu , CuA and CAu depend on
the magnetic vector potential itself.
The last term of the coupled damping matrix can be derived by deriving the dissipation function of the eddy currents, Dmag in (2.139),
twice by the displacement velocity.
Cmag
uu (q) =
∂ 2 Dmag
= ∫ 2NTu [BA qA ]× γ[BA qA ]T× Nu dΩ
∂ q̇2u
(2.169)
Ω
Again, two terms in (2.139) do not contribute due to their missing
dependency on q̇u .
The Discretised Coupled System
2.5.11
With the matrices introduced in Sec. 2.5, the nonlinear system of
equation (2.58) can be written as a linear discretised system that
depends on the nodal values of the magnetic field and the displacement field.
mag
⎤⎡ ⎤
⎡M
⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ mech
⎢ uu 0 0⎥ ⎢ q̈u ⎥ ⎢Cuu + Cuu (q) CuA (q) 0⎥ ⎢ q̇u ⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥
⎢
⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢
0 0⎥ ⎢q̈A ⎥ + ⎢
⎢ 0
CAu (q)
CAA (qu ) 0⎥ ⎢q̇A ⎥ +
⎥⎢ ⎥
⎢
⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎢ 0
0 0⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ q̈c ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣
0
CcA (q) 0⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ q̇c ⎥⎦
⎣
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
M
C
⎡Kmech + Kmag (q) K (q)
0 ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ qu ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ Fext ⎤⎥
⎢ uu
uA
uu
⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎢
+⎢
KAu (q)
KAA (qu ) KAc (qu )⎥ ⎢qA ⎥ = ⎢ JPM ⎥
⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎢
⎢
0
0
Kcc ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ qc ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣Vext ⎥⎦
⎣
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
(2.170)
K
Linearized Coupled Eigenvalue Problem
To analyse the changes that the magneto-mechanical coupling has
on the vibrational behaviour of a structure, it is necessary to conduct a modal analysis of the coupled system. To achieve that, a
monolithic coupled eigenvalue problem needs to be formulated.
Such a monolithic formulation has been done in [131] for electrostatic mechanical couplings. It makes it possible to calculate the
eigenvalues and mode shapes of the coupled system.
2.6
84
2 Modelling Techniques
Assuming that the displacements u are small, the effects of the displacement on the system matrices can also assumed to be small. In
that case, the values of the matrices can be approximated linearly
around a linearisation point q0 . The system described by (2.170)
can then be transformed into a monolithic linear eigenvalue problem that calculates the vibration behaviour of the system around
the point, q0 . Usually the system for zero displacement q0,u = 0
and a static magnetic field q0,A is chosen as linearisation point, q0 .
That yields the coupled eigenvalue problem
(K + λiC − λ2 M)Φ = 0
(2.171)
where Φ denotes the columns matrix of eigenvectors, λ the eigenvalues of the system and i the imaginary number.
Inserting the various terms for the stiffness, mass and damping
matrices into (2.171) yields
⎡Cmech + Cmag (q ) C (q )
⎡M
⎤
⎢ uu
⎢ uu 0 0⎥
0
uA 0
uu
⎛
⎢
⎥
2⎢
0 0⎥ + iλ ⎢
⎜−λ ⎢ 0
CAu (q0 )
CAA (q0,u )
⎢
⎢
⎥
⎝
⎢
⎢ 0
0 0⎥⎦
0
CcA (q0 )
⎣
⎣
mag
⎤
⎡Kmech + K (q ) K (q )
0
⎥⎞
⎢ uu
0
uA 0
uu
⎥
⎢
+⎢
KAu (q0 )
KAA (qu,0 ) KAc (qu,0 )⎥⎟ φ = 0
⎥
⎢
⎢
0
0
Kcc ⎥⎦⎠
⎣
2.7
0⎤⎥
⎥
0⎥ +
⎥
0⎥⎦
(2.172)
Summary
In this chapter, the fundamental mathematical relations and numerical methods were introduced to model magneto-mechanical
coupling in a monolithic way. Nonlinear as well as linear magnetic
materials were taken into account and several ways to calculate the
magnetic forces were presented. Finally, a way to calculate the
effects of a magnetic field on structural dynamics behaviour was
introduced which incorporated the linearisation of the nonlinear
coupled equation.
The introduced methods will be used in Chapter 4, 5 and 6 to simulate the coupled dynamic behaviour of electric machines and in
particular wind turbine generators.
George Edward Pelham Box and Norman Richard Draper [18, p. 74]
This Chapter is based on the papers:
Abstract:
Kirschneck, M., Rixen, D.J., Polinder, H.,van Ostayen, R.A.J.
Effects of Magneto-Mechanical Coupling on Structural
Modal Parameters. Topics in Modal Analysis II, 2014,
Volume 8
Structures that are exposed to a magnetic field
experience magnetic forces. As these forces are
geometry dependent, they vary with the
displacement of the structure that can result in an
additional stiffness. Furthermore, eddy currents,
which are induced by the movement of the
structure, can lead to an increased dissipation
resulting in a higher damping value for the
mechanical part of the system. This chapter
presents measurements intended to quantify
these effects and verify the modelling techniques
introduced in Chapter 2. For that purpose a simple
lab test rig is used.
Experimental Validatio
3
Remember that all models are wrong; the practical question is how wrong do they have to
be to not be useful.
86
3 Experimental Validation
3.1
Introduction
By the above quote, the problem of every model becomes apparent.
Models are based on simplification to cast the real behaviour of a
system into mathematical formulas. This makes it possible to predict the behaviour of systems. However, the accuracy of the model
and its validity for a certain set of states depends on the simplification made during its derivation. Therefore, it needs to be ensured
that the simplifications made are applicable and do not lead to a
model describing a different behaviour than the behaviour of the
system of interest. Therefore, it is necessary to verify a model with
either another more detailed model or by measurements to increase
the confidence in the validity and correctness of the model.
This chapter will describe the procedures and techniques that were
used to validate the simulation methods introduced in Chapter 2.
Although the simulation methods for continuum mechanics and
magnetic fields for themselves are well validated, it is necessary to
ensure the correctness of the coupled system and of the linearisation for the coupled eigenvalue problem. The experiments to do
this validation are presented in this chapter. It eventually concludes
that the modelling methods introduced in Chapter 2 are sufficient
to predict the magneto-mechanical coupled behaviour.
3.2
The Test Set Up
To verify the calculation methods introduced in Chapter 2, a simple
system has to be found that includes all the effects that the calculation method can cover. The system has to satisfy some conditions
to make it suitable for the verification process. First, it needs to exhibit a frequency change due to the interaction between the structural dynamics and the magnetic field. Although many systems
can be identified that show this behaviour, it is difficult to find a
system in which the interaction can be switched off or rendered inactive while the rest of the system stays unaltered. Secondly, the
system’s uncertainty needs to be as small as possible. All material
properties, geometries and physical constants in the system should
be known as accurately as possible. Any deviation between the simulation and the measurements can then be reduced to the errors in
the simulation. Very little materials exist for which both magnetic
and mechanical properties are well known. This is because either
they were intended for mechanical applications and, thus, the electric properties were not of interest, or they were designed for electric application, which means that the exact mechanical properties
are not important for their intended use.
3.2 The Test Set Up
87
Characteristics of the Test Set-Up
3.2.1
1st Bending Mode
yoke
y
z
x
permanent magnet
beam
a) Photo of the measurement set-up. The set-up is depicted b) Schematic of the test set up and first bending mode
in the configuration without coupling the beam complete
out of the air gap. The coil in the photo was not used for the
experiments.
Fig. 3.1 shows the test rig used for the purpose of verifying the modelling technique. It consists of an unlaminated yoke with a gap and
a flexible beam. The gap of the yoke is wide enough so that the
beam can be inserted into the air gap. The magnetic field is created
by two permanent magnets on either side of the air gap. The yoke
is fixed while the beam is mounted on a table that can be moved.
This allows the beam to be moved into and out of the air gap. This
set up was chosen for several reasons.
• It was readily available.
• The beam can be moved in and out of the air gap, making it
possible to ’activate’ or ’deactivate’ the coupling between the
beam and the magnetic field.
• It is as simple as possible while showing a change of resonance frequency and increased damping due to the coupling.
The test set-up also shows some significant drawbacks. The permeability and the conductivity of the yoke and beam are unknown.
The magnetic field in the system is excited by permanent magnets
that cannot be ’switched off ’ or be removed. Further, the system
changes when the beam is removed because the new table position
might lead to a different stiffness of the mounting.
The beam is constructed in such a way that the first bending frequency in y-direction is much lower than the frequency of the first
bending mode in z-direction. This way the two bending modes do
not couple. The bending mode in y-direction, which is shown in
Fig. 3.1b, will decrease the air gap length on one side of the beam
Figure 3.1
The test rig used for measurements
88
3 Experimental Validation
while it is increased on the other side of the beam. This will change
the magnetic field in the air gap.
3.2.2
Mechanisms Affecting the Modal Parameters
There are four different effects that can influence the modal parameters of the coupled system. Three of them influence the resonance frequency due to additional stiffness introduced into the system by the magnetic field and one increases the damping due to
additional losses. All but one of the effects can be explained using
the system in Fig. 3.1 as an example. The last effect is present in
electric machines but cannot be explained with the test rig.
For the additional stiffness, the differentiation between positive and
negative stiffness needs to be done. Stiffness is created when a force
acting on a structure is changed by the displacement of that structure
∂f
k=−
(3.1)
∂u
where f denotes the force, u the displacement from the equilibrium
position at which the force is zero, and k the stiffness value.
A positive stiffness is created when the force change opposes the
displacement, i.e. the force is directed in the opposite direction
than the movement and increases with the movement. This is the
usual stiffness found in a spring or in an oscillating pendulum.
A negative stiffness is created when the force is aligned with the displacement and acts in the same direction as the displacement. This
kind of stiffness can be found in unstable systems such as a pendulum that is balancing above its attachment point. Only a slight
deviation will cause the system to leave that point because the force
increases with the displacement pulling the mass further away.
Magnetic Stiffness due to Reluctance Change
The first mechanism involves a change of the magnetic forces due
to a change of reluctance of the system. This mechanism cannot be
found in the beam test set-up. However, it will be of importance in
a magnetic field and is listed here for completeness.
In Sec. 2.2.4 it was shown that the reluctance of a magnetic circuit
depends on the length of the air gaps. In this case, (2.15) can be
used to calculate the reluctance change of the magnetic circuit. An
increase in air gap length will increase the reluctance and thus decrease the magnetic flux density and the specific magnetic energy.
The attracting forces will decrease as they depend on the magnetic
flux density. The force depends thus indirectly on the displacement.
3.2 The Test Set Up
For the attracting forces between two ferromagnetic materials in a
magnetic field this creates a negative stiffness. The attracting forces
increase with a decreasing distance between the two objects. Because the forces are attracting they point towards the other object.
When the distance decreases they point in the same direction as
the displacement and create a negative stiffness and an instability.
Everyone who has held a magnet in his hand before is familiar with
this instability. It can be witnessed when a permanent magnet is
moved towards a piece of iron. At some point the attracting forces
become so big that the piece of iron moves towards the PM and
sticks to it. The attracting forces become thus bigger when the distance between permanent magnet and piece of iron decreases.
For the test set-up this mechanism is not valid. The reluctance of
the system does not change when the beam moves in y-direction,
because one air gap always increases by the same amount as the
other air gap decreases. The total reluctance stays the same and the
magnetic flux density is constant.
Magnetic Stiffness due to Axial Displacement
This stiffness is important for a displacement in axial direction of
an electric machine. The same mechanism creates stiffness when
the beam is displaced in z- or in x-direction.
Consider a movement of the head of the beam in x-direction. This
movement will decrease the overlap of the the PM on the beam
with the stator yoke. The magnetic field creates a force that pulls
the beam back into a position in which the beam head is perfectly
aligned with the stator yoke. This force is created, because in this
configuration the air gap length is shortest and thus the energy
stored in the magnetic field is minimal.
The force is directed in the opposite direction of the displacement
that causes it. It is thus a positive stiffness that gives the system
additional stability.
Magnetic Stiffness due to Fringe Effects
The second mechanism which influences the air gap is caused by
fringe effects. The 1D magnetic circuit model cannot explain this
effect as it depends on the spatial distribution of the magnetic flux
density in the air gap. In the first mechanism, we saw an increase
or decrease of total magnetic flux due to a change of reluctance.
For the second mechanism, the total flux does not change. Only
the distribution in the air gap changes. In Sec. 2.4, it was shown
that the normal magnetic force depends on the specific magnetic
energy. An increase in magnetic flux density will thus cause an
increase in magnetic force.
89
90
3 Experimental Validation
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
specific magnetic energy [ mJ2 ]
Figure 3.2
The magnetic field lines and the
specific magnetic energy for the
head of the beam
3.5
⋅105
Fig. 3.2 depicts the magnetic flux lines and the specific magnetic
energy of a cutting plane for varying amounts of bending deformation depicted in Fig. 3.4. The larger the air gap on the bottom side
of the beam, the lower the specific magnetic energy in the air gap
and the further apart are the magnetic flux lines. Consequently,
the attracting force on that side of the beam will decrease as it is
proportional to the specific magnetic energy.
At the upper part of the picture, the specific magnetic energy increases and the attracting force with it. The net force on the beam
will thus point upward, the same direction as the displacement of
the beam. Since the magnitude of this net force depends on the
displacement of the beam, a negative stiffness is created.
Additional Damping due Eddy Currents
Figure 3.3
Development of magnetic field
strength, displacement of the
beam head and attracting force
over time for a period of the first
bending mode. The magnetic
force and the displacement are
normalised with the maximal value
they reach during an oscillation.
The magnetic flux density norm is
normalised with its value for a
displacement of u = 0
Normalised amplitude
2
1
0
−1
Displacement of beam head in y-direction
∣⃗
B∣ in the air gap on the positive y-direction side of beam
Net force in y-direction of magnetiv force
−2
0
1
π
2
π
3
π
2
2π
Time [s]
The last mechanism that influences the modal parameters is caused
by eddy currents. An oscillating structure will result in a oscillating
3.2 The Test Set Up
magnetic force in the air gap, due to the dependency of the magnetic force on the displacement. This will create currents in the
yoke and the beam which produce heat due to the ohmic resistance of the structure. From an energy point of view, an additional
method to dissipate energy and create heat is introduced into the
system.
In order to be able to measure an increased damping ratio mechanically, the eddy currents causing this dissipation must somehow
affect the mechanical system. Due to the eddy currents, the magnetic field does not change instantaneously with the displacement
of the beam, but will show a slight delay. This delay causes a delay of
the magnetic force acting on the beam leading to increased damping.
Fig. 3.3 shows the various quantities needed to explain this effect
for the first bending mode as depicted in Fig. 3.4. The eddy currents introduce a small delay in the magnetic response of the system, so that the maximal magnetic field strength on the top part
of the beam (on the positive y-direction of the beam) is reached
when the beam head is already moving back towards the centre
position. Fig. 3.3 shows this delay of the amplitude of the magnetic
field in the air gap. Because of this delay, the total magnetic force
in y-direction, i.e. the magnetic force in y-direction created in both
air gaps, is stronger when the beam moves back towards the centre
position than when it was moving away from the centre position.
Integrating (2.89) over a whole period of the oscillation will result
in a value which is not zero, indicating a change of energy in the
system.
In an electric machine, the lamination in the stator back iron minimises the amount of eddy currents and thus the additional damping introduced by this effect. The test trig used here is not laminated and, consequently, the damping effect is much stronger than
91
Figure 3.4
The first bending mode of the test
set up. The red arrows represent
the acting magnetic forces. The
thickness of the arrows the
strength of the force
92
3 Experimental Validation
for electric machines. Therefore, it is expected that this effect is
much smaller in electric machines than in the oscillating beam.
Emerging Effects
The above discussed effects that introduce additional damping and
stiffness into a system affect the modal parameters of that system.
For the first bending mode additional damping due to eddy currents and additional stiffness due to fringe effect play a role. Because of these two effects the frequency of the measured mode will
be lower when the dynamics of the beam couple with the magnetic
field. Additionally, the measured mechanical damping ratio will
increase due to the coupling. These are the two effects that the
measurements conducted in the next subsection will verify. These
two effects can be identified by the FE model introduced in Sec. 3.4
and will be verified by the measurements in Sec. 3.3.
3.3
Verification Measurements
In order to quantify the influence of the magneto-mechanical coupling on the modal parameters, it is necessary to measure the dynamic response of the system with and without the magneto-mechanical coupling. This is the only way to rule out that the measured
effects do not originate from other sources than the coupling of interest.
Because some parameters of the system are unknown, it is necessary to verify the two physics separately before the coupled system
can be verified.
Considering all limitations of the test set-up, the following measurement approach was chosen:
1. Measure the dynamic behaviour of the beam without coupling.
2. Identify the set of mechanical parameters that simulate the
dynamic behaviour closest to the one measured.
3. Identify the set of electric parameters that simulate the resistance and impedance closest to the impedance and resistance
measurements.
4. Measure the dynamic behaviour with the beam fully inserted
into the air gap.
5. Measure the dynamic behaviour with the beam half inserted
into the air gap.
3.3 Verification Measurements
93
6. Compare the measured and the simulated dynamics.
This approach includes some assumptions that might not be satisfied. First of all, it is assumed that the dynamic behaviour of
the beam does not depend on its position on the table. The table
position might have an influence on the stiffness of the mounting of the beam and thus may also influence the first bending frequency. Secondly, it was assumed that the Young’s modulus and
the Poisson’s ratio are know. Although the beam was manufactured
from standard structural steel whose properties are know, it is unknown to what extend these properties are exact or if they might
have changed during the shaping process.
Parameter Identification
3.3.1
In the previous section, two parameter identifications were listed
as steps within the verification process. These two parameter identification steps are presented in more detail here.
Mechanical Properties
The mechanical model’s parameters that could be used for tuning consisted of the Rayleigh damping coefficients, the geometry
of the beam and the Young’s modulus and the Poisson ration. The
Rayleigh damping coefficients were set in such a way that the damping of the first bending modes coincides with the measured damping of the first damping modes. Of the remaining parameters the
length of the beam was chosen to tune the frequency of the first
bending mode to match the measured frequency. Small deviations
from the measured length of the beam of about 0.1mm, which is
within the measure tolerance needed to be applied to match the
frequencies. Young’s modulus and Poisson ration were considered
known.
Property
Value
Young’s Modulus [Pa] 200e9
Density [ mkg3 ]
7850
Poisson’s ratio [-]
0.29
Magnetic Properties
To determine the magnetic properties of the steel used for the beam
and the yoke, impedance measurements were conducted. The permeability of metals can change during metal working process, such
as milling, turning or drilling. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the
Table 3.1
Mechanical properties of the beam
and yoke
94
3 Experimental Validation
Table 3.2
Documented specification of
permanent magnets
Property
Value
Height
Length
Width
Remanence Flux Density
Coercity
relative permeability
Conductivity
2 mm
20 mm
10 mm
1.32 − 1.37 T
860 − 995 kA
m
1.056 − 1.26
5882 - 9090.9
S
m
permeability beforehand. However, the permeability can be determined by measuring the impedance of a coil wound around the
beam or the yoke. The coils are depicted in Fig. 3.5. The inductance
of the coils depends mainly on the conductivity and permeability
of the material. For structural steel, which is used in this case, the
conductivity is roughly known. Therefore, the permeability can be
approximated by matching the simulated to the measured impedance.
Simulating the yoke and the beam numerically, the permeability
of the material can be estimated. Fig. 3.6 shows the comparison
between the measured values for the inductance and resistance and
the calculated values for different permeabilities and conductivities of the iron material. The instrument used could not measure
below a frequency of 20 Hz. It is presumed that due to the skin
effect in the iron, the inductance is much higher for frequencies
below 20Hz and drops sharply for higher frequencies. Being able
to measure this drop at very low frequencies would increase the
impact of different permeability and conductivity values on the inductance leading to a more accurate determination of the material
properties. At the frequencies measured it can be seen in Fig. 3.6
that the variation of the values has little effect on the inductance
making a property identification difficult.
It should also be noted that the device used to measure the resistance and impedance of the coil has a higher accuracy at higher frequencies. At 20 Hz the error is around 1% of the measured value.
Therefore, it is more important to properly fit the measured data to
the simulated one at higher frequencies. Tab. 3.3 lists the material
Figure 3.5
Position of the coils (depicted in
grey) used to determine the
permeability and resistivity of the
beam and yoke
3.3 Verification Measurements
95
⋅10−4
Inductance [H]
Resistance [Ω]
1
0.8
0.6
4
2
0.4
0
200
400
600
800
1,000
0
200
Frequency [Hz]
Simulated μr = 50 γ = 107 mS
Measurement
Simulated μr = 20 γ =
400
600
800
1,000
Frequency [Hz]
8 ⋅ 106 mS
Simulated μr = 20 γ =
Simulated μr = 40 γ = 107 mS
107 mS
⋅10−4
Inductance [H]
Resistance [Ω]
1.5
1
6
4
2
0.5
0
200
400
600
800
1,000
0
200
Frequency [Hz]
400
600
800
1,000
Frequency [Hz]
Measurement
Simulated μr = 15 γ = 107 mS
Simulated μr = 75 γ = 8 ⋅ 106 mS
Simulated μr = 20 γ = 107 mS
parameters that were eventually chosen to simulate the system. The
choice has been based on the plots in Fig. 3.6. No parameter identification technique was employed, due to the complexity of the FE
system and the associated computational costs. The remaining deviation of the used parameter set to the optimised parameter set is
considered to be small.
Vibration Measurements
Using a laser doppeler vibrometer (LDV), impact tests were conducted to measure the frequency and damping behaviour of the
first bending mode of the beam. These measurements were done
for three different positions of the beam: completely out of the air
gap (no coupling), completely inserted in the air gap (full coupling)
Figure 3.6
Resistance and impedance
measurements of the solid stator
yoke (top) and the beam (bottom)
3.3.2
96
3 Experimental Validation
Properties of Magnets
Value
Remanence Flux Density
relative permeability
Conductivity
1.32 T
1.06
0.6 ⋅ 106
S
m
Properties of stator-yoke
Conductivity
relative Permeability
107
20
S
m
107
20
S
m
Properties of beam
Table 3.3
Chosen parameters for the models
Conductivity
relative Permeability
mass matrix Rayleig damping coefficient
stiffness matrix Rayleig damping coefficient
40
6 ⋅ 10−6
and half way inserted in the air gap (to some extend coupled). The
modal parameters were evaluated by fitting a decaying sinusoidal
function
√
2
y(t) = y0 e−2 π ωn (ζ+ ζ −1)
to the data using a least square evaluation.
minimize [∑(x(t) − y(t − t0 ))2 ]
y0 , ωn , ζ
for t ∈ [t0 , t0 + Δt]
(3.2)
t
where ζ, ωn and y0 are the parameters to identify and x(t) the measurement data.
The measured data x(t) and the decaying sinusoidal function y(t)
are aligned by setting x(t0 ) = max(x(t)) and choosing an arbitrary length Δt. The parameters that were eventually chosen for the
model are shown in Tab. 3.3.
3.4
3D Finite Element Model
A 3D FE model is used to predict the change of the modal parameters. Although a three dimensional magnetic field formulation results in large numbers of DoFs, it is necessary to build such a model
to include the fringe effects, described in Sec. 3.2, in the air gap
appropriately. The model consists of approximately 315 000 DoFs.
This high number of degrees of freedoms is necessary to ensure
that the gradients of the magnetic field as well as the deformation
are described accurately.
Fig. 3.7 shows the mesh of the model and the predicted deformation of the first bending mode. It was assumed that saturation plays
3.6 Results
97
Displacement of the beam and
magnetic flux lines for the first bending
mode. the colours indicate
displacement, the lines the magnetic
flux lines
Mesh of the 3D FE model
Figure 3.7
Mesh of the 3D finite element
model of the test rig
no role for this model. A linear material model for the yoke and the
beam was used.
Results
3.5
The measurements show clearly a trend towards more damping
and a lower resonance frequency in the system when the magnetomechanical coupling is introduced. This trend was also simulated
by the 3D finite element model. Tab. 3.4 lists the simulated and
measured eigenfrequencies and damping ratios of the system. A
relative error of 4.4% for the fully inserted beam and an error of
3.2% for the half inserted beam were recorded. The relative error
of the damping values is higher. A relative error of 14.4% for the
fully inserted beam and 39% for the half inserted beam were recorded. Considering that the system introduced is nonlinear, the
3D-Model
Measurement
Frequency Damping Frequency Damping
no EM coupling 417 Hz
with EM coupling 372 Hz
half EM coupling 386 Hz
ζ = 1.66% 417 Hz
ζ = 1.66%
ζ = 3.32% 370 Hz
ζ = 2.48% 384.6 Hz
ζ = 3.6%
ζ = 2.25%
Table 3.4
Simulation Results and
Measurements, ζ denotes the
damping coefficient
frequency and damping estimates of the linear 3D model is reasonable accurate. This shows that a prediction of the coupled modal
parameters is possible using the linearised set of equations and a
linear modal analysis.
Summary
This chapter showed that the modelling methodologies introduced
in Chapter 2 can be used to predict the changes to the dynamic be-
3.6
98
3 Experimental Validation
haviour of a coupled system caused by the coupling. However, it
was discussed that in order to yield accurate predictions, the material properties of the structure need to be known exactly. This is
always a problem when materials that are produced with a mechanical application in mind also affect the magnetic field and viceversa. In those cases, the material’s magnetic properties are not
well defined because for most uses of that particular material it is
not necessary to know them.
This chapter further showed that the coupling can have an influence
on dynamic systems under certain circumstances. This is the case,
when the structural stiffness is low enough so that the magnetic
forces and the magnetic stiffness is significant. The models from
Sec. 2 are accurate enough to predict the dynamic behaviour of
magneto-mechanical coupled systems and, thus, can also be used
to take those dynamics into account when simulating generators of
direct-drive wind turbines. This will be done in Chapter 5.
Abstract:
Kirschneck, M., Rixen, D.J., Polinder, H.
Model Reduction Methods for Magnetic Fields Based on
Modal Analysis. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, vol. 5,
no. 11, November 2014
For the magneto-mechanical coupled analysis of
large direct-drive generators in 3D, an enormous
amount of DoFs are necessary to model the
magnetic field over the whole circumference of
the generator. Model reduction techniques is one
approach to reduce the computation cost of
solving the model. These techniques sacrifice
accuracy of the solution for a reduced number of
DoFs.
This chapter introduces model reduction
techniques based on various methods known
from mechanical engineering. These techniques
are applied to electrical machines reducing the
number of degrees of freedom and hence
computation time for transient and eigenvalue
analyses. It further introduces magnetic super
elements for the stator and the rotor of these
machines and combines them with suitable
coupling methods from literature. The various
approaches are compared with respect to accuracy
and computation time. Eventually, ideas for model
order techniques for magneto-mechanical
coupled systems are presented.
Model Reductio
4
This Chapter is based on the papers:
100
4 Model Reduction
4.1
Introduction
To identify the dynamics of the coupled system, (2.170) needs to be
solved. The formulation introduced in Chapter 2, in particular the
one of the magnetic field, can lead to very large models with millions of degrees of freedom. The sheer size of these models makes
them difficult to handle, even when large computing power is available.
Model reduction techniques can help to alleviate the problems encountered when trying to solve systems of that size. These techniques reduce the number of DoFs of the model at the expense of
decreased accuracy. In general, three types of problems can be distinguished for which these techniques are useful: static-like problems, including formulations for stationary problems and problems
in the frequency domain, transient problems and eigenvalue problems. This chapter will concentrate on the last two types of problems.
In mechanical engineering, and dynamic analysis of structures in
particular, various methods have been developed for the reduction
of models for structural dynamics in the past. These methods are
based on the concept of a modal decomposition of the dynamic
behaviour of the structure into a number of decoupled ordinary
differential equations. This is achieved by solving an eigenvalue
problem. The results of the eigenvalue problem are physical meaningful quantities, because the eigenvalues of the structure correspond to its resonance frequencies and the eigenvectors correspond
to its mode shapes.
These techniques can be adapted so that they can be applied to FE
models of quasi-static magnetic fields. As will be explained, the
methods work in particular well for the magnetic fields of electric
machines due to the design of electric machines.
This chapter will first introduce the modal analysis for quasi-static
magnetic fields. Afterwards, it introduces several reduction methods that are based on modes for the simulation of dynamic magnetic fields. The reduction methods are based on reduction methods developed for the dynamic analyses of mechanical systems. In
Sec. 4.5, the model reduction techniques are applied to a test case,
a small 600 W wind turbine generator. The various techniques
are compared with respect to accuracy and calculation time. It is
shown that modal analysis based reduction techniques can also be
adapted for and employed to magnetic fields and yield substantial
computation cost reductions. Finally, ideas are presented to facilitate model reduction of magneto-mechanical systems, as those introduced in Chapter 2.
4.1 Introduction
101
Test Cases
4.1.1
The techniques introduced in this chapter will be tested on a 2D
model of a 600 W wind turbine. The 600 W wind turbine model
is based on the Ampair 600, a small direct-drive wind turbine for
private use. Fig. 4.1 shows the 2D model used. The model consists
of a rotor and stator which will be separated at the air gap of the
machine (the interface is indicated by the blue line on the left of
Fig. 4.1). The system is excited by the currents in the coils in the
stator (indicated by green elements). In the real turbine, the rotor
field is created by PMs. However, for simplicity the excitation of
the PMs is not modelled in the test case. At the outer line of the
stator, the magnetic vector potential is set to zero (on the red line
in Fig. 4.1).
In a 2D model of laminated iron, the conductivity is usually assumed to be zero, to account for lamination. However, a conductivity of zero in some regions of the FE model might lead to numerical instability for some solver types. Therefore, the conductivity of
the laminated iron domains was set to γ = 1. This value is so low,
that hardly any eddy currents are present, while it is large enough,
that most solvers do not run into any problems during the solution
process.
Three test cases are analysed: a step response, a rotating magnetic
field and an eigenvalue problem.
• For the step response, a time integration is conducted. The
load that is depicted on the right hand side of Fig. 4.1 is applied at t = 0. This load corresponds to the current density distribution of a three phase current at the moment when
The red line shows the boundary
where the boundary condition A = 0
is applied. The blue line shows the
interface between the two sub parts
of the electric machine. Green are the
coil domains
−5
5
0
Current Density [
A
m2
]
⋅108
The source vector used for the step
response
Figure 4.1
The 12 pole direct-drive wind
turbine generator
102
4 Model Reduction
phase a is at its peak current value and thus phase b and phase
c at minus half their peak current values. The response for
the machine is simulated for the next 10 s. Due to eddy currents, the magnetic field will not be created instantaneously,
but will reach its full strength after some seconds.
• For the second test case, the three phase current that create
the load that is shown on the right hand side of Fig. 4.1 is
changed, so that the magnetic field created by the coils rotates just like during operation of the machine. The rotor is
not rotated with the stator field for the test case. This rotating
stator field is simulated for 100 seconds.
• An eigenvalue problem of the rotor and stator is conducted.
For this, no excitation is used.
4.2
Modal Analysis for Quasi-Static Magnetic Fields
A system of partial differential equations that describes the dynamic behaviour can be rewritten as a series of uncoupled differential equations. This can be achieved by a basis transformation.
Instead of describing the amplitude of the magnetic vector potential at every node, the amplitude of certain pre-defined distributions is described. The method that is used for finding the spatial
distributions in structural dynamics is called Modal Analysis. The
basis change decouples the spatial and temporal information of the
system. The values of the nodes q can be written as
q = ∑ φm ηm (t)
(4.1)
m
where ηm (t) denotes the amplitude of the spatial distribution of the
mth basis vector and φm the mth basis vector. Inserting the basis
transformation into the numerical version of the governing partial
differential equation yields
CAA Φη̇(t) + KAA Φη(t) = J(t)
(4.2)
where CAA and KAA are the magnetic mass and stiffness matrices,
respectively, as defined in Sec. 2.5. η is a vector containing all amplitudes of the basis vectors that are stored in the matrix Φ.
The modes φm and the eigenvalues λm can be computed by solving
the eigenvalue problem
KAA φm = −λm CAA φm
(4.3)
where λm , the eigenvalue of the system, is defined by
λm = −
η˙m
ηm
(4.4)
4.2 Modal Analysis for Quasi-Static Magnetic Fields
103
Solving the eigenvalue problem in (4.3) for λm and φm yields the
modes and eigenvalues of the system.
It is now possible to write the homogeneous solution of (4.2) as
qhom = ∑ φm ηm etλm
(4.5)
m
Opposite to structural systems, the eigenvalues computed by solving (4.3) are real. There is, therefore, no oscillation possible in the
solution. This can easily be explained as the governing equations
in(4.2) are first order PDEs in time whereas structural equations
are second order PDEs in time. The homogenous solution in (4.5)
is, thus, a sum of exponentially decaying spatial distributions.
Physically, this corresponds to the following effect: when a load,
i.e. a current, is suddenly switched off, the magnetic field will not
change instantaneously. The decaying of the magnetic field will
induce eddy currents in the structure and the conductor, where
the current was applied. These eddy currents create a magnetic
field that counter acts the diminishing magnetic field that was created by the current. Over time, when the magnetic field does not
change that quickly anymore, the eddy currents will subside. Consequently, the magnetic field will disappear when the eddy currents
disappear.
Mode Truncation for Magnetic Fields
4.2.1
Modes of first order systems show some significant different dynamic behaviour than modes of a second order systems. To explain
this, consider a mode of a first and second order system excited by
a harmonic load.
(iωext cm + km )ηm eiωext = φTm Jeiωext
(−ω2ext mr + kr )ηr eiωext = φTr Feiωext
(4.6)
where cm denotes the magnetic modal mass, mr denotes the structural modal mass, km the magnetic modal stiffness and kr the structural modal stiffness. ηm and ηr are constant complex participation
factors and ωext denotes the excitation frequency. The modal stiffnesses and modal damping values can be calculate in the same way
as for structural systems
diag(km ) = ΦT KAA Φ
(4.7a)
diag(cm ) = Φ CAA Φ
(4.7b)
diag(mr ) = Φ Muu Φ
(4.7c)
diag(kr ) = Φ Kuu Φ
(4.7d)
T
T
T
4 Model Reduction
∣ηm ∣ / ∣ηr |
104
0
−3
2nd order system
1st order system
∠ηm / ∠ηr
0
Figure 4.2
Bode Diagram comparing the
dynamic behaviour of magnetic
and structural modes
−1
−2
−3
1
ωext
Fig. 4.2 shows the Bode plot of the response of a first and second
order system. The first order system lacks the peak representing
a resonance frequency, which the second order system shows. Instead, the amplitude of the response starts to decreases at a certain
frequency. However, it does not decrease as quickly as the amplitude of a second order system.
When doing a modal analysis, only a certain set of modes are calculated. The rest of the modes are neglected because their influence
is considered insignificant. This approximation can be explained
with the transfer function of the second order system in Fig. 4.2.
Usually, the dynamics up to a certain frequency are of interest in an
application. From Fig. 4.2, it is clear that the response of a mode
is the same as the static response, for frequencies far below the resonance frequency. Thus, all modes that have a significantly higher
resonance frequency than the frequency range of interest can be
neglected as their response is instantaneous to the dynamic load.
Resonances that have a much lower frequency than the excitation
frequency can be neglected too, because they do not contribute to
the response of the system. This can be seen in Fig. 4.2 by a response amplitude that approaches zero for high frequencies. The
technique to use only the lower modes of a system is called Mode
Truncation.
For 1st order systems, such as magnetic fields, this technique brings
additional challenges. In this case, the amplitude of the modes do
not decrease as quickly as they do for second order systems above
the resonance frequency (see Fig. 4.2). It is, therefore, more difficult to distinguish which modes are important and which can be
neglected.
4.2 Modal Analysis for Quasi-Static Magnetic Fields
105
Physical Values Expressed by Modes
4.2.2
Eigenvectors have no amplitude. They merely express the relation
between the various amplitude of DoFs. They can be normalised
with respect to the mass or the stiffness matrix. For a stiffness normalisation (4.7a) is equal to one, for a mass normalisation (4.7c) is
equal to one.
A stiffness normalisation means that the amplitude of each mode
is set to a value so that the energy stored at that amplitude is one.
In that case, the dissipated energy, which is expressed by the modal
magnetic mass, differs between the modes. In that case, we can
write
φ2m km = 1
(4.8)
For the mass normalisation, the dissipated energy of each mode
is one while the stored energy differs. The eigenvalue of a mode
expresses the relation between the dissipated energy and the stored
energy: The eigenvalue of a mode can be calculated by
λm = −
km
cm
(4.9)
It quantifies thus how quickly all energy of a mode is dissipated and
thus indicates the time constant of the particular mode. In other
words, how quickly this mode reacts to change. It is similar to the
real part of the eigenvalue of damped second order systems.
The eddy currents resulting from a change of magnetic vector potential of a mode can be expressed by
Jeddy,m = CAA φm η̇m (t)
(4.10)
The dissipated energy per mode can be expressed by
dWeddy,m
= η̇m (t)φTm CAA φm η̇m (t)
dt
(4.11)
Rigid Magnetic Modes
The eigenvalue problem in (4.3) can have trivial results. The reason
for this is that solutions to the magnetic PDE (2.47) are not unique.
The trivial solutions are characterised by a uniform value for the
magnetic vector potential. They are the magnetic equivalent to rigid body modes in structural dynamics. Opposite to rigid body
modes, there are only three rigid magnetic modes, as the rotation
does not exist for magnetic fields.
For many reduction techniques, these rigid magnetic modes pose
an additional challenge, as they need to be treated separately from
4.2.3
106
4 Model Reduction
’normal’ modes. For the stator, these trivial solutions of the eigenvalue problem do not exist, because at the outer side of the stator
a constraint is applied. For the rotor however, there is a a trivial
solution, because the absolute value of the magnetic vector potential is only determined by the interface values. This leads to ’rigid
body modes’ when using free interface reduction methods such as
the Dual-Craig-Bampton method, Rubin’s or McNeal’s method.
4.2.4
Figure 4.3
Modes of the electro-magnetic
field in a 12 pole pm synchronous
generator
Magnetic Modes of Electric Machines
λ = 0.062196
λ = 5.580866
λ = 5.698712
λ = 17.213697
λ = 17.511865
λ = 29.637164
λ = 29.959262
λ = 53.829755
λ = 54.024808
For electric machines, magnetic modes are of particular interest.
The reason for this can be found in the shape of the machine. Electric machines are constructed in a way that only two modes play
a major role for the magnetic field in an electric machine. Fig. 4.3
depicts several modes of a 2D model of a 12 pole permanent magnet
machine. Because the machine is a twelve pole machine only the
modes at λ = 53.83 and λ = 54.025 play a role for the machine as
these modes show the same cyclic symmetry as the machine and,
thus, the same as the currents applied in the coils. This emphasis of
only two modes can be used in many aspects for calculating mag-
4.3 Introduction to Model Order Reduction and Dynamic Substructuring
107
netic fields of electric machines.
The similarity of the modes and space harmonic can mislead to the
assumption that they are the same. The decomposition of a mode’s
magnetic field strength in the air gap into a Fourier series yields the
space harmonics of that mode.
Coil Participation Factors
4.2.5
The magnetic modes introduced in Sec. 4.2.4 depend only on the
geometry and the material properties of the system. Which mode
is excited depends on the location where the currents in the system
are applied. The currents in the coils can be seen as a forced harmonic excitation. The response of the system can be computed by
solving
(idiag(cm )ωext eiωext t + diag(km )eiωext t ) η̂ = ΦT Ĵeiωext t
(4.12)
where Ĵ denotes the amplitude of the force excitations J. For a
forced excitation, the relative importance of an individual mode
is expressed by its participation factor. The participation factor for
this harmonic excitation can be calculated by
ηm =
φTm Ĵ
iωext cm + km
(4.13)
The participation factor might be complex, because the denominator and/or the excitation can be complex. In that case, the absolute
value of the participation factor indicates the relative magnitude of
the mode while the angle of the participation factor represents the
phase delay relative to the excitation force.
Introduction to Model Order Reduction and
Dynamic Substructuring
Dynamic Substructuring (DS) and Model Order Reduction (MOR)
are two techniques that have been developed in structural dynamics over the last decades. These techniques can be extended to magnetic fields and magneto-mechanical systems. Although the term
Dynamic Substructuring is misleading in this context, since magnetic fields are no structures, it will be used throughout the thesis
to show the tradition of these methods and where the inspiration
comes from.
The introduction to DS and Component Mode Synthesis that is
given here is based on [165]. For more details on the topic, please
refer to that thesis, as it gives a very good overview of the topic.
4.3
108
4 Model Reduction
4.3.1
Dynamic Substructuring for Electric Machines
DS is based on the idea to divide a complex structure into subparts
and describe the dynamic behaviour per subpart. This approach
has several advantages over an integral dynamic analysis. The following list was assembled in [165]. It lists the advantages and disadvantages of DS
1. It allows evaluating the dynamic behaviour of structures that
are too large or complex to be analysed as a whole.
2. By analysing the subsystem, local dynamic behaviour can be
recognised more easily.
3. When a single component is changed only that component
needs to be reanalysed; the total system can be analysed at
low additional cost.
4. It gives the possibility to combine modelled parts and experimentally identified components. This is especially useful for
components that are very difficult to model correctly.
5. When a structure consists of several identical parts, dynamic
substructuring allows these parts to be taken into account
very efficiently in the total model.
6. It enables sharing and combining substructures from different project groups.
7. The level of detail of the component models can be matched
with the intended usage of the model.
Opposite to all these benefits, the only drawback is the increased
complexity of the algorithms that are introduced here.
DS for electric machines is mainly interesting because the rotor and
the stator can be separated easily into two substructures and analysed separately. All the above advantages are valid for the DS of
electric machines. Some entries of the list above play a larger role
for modelling magnetic fields than others.
As will become apparent in Chapter 5, the major motivation to look
into dynamic substructuring for electric machines was, in fact, the
first point on the list, i.e. the reduced computational cost. 3D magnetic models can easily grow to a size that even super computers
struggle with. DS promises some relieve in this area.
Since an electric machine is always a system that includes a mechanical component and a magnetic component, there are several
ways to substructure the system. The first method is to split the
system by its geometrical characteristics. This will lead to a substructure containing the rotor and one containing the stator. Dur-
4.3 Introduction to Model Order Reduction and Dynamic Substructuring
109
ing rotation the interface between rotor and stator has to be reassembled in every time step, because of the movement of the rotor
mesh. It is, therefore, a natural choice to compute one super element for the rotor and one for the stator, so that a reassembly of
the air gap is still possible.
Additionally, a separation by physical domain is possible. In Sec.
2.5.10, it was explained that only the nodes of the ferromagnetic and
conducting structures are part of both physical domains. The rest
of the model belongs only to one domain. This can be used for dynamic substructuring by forming an interface between the mechanical and magnetic domain that contains all DoFs of the nodes in
the ferro-magnetic structure. Depending on the geometry of the
system, this can lead to large reductions of DoF in combination
with MOR techniques. Magneto-mechanical substructuring will
be covered in Sec. 4.6.
Component Mode Synthesis
Component Mode Synthesis (CMS) is a dynamic substructuring
technique, which combines the concept of component wise analysis with MOR techniques. CMS decomposes the total system
in several components. Each component’s dynamic behaviour is
approximated by a so called super element. The super elements
are computed by applying a MOR technique to the component’s
model. This way, the number of DoFs is reduced while the dominant dynamic characteristics are retained in the super element. After
each component is substituted by its super element, the dynamics
of the total structures can be approximated by assembling all super
elements.
As mentioned in Sec. 4.1, these techniques can be applied for transient analysis and eigenvalue problems. The decreased computational cost are realised by different effects for transient and eigenvalue problems
For the transient analysis, where the load arbitrarily changes over
time, the system of partial differential equations needs to be solved
for a set of time steps. The model reduction techniques introduced
here help to reduce the required computation time at each time
step. That is paid for by an additional computation at the beginning of the transient analysis. There are some computational cost
linked to the reduction basis computation that is done before the
transient analysis. This, however, has to be done only once. So the
longer the transient analysis, the lower the computational cost. Fig.
4.4 compares the computational cost of reduced and non-reduced
models for transient problems.
4.3.2
110
4 Model Reduction
total computational cost
Reduced system
Not reduced system
Figure 4.4
Computational cost for transient
systems when model reduction is
applied
Overhead
0
0
number of time steps
For eigenvalue problems, computational cost reductions are realised by exploiting the scaling of eigenvalue problems. Eigenvalue
problems scale with approximately n3 , where n denotes the number of DoFs. It is, thus, computationally less expensive to compute k eigenvalue problems of the size nk than one large problem.
Splitting the system in several substructures and solving the eigenvalue problem of the system of assembled super elements exploits
this. The eigenvalue problems that have to be solved to assemble
each substructure are computationally much cheaper than the eigenvalue problem of the total system.
Work on these techniques started in the 60’s and 70’s by Hurty [67,
68]. Subsequently, numerous methods were developed that employed this idea [8, 57, 93, 130, 132]. These methods are currently
part of several finite element packages for structural analysis.
These ’classic’ methods can be applied to magnetic fields. In combination with DS of the finite element model of electric machines,
large computation cost reductions can be achieved.
4.3.3
General Formulation of Component Model Reduction
Starting point for any CMS method is the system of partial differential equation in their discrete form
Mq̈ + Cq̇ + Kq = f + gb
(4.14)
where f denotes the external load applied to the substructure and
gb the load on the interface applied to the substructure by another
substructure. Tab. 4.1 gives an overview over various variables used
to described reduction methods covered here.
4.3 Introduction to Model Order Reduction and Dynamic Substructuring
Description
internal DoF
DoF on the interface with another substructure
modal DoF for internal modes
DoF after model reduction
DoF before reduction method is applied
interface force
Symbol
qi
qb
η
qr
qnr
gb
111
Table 4.1
Various variables for MOR and DS
techniques
The component model reduction methods use a basis transformation to describe the system of PDEs in a basis of lower order than
the original one.
qnr = Rqr
Rn
qnr ∈
n>m
qr ∈
Rm
(4.15)
For the projection, the reduction matrix R is used, which projects
the system from the non-reduced DoFs, qnr , to the DoFs that are
left after the reduction method was applied, qr . This matrix consists
of the basis vectors in column form. Which basis is used depends
on the reduction method. A selection of reduction methods will be
introduced in Sec. 4.4.
The reduced matrices of the system can be calculated by pre- and
postmultiplying the system matrices by the reduction matrix R.
̃ = RT MR
M
̃ = RT CR
C
(4.16)
̃ = R KR
K
T
The forces in g and f are projected onto the new basis by
̃
g = RT g
̃f = RT f
(4.17)
This results in the following reduced system of partial differential
equations
̃q̇r + Kq
̃ r+C
̃ r = ̃f + ̃
Mq̈
g
(4.18)
The DoFs that are retained during the component model reduction,
qr contain the interface DoFs qb , that are needed to assemble various components to the total system. This is covered in Sec. 4.3.4.
Assembly Methods for Dynamic Substructuring
For the reduction methods introduced in this thesis, two assembly
methods for the various substructuring methods are used. Which
4.3.4
112
4 Model Reduction
method is used depends on the component model reduction technique. Only a selection of existing assembly methods are introduced here.
The methods and notation introduced here are based on the thesis
by Voormeeren [165] and the paper by Voormeeren et al. [164].
Primal Stiffness Assembly
For an interface of two substructures, the interface DoF exist in
both substructures. They are redundant, because the compatibility
condition dictates that the displacements/vector potential on both
sides of the interface are equal. When forming the assembly, it is
therefore beneficial to eliminate one set of boundary DoFs. For
that, the intermediate DoFs qγ are introduced, which are unique.
To associate these intermediate DoFs to the boundary DoFs on
both sides of the interface the Boolean matrix Lb is introduced. It
is defined by
(s)
(s)
qb − Lb qγ = 0
(4.19)
where the superscript in (●)(s) denotes the substructure.
Starting point for the assembly is the unassembled system in the
form of
⎡ M̌ii
⎢
⎢M̌
⎢ bi
⎢
⎢ 0
⎢
⎢ 0
⎣
M̌ib
M̌bb
0
0
0
0
0
0
0⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ q̈i ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ Čii
0⎥⎥ ⎢⎢q̈b ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢Čbi
⎥⎢ ⎥ + ⎢
0⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ g̈b ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ 0
0⎥⎦ ⎢⎣q̈γ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0
⎡ Ǩii
⎢
⎢Ǩ
⎢
+ ⎢ bi
⎢0
⎢
⎢0
⎣
Čib
Čbb
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ǩib
Ǩbb
−I
0
0
−I
0
ĽTb
0⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ q̇i ⎤⎥
0⎥⎥ ⎢⎢q̇b ⎥⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥+
0⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ ġb ⎥⎥
0⎥⎦ ⎢⎣q̇γ ⎥⎦
0 ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ qi ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ f̌i ⎤⎥
0 ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢qb ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢f̌b ⎥⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥
Ľb ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ gb ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ 0 ⎥⎥
0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣qγ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦
(4.20)
The nature of the internal DoFs in (4.20) depend on the model reduction method used. These can either be normal DoFs or DoFs
associated with a mode that describes the internal dynamics of the
substructure.
In (4.20) the following block diagonal forms are used
(1)
(n)
(1)
(n)
(1)
(n)
(1)
(n)
Ǩii = diag(Kii , . . . , Kii )
Ǩib = diag(Kib , . . . , Kib )
Ǩbi = diag(Kbi , . . . , Kbi )
Ǩbb = diag(Kbb , . . . , Kbb )
(4.21)
4.3 Introduction to Model Order Reduction and Dynamic Substructuring
113
and analog for the mass and damping matrices. The Boolean matrix Ľb is defined by
⎡L(1) ⎤
⎢ b ⎥
⎢
⎥
(4.22)
Ľb = ⎢ ⋮ ⎥
⎢ (n) ⎥
⎢L ⎥
⎣ b ⎦
and the force vectors f̌i and f̌b
⎡f(1) ⎤
⎢b ⎥
⎢ ⎥
f̌b = ⎢ ⋮ ⎥
⎢ (n) ⎥
⎢f ⎥
⎣b ⎦
and
⎡f(1) ⎤
⎢i ⎥
⎢ ⎥
f̌i = ⎢ ⋮ ⎥
⎢ (n) ⎥
⎢f ⎥
⎣i ⎦
(4.23)
This definition yields the following transformation for a substructure.
⎡ qi ⎤ ⎡ I 0 0 ⎤
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥⎡ ⎤
⎢q ⎥ ⎢0 0 L ⎥ ⎢ qi ⎥
⎢ b⎥ ⎢
b⎥ ⎢ ⎥
⎢ ⎥=⎢
⎥ ⎢g ⎥
(4.24)
⎢ gb ⎥ ⎢0 I 0 ⎥ ⎢ b ⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥ ⎢qγ ⎥
⎢qγ ⎥ ⎢0 0 I ⎥ ⎣ ⎦
⎣ ⎦ ⎣
⎦
Pre- and postmultipliying (4.20) with (4.24) yields the assembled
system
M̌
[ T ii
Ľb M̌bi
M̌ib Ľb
Č
q̈
] [ i ] + [ T ii
ĽTb M̌bb Ľb q̈γ
Ľb Čbi
Ǩ
+ [ T ii
Ľb Ǩbi
Čib Ľb
q̇
][ i]+
ĽTb Čbb Ľb q̇γ
Ǩib Ľb
f̌
q
] [ i ] = [ Ti ]
ĽTb Ǩbb Ľb qγ
Ľb f̌b
Note that this is the way structures are usually assembled in finite
elements.
Dual Assembly
In the Dual assembly, the interface forces are reduced to one set of
forces. This is possible because the interface forces have the same
magnitude and opposite direction per node. Retaining the unique
interface forces makes this assembly method suitable for the DualCraig-Bampton method, which will be introduced in Sec. 4.4. For
that, the same approach is used that was used for the interface displacements in the primal assembly. A Boolean matrix is defined
that associates the unique magnitudes of the interface forces gγ with
the interface forces on both sides of the boundary.
gb = −BTb gγ
(4.26)
Opposite to Lb , Bb is a signed Boolean to realise the opposite direction of the interface forces.
(4.25)
114
4 Model Reduction
Pre- and postmultiplying (4.20) with
⎡ qi ⎤ ⎡ I 0
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎢q ⎥ ⎢0 I
⎢ b⎥ ⎢
⎢ ⎥=⎢
⎢ gb ⎥ ⎢0 0
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎢qγ ⎥ ⎢0 0
⎣ ⎦ ⎣
0
0
−BTb
0
0⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ qi ⎤⎥
0⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ gb ⎥⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥
0⎥⎥ ⎢⎢gγ ⎥⎥
I ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣qγ ⎥⎦
(4.27)
eliminates the interface forces gb and replaces them with the unique
force field gγ . This yields the assembled system
⎡ M̌
⎢ ii
⎢
⎢M̌bi
⎢
⎢ 0
⎣
M̌ib
M̌bb
0
0⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ q̈i ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ Čii
⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢
0⎥ ⎢q̈b ⎥ + ⎢Čbi
⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢
0⎥⎦ ⎢⎣gγ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0
⎡ Ǩ
⎢ ii
⎢
+ ⎢Ǩbi
⎢
⎢0
⎣
Čib
Čbb
0
Ǩib
Ǩbb
B̌b
0⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ q̇i ⎤⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥
0⎥ ⎢q̇b ⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥
0⎥⎦ ⎢⎣gγ ⎥⎦
0 ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ qi ⎤⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥
B̌Tb ⎥ ⎢qb ⎥
⎥⎢ ⎥
0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣gγ ⎥⎦
⎡ f ⎤ (4.28)
⎢ i⎥
⎢ ⎥
= ⎢fb ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢0⎥
⎣ ⎦
ˇ denotes again the block diagonal form of the matrices
where (●)
that was introduced for (4.20).
Node Collocation
In an electric machine, two substructures, which move relative to
each other, are present. The interface nodes of two adjacent substructures will thus not always coincide. Instead, some or all of
the nodes of one substructure are located between the nodes of
the other substructure. In such a case, the assembly process becomes more complicated, as in this case, it is necessary to interpolate between two nodal values.
The assembly can be implemented, according to [47], by defining a
unique set of degrees of freedom that define the nodal values on the
interface. Since the location of the nodes on both sides of the interface are not necessarily the same, two matrices relating the values
of the interface to the unique set of values are necessary
(s)
(s)
qb = Db qγ
for s = 1, 2
(4.29)
(s)
where Db is the substructure collocation matrix. The values of Db
are evaluated by evaluating the shape function on the associated
substructure. Since this depends on the position of the interface
field, the collocation matrixes needs to be reevaluated whenever
one of the meshes is moved or changed.
4.4
Linear Reduction Methods Based on Modal Analysis
In Sec. 4.2, the modal analysis for quasi-static magnetic fields were
introduced. In this section, a series of mode based reduction meth-
4.4 Linear Reduction Methods Based on Modal Analysis
115
ods for estimating the dynamic behaviour of these systems will be
introduced. The reduction techniques investigated here include
Guyan’s method, also called Static-Condensation method [57], the
Craig-Bampton method [8], the Augmented-Craig-Bampton method
[128] and the Dual-Craig-Bampton method [130]. All these methods were developed for the reduction of models describing the dynamics of structures.
Guyan’s Method
4.4.1
Guyan’s method or static-condensation method [57] projects the
internal DoFs qi on the boundary DoFs qb using the static response
related to boundary unit inputs. Boundary DoFs are considered to
be all DoFs on the interface to another subsection of the model and
all DoFs where an external current/force is applied. For electric
machines, that means that all DoFs on the interface between the
rotor and the stator as well as DoFs in the coil domains of the stator
model are considered as boundary DoFs. The reduction matrix can
be computed by
K−1 K
q
Ψ
qnr = [ i ] = [ s ] qr = [ ii ib ] qb
I
qb
I
±
(4.30)
R
where Kii and Kib are sub matrices of K defined in (4.20). Although
Guyan’s method neglects the internal dynamics of the system during the reduction, it can still yield good results because the internal
dynamics within electric machines are of minor importance due to
the lamination of the machine. That is why Guyan’s method yields
relatively accurate results for electric machines.
The Craig-Bampton-Method
The Craig-Bampton (CB) method, [8], uses the condensation introduced by Guyan’s method. On top of that, it takes the internal
dynamics of the substructure into account by including fixed interface modes. To calculate the fixed interface modes, the boundary degrees of freedom are fixed in the eigenvalue problem that is
solved to compute the modes. The Craig-Bampton method yields
better results when there are no internal forces applied to the structure (fi = 0). This can be achieved by including the DoFs where an
external force is applied into the boundary DoFs qb .
Fig. 4.5 shows fixed interface modes for the stator and rotor. The
interface between the two substructures is located on the inside
of the stator and outside of the rotor. Additionally, the DoFs in
4.4.2
116
4 Model Reduction
Figure 4.5
Contour plots of the magnetic
vector potential. Depicted are two
fixed interface modes and two free
interface modes
The 12th fixed interface mode of the
stator
The 13th fixed interface mode of the
stator
The 11th fixed interface mode of the
rotor
The 12th fixed interface mode of the
rotor
the coil domains (depicted in green in Fig. 4.1) are retained during the reduction process, because external currents are applied to
these DoFs. The stator plots in Fig. 4.5 illustrate the problem that
arise from using the Craig-Bampton Method. The stator modes
are restricted to rather local modes, because the coil domains, of
which the DoFs are fixed during the mode computation, account
for a large portion of the total domain of the stator. The calculated
modes, therefore, will play a minor role in the internal dynamics of
the system.
The reduction matrix for the CB method can be computed by
Φ
Ψs η
q
][ ]
qnr = [ i ] = [ CB
0
I qb
qb
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¶
(4.31)
RCB
where ΦCB denotes the fixed interface modes retained during the
model reduction and Ψs the static condensation projection that was
introduced in (4.30) for Guyan’s method.
4.4 Linear Reduction Methods Based on Modal Analysis
117
The Augmented-Craig-Bampton Method
4.4.3
The CB method showed some significant disadvantages when approximating the internal dynamics of the electric machine. The
reason for the bad performance of the method was the requirement that there are no external forces applied to the internal DoFs
of the system. The Augmented-Craig-Bampton method (ACB) [34,
129] offers the possibility to enrich the basis of the generic CraigBampton method to account for forces applied to the internal DoFs.
The force distribution needs to be known a priori. In that case, the
static and/or pseudo-dynamic system response to this force distribution, so called Modal Truncation Augmentation vectors (MTAs),
can be used to enrich the basis. This way, the static response of
the modes that were not included in the reduction basis can be included in the model.
For electric machines, this method facilitates the use of modes that
are not constraint in the coil domains. Fig. 4.6 shows the modes
calculated with free DoFs in the coil domains. For electric machines, the internal forces (in this case currents) have a fixed distribution, which is defined by the coil pattern of the machine. It
is, thus, possible to represent the static response to the system by
three vectors, one for every phase of the machine.
The additional basis vector can be calculated from the force distributions that are applied to the internal DoFs of the system. The
static response of the system can be calculated by
ΦM = Kii−1 F
(4.32)
where F denotes a matrix in which the columns represent the force/
current distributions that are known a priori. Just like the retained
modes from the generic Craig-Bampton method, the MTAs should
be mass normalised
ΦTM Mii ΦM = I
(4.33)
Finally, it needs to be ensured that the reduction basis consists of
orthogonal vectors. In the generic Craig-Bampton method, this is
ensured as the results of the eigenvalue problem are by definition
orthogonal to each other. The MTAs, however, are not necessarily
orthogonal to all these vectors. By applying an orthonormal projection, P, this can be achieved
P = I − ΦCB ΦTCB Mii
(4.34)
The total reduction matrix consists of the ortho-normalised static
response of the neglected modes and the fixed interface modes
⎡η ⎤
Φ
ΦM Ψs ⎢⎢ CB ⎥⎥
q
[ i ] = [ CB
(4.35)
] ⎢ ηM ⎥
0
0
I ⎢⎢ ⎥⎥
qb
q
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¶ ⎣ b ⎦
RACB
118
4 Model Reduction
Figure 4.6
Plots of the magnetic vector
potential. Depicted are two fixed
interface modes for the
Augmented-Craig-Bampton
method of the stator (top) and the
rotor (middle). The bottom two
plots show two MTAs.
4.4.4
The 12th fixed interface mode of
the stator for the ACB method
The 13th fixed interface mode of
the stator for the ACB method
The 11th fixed interface mode of
the rotor for the ACB method
The 12th free interface mode of
the rotor for the ACB method
The 1st MTA of the stator for the
ACB method
The 2nd MTA of the stator for the
ACB method
The Dual-Craig-Bampton Method
The idea behind the Dual-Craig-Bampton (DCB) method is retaining the interface force rather than the interface displacements as
the DoFs in the reduced component model. The forces are mathematical dual to the displacements, giving the methods its name.
The difference to Rubin’s method, which also retains the interface
forces, is that even in the assembled total structure model, these
forces are retained. Because of the forces retained in the reduced
set of DoFs, a different assembly method needs to be used. This
method is called dual assembly.
4.4 Linear Reduction Methods Based on Modal Analysis
The 12th free interface mode of the
stator
th
The 11 free interface mode of the
rotor
119
The 13th free interface mode of the
stator
th
The 12 free interface mode of the
rotor
The reduction matrix reads as follows
⎡η ⎤
u
Φr Φf Ψr ⎢⎢ r ⎥⎥
[ ]=[
] ⎢η ⎥
gb
0
0
I ⎢⎢ f ⎥⎥
g
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶ ⎣ b ⎦
(4.36)
RDCB
where φr denotes the rigid body modes, Φf the free vibration modes
and Ψr the residual attachment modes. The version of the DualCraig-Bampton method that employs attachment modes instead of
residual attachment modes can also be used. It was not explicitly
derived here (see [164] for more details).
The Dual-Craig-Bampton method introduces the interface forces
as additional DoFs. For structural systems the interface forces introduce infinite eigenfrequencies, whereas for first order systems
they introduce infinite real eigenvalues. While for a time dependent study, these eigenvalues pose a problem as the system becomes
unstable, they do not pose a problem for an eigenvalue analysis, as
usually the algorithms are set up in such a way that the eigenvalues
with the lowest magnitude are found.
Figure 4.7
Free interface modes used in the
Dual-Craig-Bampton method
120
4 Model Reduction
Attachment Modes for Magnetic Fields
For magnetic fields, the computation of attachment modes known
from the Rubin’s method, varies slightly from the usual way how
attachment modes are calculated. The reason for this is the different
order of the system and the smaller number of ’rigid body modes’.
Figure 4.8
Some Attachement Modes of the
stator and rotor used for the
Dual-Craig-Bampton Method
The 12th attachment mode of the
stator
The 80th attachment mode of the
stator
The 13th attachment mode of the
rotor
The 80th attachment mode of the
rotor
Attachment modes are the static response of the system to the application of a loading at the DoFs. For dynamic substructuring,
only the response of the system to forces on the interface are important.
qstat = K+ AT gb
(4.37)
where K+ denotes the generalised inverse of K and A a Boolean
matrix that selects the interface DoFs. The attachment modes can
then be calculated as
Ψa = K+ AT
(4.38)
While for constrained systems without rigid body modes, K+ =
K−1 and qstat is easily computable, the computation of qstat is more
lengthy when ’rigid body modes’ are present in the system. In that
4.5 Application to the 600 W Ampair Wind Turbine
121
case, the stiffness matrix, K, is singular and an inverse is not easily
computable. The system needs to be constrained in such a way that
the stiffness matrix, K, becomes non-singular. For structural dynamics, determining the best isostatic constraint is a lengthy procedure [158]. The procedure for magnetic fields is shorter as there
are no rotational ’rigid body modes’ and, thus, which DoF are constraint does not matter. After the constraints are applied the remaining stiffness matrix is positive definite and, thus, invertible.
0
0
K+ = [
] = Gc
0 K−1
(4.39)
Applying a nodal force to a system with rigid body modes would
lead to an infinite static solution, as the rigid body modes would
be excited. By self-equilibrating the nodal forces, i.e. making sure
the applied forces a statically in equilibrium, the ’rigid body modes’
are not excited and the solution becomes finite. To do that, the
interface forces need to be projected to the null space of the rigid
body modes.
ATeq = (I − CΦr ΦTr ) AT
(4.40)
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
P
where P denotes the so called inertia-relief projector [29]. (4.40)
shows the difference for attachment modes of magnetic systems to
structural systems, as the damping matrix C instead of the mass
matrix is used.
As a final step, the attachment modes and rigid body modes need
to be made orthogonal with respect to the magnetic mass matrix.
To do so, the same projection matrix as for MTAs is used.
Application to the 600 W Ampair Wind Turbine
The test cases that are used to evaluate the reduction methods were
introduced in Sec. 4.1.
Tab. 4.2 shows the current participation factors of the first 14 modes
for the ACB and DCB methods. The Craig-Bampton method was
excluded from Tab. 4.2, because there are no loads applied to internal DoFs. Consequently, all participation factors would be zeros.
The internal modes of the CB method are thus not directly excited
by the external load. They still contribute to the description of the
dynamic response of the systems because within the super elements
they can be excited. However, their contribution is very small. It
can be concluded that the criterium to determine important modes
in (4.13) is not suitable for the Craig-Bampton method.
4.5
4 Model Reduction
number of DoFs
6000
4000
2000
calc. time step response
calc. time rotating field
600
Time [s]
number of DOFs
122
400
200
0
0
no reduction
Guyan CB
Figure 4.9
Reduction of calculation time and
DoFs for the reduction methods
introduced
ACB
DCB
no reduction Guyan
CB
ACB
According to Tab. 4.2, the 12th and 13th modes where chosen for
the DCB and ACB method, as these modes show the highest participation factors. This is the case because the 12th and 13th mode
have the same cyclic symmetry as the electro-magnetic active material. Therefore, they represent the magnetic field that is created
by the coils very well. For the rotor, the first 14 modes were chosen,
because no participation factors can be calculated here.
The choice for the CB method cannot be based on participation
factors. Therefore, the 14 modes with the lowest eigenvalues were
used for the stator as well as the rotor.
4.5.1
Time Integration
To compare the results of the time integration, the proper orthogonal decomposition method was used [74]. This method calculates the proper orthogonal modes (POM) and the proper orthogonal values (POV). The first POM represents the mode that captures the most energy of the time series it is calculated from. The
corresponding POV represents the energy of that POM. Comparing the first three POM/POV couples of the reduced and reference
Mode number
Table 4.2
The coil participation factors of the
various stator modes used in
various linear reduction methods:
Augmented Craig-Bampton
method (ACB) and
Dual-Craig-Bampron method
(DCB)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ACB [⋅108 ]
DCB [⋅108 ]
0.0018 −i 0.0110
0.0013 +i 0.0008
0.0150 +i 0.0005
0.0031 +i 0.0183
−0.0001 −i 0.0000
0.0001 +i 0.0000
0.0010 −i 0.0181
0.0001 −i 0.0060
0.0001 +i 0.0002
0.0002 −i 0.0001
−0.0246 +i 0.0061
−0.0028 +i 0.0207
0.0003 −i 0.0003
0.0003 +i 0.0000
0.0512 −i 0.0517
−0.0086 +i 0.0920
0.0014 +i 0.0005
−0.0007 −i 0.0006
−0.0389 +i 0.7298
0.6252 +i 0.1240
−0.0405 −i 0.0516
0.0539 −i 0.0405
−1.5762 −i 3.1884
−4.1184 −i 2.3070
−3.3662 +i 1.6365
−0.1100 −i 0.5524
−2.0429 +i 3.6471
−0.0165 +i 0.0714
4.5 Application to the 600 W Ampair Wind Turbine
no reduction
number of DoFs
7109
Guyan
123
CB
ACB
1780
1808
179
408
408
153
154
258
281
17
28
0
−
62
1
31.2
1
93.2
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0.1
0.1
0
0
Step Response
Calc. timewithout basis assembly [s]
Calc. time with basis assembly [s]
time red. with basis assembly [%]
MAC values of first three Proper
Orthogonal Modes (POM)
relative error of first three Proper
Orthogonal Values (POV) [%]
−
0.28
−3.23
Rotating Magnetic Field
Calc. time without basis assembly [s]
Calc. time with basis assembly [s]
time red. with basis assembly [%]
MAC values of first three Proper
Orthogonal Modes (POM)
relative error of first three Proper
Orthogonal Values (POV) [%]
395.8
464
442
57.6
395.8
0
465
−17.6
465
−17.6
67
83.1
−
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.12
0.5
−
Table 4.3
The results of the various linear
reduction methods: Guyan’s
Method, Craig-Bampton method
(CB) and Augmented
Craig-Bampton method (ACB)
solutions gives an impression how accurately the reduced model
reproduces the reference solution. The POMs are compared by a
modal assurance criterion (MAC), whereas the POV are compared
by calculating the relative error between them. A MAC value for
the POM close to 1 indicates that the shape of those modes are very
close together. A low relative error for the POV value indicates that
the amplitude of the associated POM are similar.
Tab. 4.3 and Fig. 4.9 show the reduction of computation time for
Guyan’s Method, the Craig-Bampton Method and the AugmentedCraig-Bampton method. The Dual-Craig-Bampton method was
not included, because the time integration was unstable using standard solver. A reduction of computation time could only be realised
for the ACB method. Guyan’s method and the CB method actually
increase the computation time.
Eigenvalue Analysis
To compare the eigenvalue analysis, the eigenvalues of the reduced
and the full system are compared. Tab. 4.4 lists the first 14 eigenvalues for each reduction method and the full model.
4.5.2
124
4 Model Reduction
The CB method and Guyan’s method yield very accurate results for
the eigenvalues. The DCB method is also quite accurate with only
two modes for stator and rotor each. The ACB method shows some
deviation from the exact eigenvalues.
Full Model
Calculation Time
w/o reduction time
0.18
CB
0.52
Guyan
ACB
DCB
0.52
0.027
0.025
−0.0631
−6.3481
−0.0630
−5.8969
Eigenvalues
Table 4.4
Value of computed eigenvalues
4.5.3
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
Mode 8
Mode 9
Mode 10
Mode 11
Mode 12
Mode 13
Mode 14
−0.0630
−5.8292
−0.0630
−5.8964
−0.0630
−5.8292
−5.8964
−19.0030
−5.8292
−18.8359
−5.8964
−18.8359
−6.4279 −5.8297
−25.6092 −19.0168
−18.8359
−32.4917
−19.0030
−32.3049
−19.0030
−32.3049
−25.9182 −18.8484
−55.6167 −32.3513
−32.3049
−43.1158
−32.4917
−43.1158
−32.4917
−43.1158
−56.7684 −32.5400
−57.4105 −43.1887
−43.2891
−51.0733
−43.2891
−51.2148
−43.2891
−51.0733
−58.6921 −43.3640
−59.9809 −51.1492
−51.2148
−56.7912
−51.0733
−56.7912
−51.2148
−56.7912
−60.2857 −51.2927
−74.6095 −56.8538
−56.9744
−56.9744
−56.9744 −111.5550 −57.0390
−61.1375
−61.1375
−61.1375 −109.9829 −61.1853
Discussion
The CB and Guyan’s method retain the coil domain DoFs in the reduced system. These DoFs are the only DoFs that have a significant
entry in the damping matrix as only the coil domains have a conductivity larger than one. Hence, the reduced part does not significantly contribute to the internal dynamics of the system. Therefore, these methods yield very accurate results. The numbers in
Tab. 4.3 indicate this. The calculation times of these two reduction
methods are actually higher than for the full system for the rotating
field load case. This increase in computation time is caused by an
extended computation time to find a feasible initial state.
The results of the time dependent analysis of the ACB method are
less accurate for the step response than for the rotational magnetic
field. The step response excites many modes whereas the rotating
field excites mainly the two modes that are retained in the basis
of the ACB. Neglecting a considerable amount of modes, the ACB
method cannot capture the entire dynamics caused by a load step.
The reference response, on the other side, are able to do so, be-
4.6 Reduction of Magneto-Mechanical Coupled Systems
125
cause no reduction is applied and thus all dynamic information is
still contained in the system. For the rotating field, the important
internal dynamics are contained in the two modes that are retained
in the ACB method. Therefore, the ACB method can describe the
solution to the rotating excitation accurately.
The ACB method performs worse in approximating the eigenvalues
of the total system, although it retains the same amount of modes
than the DCB method. Most likely, the static condensation used in
the ACB method cannot accurately describe the coupled dynamics of the system, while the attachment modes, used for the DCB
method, can. Further research is necessary, to single out the cause
of this error.
Reduction of Magneto-Mechanical Coupled
Systems
4.6
The reduction methods introduced in Sec. 4.4 can also facilitate
computations of large coupled eigenvalue problems. (2.172) needs
to be solved monolithically. This requires an enormous amount of
memory when the system has a lot of DoFs. To reduce the required
memory, the system can be split up in several subsystems. As described in Sec. 4.3.2, this reduces the computational cost. It also
reduces the needed amount of memory.
Magneto-mechanical coupled models of electric machines can be
decomposed in two ways. The first way is the one already introduced for the purely magnetic substructuring. The rotor and the
stator represent each a substructure and the super elements are
coupled in the air gap. In this case, remeshing is necessary when
the rotor is rotated relative to the stator.
It is possible to split each of the above substructures by physics,
yielding four substructures. This way a magnetic and a mechanical
substructure are created for rotor and stator. This idea is explored
in this section. Sadly, there was no time to investigate this method
in detail.
Coupling of Multi-Physical Substructures
As described before, one of the possibilities to split the total system into substructures is by separating it in different physical domains. In that case, an assembly has to be made that has one physical model on one side of the boundary, while the other substructure describes another physics.
4.6.1
126
4 Model Reduction
To better understand the concept of multi-physical substructuring,
consider the system in Fig. 4.10. The system consists of a deformable structure of which one part is part of a magnetic field. The
round nodes in Fig. 4.10 are part of both domains. At these nodes
the coupling between the two physics take place. The nodes that
are indicated by a cross are only part of one physics. All degrees of
freedom that are part of the coupled domain are considered boundary DoFs and are retained during the component model reduction
of the magnetic domain and the mechanical domain. All DoFs at
nodes represented by crosses are considered internal DoFs and will
not be part of the reduced system. The coupling is indicated by the
dashed lines.
Looking at the assembly equations, the multi-physical coupling can
be seen as an assembly with interface physics (see [164] for an explanation of the purely mechanical case). In the multi-physical
case for magneto-mechanical coupled systems, the interface physics consist of a damping term, represented by the CuA and CAu
terms in (2.170), and a stiffness term represented by the KuA and
KAu . The domain that is coupled, i.e. that combines the magnetic
field and the elastic field in one domain, is considered the boundary
now. Therefore, all boundary DoFs are part of that domain
qb ∈ Ωcpl
(4.41)
The matrices CAu ,CuA , KAu and KuA only affect the DoFs in this
coupled domain. The rows and columns of the other DoFs are
empty. The subpart of the coupling matrices that are associated
to the boundary DoFs are denoted by
CbAbu
CbubA
KbAbu
KbubA
To indicate which value belongs to which substructure/domain the
same notation as before is used, but instead of numbers indicating
the substructure, u and A are used to indicate the structural and
the magnetic domain, respectively.
Because there are no redundant variables for the multi-physical
coupling, no DoFs or force terms can be eliminated. This distin-
Ωmech
Figure 4.10
Link between nodes of
substructures with different
physics
Kb1b2 , Cb1b2
Ωcpl
Ωmag
4.6 Reduction of Magneto-Mechanical Coupled Systems
127
guishes the multi-physical coupling from the primal and dual assembly introduced in Sec. 4.3.4. There is no compatibility condition:
(u)
(A)
qb ≠ qb
(4.42)
Also the interface forces do not have the same magnitude with opposite pre-sign:
(u)
(A)
gb ≠ −gb
(4.43)
The interface forces result from the coupling matrices in (2.172).
(u)
= −KbubA qb
(A)
= −KbAbu qb − CbAbu q̇b
gb
gb
(A)
(u)
(A)
− Kbubu qb − CbubA q̇b
(u)
(u)
− Cbubu q̇b
(u)
(4.44)
The matrices in (4.44) are derived from the coupling matrices in
(2.170). As the matrices in (2.170), they depend on the DoFs of
the system and, consequently, create a nonlinearity. Separating the
physics in (4.44), yields the two coupling matrices
(u)
(u)
(u)
C
CbubA q̇b
K
KbubA qb
gb
] [ (A) ]
] [ (A) ] − [ bubu
] = − [ bubu
ǧb = [ (A)
C
0
K
0
bAbu
bAbu
q̇b
qb
gb
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¶
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
Kcpl
(4.45)
Ccpl
For the case that the physics are the same on both sides, the matrices
in (4.45) become symmetric. With (4.45), it is possible to assemble
the global coupled equation:
⎡M(u)
⎢ ii
⎢ (u)
⎢Mbi
⎢
⎢ 0
⎢
⎢ 0
⎣
(u)
Mib
(u)
Mbb
0
0
0
0
0
0
⎡ (u) ⎤ ⎡ (u)
0⎤⎥ ⎢⎢ q̈i ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢Cii
⎥ ⎢ q̈(u) ⎥ ⎢C(u)
0⎥⎥ ⎢ b ⎥ + ⎢ bi
⎢ (A) ⎥ ⎢
0⎥⎥ ⎢q̈i ⎥ ⎢ 0
⎢
⎥ ⎢
⎥
0⎦ ⎢⎣q̈(A) ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0
b
⎡K(u)
⎢ ii
⎢ (u)
⎢K
+ ⎢⎢ bi
⎢ 0
⎢
⎢ 0
⎣
(u)
Cib
+ Cbubu
0
CbAbu
(u)
Cbb
(u)
Kib
(u)
Kbb + Kbubu
0
KbAbu
0
0
(A)
Cii
(u)
Cbi
0
0
(A)
Kii
(u)
Kbi
(u)
0 ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ q̇i ⎤⎥
⎥ ⎢ (u) ⎥
CbubA ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ q̇b ⎥⎥
(A) ⎥ ⎢ (A) ⎥ +
Cib ⎥ ⎢q̇i ⎥
⎥ ⎢ (A) ⎥
(u)
Cbb ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣q̇b ⎥⎦
(u)
(u)
0 ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ qi ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ fi ⎤⎥
⎥ ⎢ (u) ⎥ ⎢ (u) ⎥
KbubA ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ qb ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ fb ⎥⎥
(A) ⎥ ⎢ (A) ⎥ = ⎢ (A) ⎥
Kib ⎥ ⎢qi ⎥ ⎢fi ⎥
⎥ ⎢ (A) ⎥ ⎢ (A) ⎥
(u)
Kbb ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣qb ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣fb ⎥⎦
(4.46) shows that the inner dynamics of the individual single physical systems stay the same during coupling. The coupling physics,
which is introduced to the system, is only applied to the interface
DoFs.
Because no DoFs or forces are eliminated, any of the reduction
methods introduced in Sec. 4.4 can be used to reduce the DoFs
in the subsystems, assuming all interface DoFs are retained.
In magneto-mechanical coupled systems, the structural dynamics
are dominated by the free interface modes. The magnetic forces
(4.46)
128
4 Model Reduction
have a minor influence on the dynamics. Therefore, it seems beneficial to use the Dual-Craig-Bampton method for reducing the
structural part. This way free interface modes are used to approximate the solution, which resemble the final solution more than
fixed interface modes.
The magnetic field in electric machines, on the other side, is mainly
dominated by its static response. The internal dynamic are not so
important due to lamination. Furthermore, the stiffness change
due to the geometry change, i.e. the part that is represented by
KAu qu in (2.170), has a strong influence on the magnetic field. In
this case, it seems better to use the CB method, as the CB method
super imposes the internal dynamics on the dominant static solution.
A mixed assembly method as introduced in [164] for the two physics seems thus best to yield a reduced model that is as accurate as
possible for a certain amount of retained modes.
4.6.2
Multi Physical Guyan
For magneto-mechanical systems, there is a special way to apply
Guyan’s method. Assuming that one physic is linear, it is possible to
condensate that physic onto the other physic. There are, therefore,
two ways to apply this Guyan’s method.
In Chapter 2 the structural PDE were assumed to be linear. It is
thus possible to condensate the whole structure onto the nodes that
represent the boundary between the structural and the magnetic
domain. This boundary consists of all magnetic DoFs within the
structure of which the dynamics are condensed. Starting from the
coupled numerical equations (2.170) the reduction matrix can be
written as
⎡q ⎤ ⎡ 0
⎤
K−1
⎢ u⎥ ⎢
uu KuAb ⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥ q
0 ⎥ [ Ai ]
qnr = ⎢ qAi ⎥ = ⎢IAiAi
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥ q
⎢qAb ⎥ ⎢ 0
IAbAb ⎥⎦ Ab
⎣ ⎦ ⎣
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
(4.47)
R
where qAb denotes the magnetic field DoFs on the interface and qAi
the internal magnetic field DoFs. The reduction matrices can then
be calculated according to (4.16). This way only the magnetic DoFs
are retained in the system.
For linear magnetic systems the condensation of the magnetic domain onto the structural domain is possible. In this case, only the
DoFs where a coil current is applied and the DoF within the permanent magnet domains are retained, because at those location ex-
4.6 Reduction of Magneto-Mechanical Coupled Systems
129
ternal loads are applied. The reduction matrix can be written as
⎡ q ⎤ ⎡I
⎤
0
⎢ ui ⎥ ⎢ uiui
⎥ q
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥
Iubub ⎥ [ ui ]
qnr = ⎢qub ⎥ = ⎢ 0
(4.48)
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎥ qub
−1
⎢ qA ⎥ ⎢ 0
⎥
K
K
Aub
AA
⎣ ⎦ ⎣
⎦
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
R
Which physics condensation yields more accurate results depends
highly on the system. As Guyan’s method neglects internal dynamics of the system, it yields good results when the dynamics play a
minor role in the system. That is the case for the magnetic field
of electric machines, as these machines are designed in such a way
that the eddy currents are minimal. However, usually a nonlinear
model is necessary to yield accurate results for the magnetic fields
as saturation and hysteresis needs to be taken into account. In such
a case, Guyan’s method cannot be applied as explained in (4.48)
On the other side, the structural system is mainly linear. However, the internal dynamics are quite important or even dominant.
Therefore, a reduction method should be used that includes these
internal dynamics.
Estimating the Frequency Change
For the case that the influence of the magnetic field on a structural
mode is of interest, the statement made above about the nonlinearities of the magnetic field no longer holds. In this case the magnetic
field can be linearised around a linearisation point, much like it was
done in Chapter 2.
Using the multi-physical Guyan method, it is possible to roughly
estimate the influence of the magnetic field on a structural mode.
For a certain structural mode it is possible to estimate the coupling
energy (2.78) without computing a coupled modal analysis. Assuming that a modal analysis for the structural part of the system
has been done and the matrices for the magnetic part of the system
are known, the system can be described by:
diag(mr ) 0 η̈r
diag(cr )
[
][ ] + [
0
0 q̈A
CAu Φ
diag(kr )
+[
KAu Φ
ΦT CuA η̇r
][ ]
q̇A
CAA
ΦT KuA ηr
][ ] = 0
qA
KAA
(4.49)
It is now possible to calculate how the magnetic field behaves when
it is influenced by the displacement of the rth mode. The magnetic
field can be described by the first order system in which the displacement of the rth mode is seen as excitation.
CAA q̇A,r + KAA qA,r = Jext − KAu φr − CAu φ̇r
(4.50)
130
4 Model Reduction
qA,r denotes the changes of the nodal values of the magnetic field
generated by the movement of the rth mode. Only the steady state
solution is of interest. The steady state solution for the rth mode is
described by
−1
qA,r = [iωr CAA + KAA ] [−KAu − iωr CAu ] φr
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¶
(4.51)
KAΦ
where ωr denotes the eigenfrequency of the rth mode. Due to the
first order ODE KAΦ has an imaginary term as well as a real term.
Therefore the change of the magnetic field created by the movement
of the mode is not necessarily in phase with the structural mode.
(4.49) can be written in terms of the modal coordinates η projecting
the magnetic degrees of freedoms onto the modes.
diag(mr )η̈r + diag(cr )η̇r + (diag(kr ) − φTr [KuA + iωr CuA ]KAΦ φr ) ηr = 0
(4.52)
The coupling energy for the rth mode, Wex,m,r , can be calculated by
Wex,m,r = φTr KuA KAΦ φr
(4.53)
Wex,m,r has a real and an imaginary part. The real part gives an
indication on how the frequency of the mode changes due to coupling while the imaginary part of Wex,m,r gives an indication about
the increase in damping.
Comparing the exchanged energy (4.53) with the energy associated
with a mode
Wr = φr Kuu φr = ω2r mr
(4.54)
gives an indication to what extend the mode is affected by the coupling. The new eigenfrequency ωr,cpl can be estimated by taking the
square root of the new energy stored in the mode
√
ωr,cpl =
4.7
ω2r − Real{
1
Wex,m,r }
mr
(4.55)
Discussion
The results in Sec. 4.5 clearly show that using the four introduced
methods for rotating electric machines yield a significant reduction of DoFs and thus calculation time for magnetic fields of electric machines. However, there are some issues associated with the
methods proposed here that still need some further research.
Electric machines are designed to operate in saturation. The linear
FE models introduced in this paper cannot take saturation of the
4.8 Summary
131
iron into account. Saturation will lead to a B-H curve that is nonlinear and therefore will lead to a nonlinear finite element formulation, resulting in a stiffness matrix that depends on the magnetic
flux density (see Sec. 2.5.6). Normally, that problem is overcome
by reassembling the stiffness matrix for every time step. However,
this method is not applicable here as the assembly of the reduction
matrices is computationally expensive. In mechanical engineering,
there are some reduction methods that are based on modal analysis
that can deal with this problem, for instance [152]. Furthermore,
hyper reduction methods such as ECSW [44] can be applied. These
reduction methods have to be adapted for magnetic fields.
The methods introduced here take a whole machine into account.
For time dependent analysis of magnetic fields in electric machines,
only a section of the machine is computed exploiting the machine’s
cyclic symmetry. This can also be done for modal analysis of cyclic structures. In the past, methods based on Floquet theory have
been developed to calculate modes for cyclic-symmetric structures,
modelling only a section of the cyclic-symmetric structure [82, 127].
This method can be adapted for the introduced methods for magnetic fields in electric machines.
Summary
In this chapter, the modal analysis for quasi-static magnetic fields
was introduced. It was shown that magnetic modes can be used
to reduce computationally expensive finite element problems, using methods developed for structural dynamics. The methods need
to be adapted slightly, because the magnetic PDEs represent a first
order system, while the structural PDEs represent a second order
system. It was shown that because of the specific design of electric
machines, this modal approach to model reduction yields accurate
results in particular for electric machines. By applying the methods
to a 2D model of an electric machine, their potential was demonstrated. Significant time reduction could be achieved by the tested
methods. However, the reduction methods lack the capability to
include nonlinear effects such as hysteresis and saturation.
Furthermore, ideas were presented for model order reduction of
dynamic magneto-mechanical coupled systems. These methods
can reduce the computational cost and the memory requirements
for the coupled eigenvalue problem introduced in Chapter 2 significantly. As the eigenvalue problem is linear, applying linear reduction techniques for magnetic fields, will not introduce significant
errors due to linearisation.
4.8
132
4 Model Reduction
PART II
Application to Large Off-Shore Wind
Turbine Generators
Abstract:
Kirschneck, M., Rixen, D.J., Polinder, H.,van Ostayen, R.A.J.;
Electro-Magneto-Mechanical Coupled Vibration Analysis
of a Direct-Drive Off-Shore Wind Turbine Generator.
Journal of Computational and Nonlinear Dynamics, 2014
The dynamic behaviour of wind turbine generators
is influenced by the coupling between the
structural dynamics and the magnetic field in the
generator. This coupling necessitates specialised
approaches to accurately capture the dynamics of
the coupled system. These approaches were
introduced in Chapter 2.
Kirschneck, M., Rixen, D.J., Polinder, H.,van Ostayen, R.A.J.;
Modal analysis of a large direct-drive off-shore wind
turbine generator rotor; ISMA2014
Kirschneck, M., Rixen, D.J., Polinder, H.,van Ostayen, R.A.J.;
In-Situ Experimental Modal Analysis of a Direct-Drive
Wind Turbine Generator; IMAC 2015
This chapter applies the methodology introduced
in Chapter 2 to a multi-megawatt wind turbine.
First, a two-way coupled model is introduced to
determine the internal dynamics of the coupled
system. Afterwards, a 2D magnetic model is used
to predict the excitation frequency created by the
magnetic field. Finally, the introduced models are
validated by in-situ vibration measurements in the
generator. For that impact and operational
measurements were conducted.
Application to XD-11
5
This Chapter is based on the papers:
136
5 Application to the XD-115
5.1
Introduction
Part I of this thesis covered the fundamental modelling techniques
for magneto-mechanical coupled systems. Those modelling techniques make it possible to predict the dynamic properties of the
generator. Furthermore, it makes it possible to see the influence
of the coupling on the dynamic properties. This chapter will apply
the introduced techniques to the generator of the XD-115, a multimegawatt wind turbine, to get a thorough understanding of the dynamics of the turbine’s rotor. The presented models will afterwards
be validated using measurements from the turbine.
From a dynamic point of view, the generator of a direct-drive wind
turbine is a unique system. The direct connection of the generator
to the hub of the turbine, i.e. the absence of a gear box, leads to low
rotation speeds in the generator. This drive train topology results
in huge torque values, as the nominal power of the turbine needs
to be transmitted at low rotation speeds. When possible, this relation between torque and rotation speed is avoided in electric machines, as it leads to unfavourable effects, such as large displacements, large rotating masses, low resonance frequencies, a large
amount of electro-magnetic active parts and, thus, expensive generator designs. Additionally, due to the large pole number, usually
encountered in this kind of machines, the excitation frequencies
of the magnetic force are especially high compared to the rotation
speed. They are, thus, the main excitation source for the structure
of the generator.
As a first step of the dynamic analysis, a 3D two-way coupled model
of the generator is presented in Sec. 5.3.2. This model identifies the
values of the modal parameters and their changes compared to the
uncoupled system. The results show that the influence of the magneto-mechanical coupling on the modal parameters is of minor importance for the XD-115. Consequently, a one-way coupled model,
which consists of a 2D magnetic model and a 3D structural modal,
is used for the rest of the chapter. This model is presented in Sec.
5.3.3 and considers the 2D magnetic forces as excitation forces for
the structural model. The excitation generated by the space harmonics and cogging torque will be identified as the main source of
vibrations within the generator rotor. An in depth analysis of the
mechanisms, creating these harmonic forces is done in Sec. 5.3.4
and the effects they have on the rotor structure is presented. Sec.
5.4, the last part of the chapter, presents an experimental validation
of the models. This is done by in-situ vibration measurements in
the turbine. Finally, the measurement results and the simulations
are compared with each other and the discussed.
5.2 The XD-115 Wind Turbine
137
Tilting mode
1st bending
mode
2nd bending
mode
Axial or
Umbrella mode
Table 5.1
Various mode shapes of
importance for the XD-115
generator rotor structure
Torsional mode
Mode Shape Description
5.1.1
In this chapter, various types of mode shapes will be discussed. The
name of a certain shape can be misleading. A clear definition of the
mode shapes is, therefore, necessary.
The rotor structure of the XD-115 can be roughly described as a disc.
As such, its lowest modes are generally the same shape as those of
a disc. Tab. 5.1 lists the most important mode shapes of a disc and
the generator of the XD-115 and the names used in this thesis to
describe them.
The XD-115 Wind Turbine
5.2
stator
bearing
The XD-115 is a 5 MW wind turbine built by XEMC-Darwind, designed for off-shore locations. This wind turbine exhibits all char-
Figure 5.1
The XD-115 wind turbine. Exterior
photo of the turbine prototype in
North Holland (left) and a
schematic of the generator
structure (right)
138
5 Application to the XD-115
Turbine Type
Rated Power
Operational Data
Cut-in wind speed [m/s]
Cut-out wind speed [m/s]
Rated wind speed [m/s]
Designed for wind class
(According to IEC 61400-1)
Noise at hub height [dBA]
Rotor
Diameter [m]
Speed [rpm]
Power regulation
Tilt angle
Blade material
Generator
Type
Cooling
Main bearing
Table 5.2
Specification of the XD-115. Data
taken from [174]
XD115
5MW
4
25
14
IC
112
115
Variable (nominal 18 rpm)
Full span pitch
6○
Glass fiber reinforced epoxy
Synchronous Permanent magnet direct-drive
Dehumidified forced air
Single main bearing multiple row, cylindrical
roller bearing
Converter
Type
Voltage [V]
Grid coupling
Voltage source inverter
3000
AC-DC-AC
Tower
Material
Hub height [m]
Steel tubular
80 to 140 (project dependent)
Masses [ton]
Rotor (hub + blades)
Generator
Nacelle
Total top mass
97
137
47
281
acteristics of a direct-drive wind turbine, such as a large generator
rotor diameter (ca. 5 m), a high generator mass and large torque
values necessary to generate the nominal power of 5 MW. Fig. 5.1
shows the exterior of the turbine and the generator rotor structure.
Tab. 5.2 lists important properties of the turbine.
The rotation speed of the turbine during operation is between 9 and
18rpm.
The XD-115 rotor stiffener construction is a welded steel construction with stiffener plates. The difference of the outer rotor diameter and the bearing diameter is around 2 m. The large difference
between the outer rotor diameter and bearing diameter makes a
stiff rotor construction necessary. The air gap length is approximately 0.1 % of the outer rotor diameter.
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
139
5.3
The system introduced in Chapter 3 is an academic example of a
coupled system, in which the system’s dynamics differ from the
purely structural dynamics. In a similar fashion, the structure of
the XD-115 generator is influenced by the magnetic field in the air
gap. Naturally, the modes of the XD-115 and the magnetic field are
more complex. Still, it is expected that under certain circumstances
the modes are affected and their modal parameters change.
In this thesis, only the rotor of the generator is analysed. It was assumed that the stator is stiffer than the rotor and thus the rotor dynamics are more likely to be influenced by the magneto-mechanical
coupling. This assumption was made because the stator back iron,
which represents a considerable amount of steel, is again supported
by another steel structure. Another reason that lead to the decision
of neglecting the deformation of the stator was the large amount of
DoFs that is necessary to model the stator structure, the rotor structure and the magnetic field simultaneously. This amount of DoFs
could not be handled by any available hardware. Sadly, there was
no time to apply the reduction techniques developed in Chapter
4. Furthermore, the stator structure is more difficult to model, because of the lamination of the stator back iron. Coupling that can
occur between modes of the rotor and the stator could note be considered by omitting the stator deformation.
It is assumed that the response to an external loading can be predicted in two steps, which are independent of each other. In a first
step, the resonance frequencies, mode shapes and damping values,
i.e. the modal parameters, are estimated. This is done while the
turbine is standing still. It is, thus, assumed that neither, the gyroscopic forces originating from the rotation of the the turbine, nor
the armature field will influence the modal parameters. This assumption is valid, because the rotation speed of the turbine is low
and the strength of the armature field is lower than the strength of
the field created by the permanent magnets. In a second step, the
excitation mechanism is analysed and it is identified to what extend these excitation forces excite the dynamics of the rotor. The
armature field and the interaction of the permanent magnets with
the stator will be identified as the main source of excitation.
Structural modeling
The structural model predicts the static and dynamic deformation
of the rotor structure under the magnetic load in the air gap. A 3D
model of the structure is necessary to capture all displacements in
three dimensions. A 2D model, as often used in modelling electric
5.3.1
140
5 Application to the XD-115
Figure 5.2
Domains of the model of the
XD115 (left) and the mesh of the
model (right)
machines, cannot account for axial displacement and axial magnetic forces. The geometry of the model was extracted from the
Computer Aided Design (CAD) model of the turbine. No measurements or validation of the CAD model were conducted to verify
conformity with the actual rotor in the turbine.
Fig. 5.2 depicts the model of the rotor used for the finite element
analysis. To account for the blades additional mass and moment of
inertia were added to the domains that represent the blades (in Fig.
5.2 coloured in red). These domains were modelled as rigid bodies
to suppress modes that involve a deformation of the blade root. For
that, the DoFs in those domains, were substituted by a rigid domain
with 7 DoFs (3 for the translation, 3 for the rotation direction and
1 for the magnitude of the rotation). A survey of the influence of
gyroscopic forces showed that they are negligible during the modal
analysis. Due to the low rotation speed of up to 18 rpm, the gyroscopic forces are so low that they have hardly any influence on the
resonance frequencies and damping values of the system.
The magnet assembly, i.e. the permanent magnets and the structure to mount them on the rotor, was modelled as a solid block
instead of a complex assembly of bolts, holders and magnets. This
was necessary to reduce the number of DoFs to a value that could be
handled by the hardware available. To account for the lower stiffness of the actual assembly in the real turbine, the Young’s modulus
of the connecting part between the magnet and the structure was
lowered by 99.75% of the original stiffness. Additional mass was
added to the block representing the magnet assembly, to match the
mass of the magnet assembly in the turbine.
The discretisation is done using tetrahedral volume elements. Geometric nonlinearities were not taken into account. Since the analysis was done in the rotating reference frame that is fixed to the
rotor, it was assumed that the displacements were small.
The geometry of the rotor structure includes thin stiffener plates.
The discretisation of these plates by volume elements can lead to an
over estimation of the stiffness when not enough elements are used.
The stiffness of the stiffener plates is crucial to compute accurately
the overall stiffness of the generator rotor. To ensure that the stiff-
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
141
ness is not overestimated, a convergence study was conducted. Fig.
5.3 shows the normalised frequency of the first bending mode of the
rotor over the number of degrees of freedom used in the model. As
normalisation frequency, the measured resonance frequency of the
first bending mode was used. To avoid large models, the mesh consisting of approximately 1.1 million DoFs was used in the structural
model, which is sufficient to estimate the stiffness of the stiffener
plates and calculate the frequency accurately up to 2 %.
normalised Frequency
1.09
1.02
1
0.11
0.3
0.85
# of DoFs
1.36
⋅107
Figure 5.3
Frequency of the first bending
mode over the number of degrees
of freedoms of the model. For the
normalisation the first bending
mode of the measured frequencies
was used.
The Bearing Model
The bearing, which is located between the hub and the generator,
supports the entire rotor structure, including hub, blades and generator rotor. The XD-115 incorporates a single bearing design. It
consists of three raceways, two in axial direction and one in radial direction. The rolling bearing elements are cylindrical in both
bearings.
Coil
Nacelle
Blade
Magnet
Stator Stiffener
Rotor Stiffener
Hub
Bearing
Fig. 5.4 shows a single bearing design that is often encountered
in direct-drive wind turbines, and which resembles the design of
Figure 5.4
Schematic representation of a
direct-drive generator. This figure
is the same as Fig. 1.4. It is
reprinted here for more
convenience during reading
142
5 Application to the XD-115
the XD-115. The outer part of the bearing is, thus, rotating, the inner part is fixed and rests on a cone shaped support structure. The
bearing is stiffened by a bearing stiffener to prevent ovalisation of
the bearing rings. This bearing stiffener is not included in the FE
model as it has little effect on the modes under consideration.
The stiffness of a bearing element was computed analytically using the contact theory by Hertz (see for instance [10] for details).
According to this theory, the force of a line contact between two
cylinders with parallel rotation axis can be described by
Felem =
1π
lelem E∗ δ
24
(5.1)
where Felem is the contact force of one element, lelem the length of the
bearing element, δ the indentation and E∗ denotes the equivalent
Young’s modulus which can be calculated by
1
1 − ν2 1 − ν2
+
=
∗
E
E1
E2
(5.2)
where E1 and E2 denote the Young’s modulus of the two materials
in contact. The half in (5.1) originates from the fact that there are
two contacts with the same properties for each element. Taking the
derivative of (5.1) with respect to the indentation δ yields a constant
contact stiffness of.
π
(5.3)
kelem = lelem E∗
8
where kelem denotes the stiffness of one bearing element. This formula computes the values of the bearing element’s stiffness. The
values shown in Tab. 5.3 give an approximate value, because they
are rounded to the closes order of magnitude. From these values
the total bearing stiffness can be calculated. Assuming that all elements are in contact in the axial bearing, the total axial bearing
stiffness can be calculated by multiplying the stiffness per element
with the number of elements.
Description
Table 5.3
Approximate stiffness values of
bearings and bearing elements
(rounded to the closest order of
magnitude)
N
element stiffness axial bearing m
N
total bearing stiffness, axial m
N
element stiffness radial bearing m
total bearing stiffness, radial horizontal
N
total bearing stiffness, radial vertical m
Value
1 ⋅ 1010
1 ⋅ 1012
1 ⋅ 1010
N
m
1 ⋅ 1010
1 ⋅ 1011
The calculation of the radial stiffness is more complex, because in
this case not all bearing elements are in contact. See Fig. 5.5 for
the geometry and explanation of the various variables necessary
for this derivation. According to [171], the radial displacement at
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
143
any position within a bearing can be calculated by
1
δ(θ) = δm cos θ − cp
2
(5.4)
where cp denotes the clearance of the bearing, δm the maximal disy
x
1
c
2 p
δm
−θl
θ
Figure 5.5
Schematic of a radial bearing with
rolling elements
θl
placement at θ = 0 and θ the angle around the rotation axis. The
total force of the bearing can be calculated by
θl
Fbearing (δm ) = ∑ Felement,k (δ(θk )) cos(θk )
(5.5)
θk =−θl
where −θl and θl denote the position of the first and last bearing
element in contact, respectively. θk denotes the angles at which
there are bearing elements in contact with both raceways. (5.5) can
be used to calculate the bearing force resulting from a deflection
of the shaft. Preloading plays a major role for the bearing stiffness
in radial direction as the angle θl and consequently the number of
bearing elements in contact depend on the load. (5.5) can be solved
iteratively for δm , when a load Fbearing = P is given.
After the initial displacement δm is calculated, the stiffness of the
total bearing can be calculated by deriving the bearing force with
respect to the displacement at the computed displacement.
kbearing = −
∂Fbearing
∣
∂δm Fbearing =P
(5.6)
To compute the bearing stiffness, some assumptions need to be
made about the parameter values, as the exact details of the bearing
are unknown. For the radial stiffness that is listed in Tab. 5.3, the
gravitational force was used as preloading in vertical direction and
144
5 Application to the XD-115
the play in the bearing cp was assumed to be 10−3 m. In horizontal
direction, no preloading was assumed. Therefore, the total bearing
stiffness in this direction is the same as the element stiffness, as under no load only one element is in contact. A sensitivity analysis
of the bearing stiffness revealed, that the influence of the preloading and the radial clearance on the eigenfrequencies is small. The
computed eigenvalues for the modes change by a couple of tenths
of Hertz.
To include the bearing stiffness in the modal analysis, it needs to
be modelled as constant stiffness. To comply with this requirement,
the bearing is modelled as a uniform constant stiffness per area that
is applied to the raceway of the bearing in the FE model. The value
of the stiffness per area is calculated by dividing the total stiffness of
the bearing, calculated according to (5.4) - (5.6), by the area of the
race ways. For simplicity a uniform radial bearing stiffness about
N
of 1 ⋅ 1011 m
has been used in the finite element model.
In a finite element model the bearing stiffness has to be applied
to the nodes. For that, the total bearing stiffness needs to be recomputed to a nodal level. The bearing force of the radial bearing
should only be applied in radial direction. Otherwise a stiffness in
tangential direction is applied, that will affect the torsional mode
of the rotor. The bearing force in radial direction depends on the
displacement in radial direction.
⃗fb,rad = − ktot n
⃗b ⋅ u
⃗(⃗x)
Ab
(5.7)
where ⃗fb,rad denotes the bearing force density in radial direction,
⃗b the normal vector on the raceways of the bearing. ktot the total
n
bearing stiffness and Ab the surface of the raceway.
The discretisation is done by deriving the energy associated with
the bearing force and differentiating twice with respect to the structural degrees of freedom.
kbearing =
∂2
ktot T
⃗ ⋅ ⃗fb,rad dΩ ≈ ∫ NTu,s nb
n Nu,s dΩ
∫ u
∂q2u
Ab b
Ω
(5.8)
Ω
where kbearing denotes the element matrix containing the nodal values of the bearing stiffness per area and nb the discrete version of
the normal vector on the race way. Nu,s denotes the surface shape
functions of the part of the mesh describing the raceway surface of
the bearing.
The contact mechanics within the bearing result in a nonlinear stiffness of the bearing. Depending on the loading, the number of bearing elements in contact and, thus, the number of elements that can
transmit forces between the two raceways of the bearing changes.
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
145
Quite contrary to that, the modes that are calculated by the modal
analysis are based on linear force displacement relations for the
bearing. The modes can thus not accurately take the contact mechanics of the bearing into account. Accordingly, an error will be
made during the modal analysis for modes that are affected by the
bearing stiffness.
Two-Way Coupled Dynamics
The academic example in Chapter 3 showed that magnetic forces
acting on a structure can lead to additional stiffness for the mechanical system. It was already mentioned that there are four effects
that can influence the modal parameters (see Sec. 3.2.2). For an
electric machine, these four effects also exist and can influence the
dynamic behaviour of the electric machine.
In a two-way coupled system, the magnetic forces depend on the
movement of the structure. In general, a positive stiffness is created
by the changing magnetic force, if the magnetic force increases with
a movement in the opposite direction of the magnetic force. If the
magnetic force decreases for the same movement, then a negative
stiffness is created.
To capture the influence of the magnetic field on all modes accurately, a 3D structural as well as a 3D magnetic model is needed. A
2D model has the advantage that it consists of much fewer degrees
of freedom, but it has the decisive disadvantage that it cannot simulate the reaction of the magnetic field to displacements in axial
direction. Since bending modes are expected to be of interest, this
simplification cannot be made for the model predicting the coupled
dynamics.
3D Magnetic Modelling
The large size of DoFs that is necessary to capture the 3D magnetic
field accurately could not be reached. The memory requirements
for such a model with 12 ⋅ 106 DoFs was too large for any hardware available. It is therefore assumed, that the magnetic field at
the singularities around the magnet assemblies are not accurately
computed, leading to inaccurate values for the magnetic forces.
The force comparison in Sec. 2.5.9 indicates that Maxwell’s stress
tensor, which is used for the calculations, underestimates the forces.
The geometry of the magnets and the magnet holders is strongly
simplified, in the two-way coupled model. As the geometry deviates from reality, so do the flux lines and thus the magnetic field.
5.3.2
146
5 Application to the XD-115
Property Name
Value
Permanent Magnet properties
Young’s Modulus [GPA]
200
Density [ mkg3 ]
7500
Poisson’s ration [-]
0.29
Conductivity [ mS ]
0.6 ⋅ 106
Relative Permeability [-]
1.05
Remanence Flux Density [T]
1.25
A
Coercivity [ m
]
985000
Lamination properties
Young’s Modulus [GPA]
200
Density [ mkg3 ]
7870
Poisson’s ration [-]
Conductivity in radial/circumferential
direction [ mS ]
0.29
Conductivity in axial direction [ mS ]
H-B Curve
8 ⋅ 106
0
⃗ = 150∣⃗
∣H∣
B∣ + 10∣⃗
B∣12
Copper properties
Conductivity [ mS ]
6 ⋅ 107
Relative Permeability [-]
1
Air properties
Conductivity [ mS ]
1
Relative Permeability
1
Structural Steel properties
Young’s Modulus [GPA]
200
Density [ mkg3 ]
7850
Poisson’s ration [-]
0.3
Conductivity [ mS ]
8 ⋅ 106
Relative Permeability
100
Magnet holder properties
Table 5.4
Magnetic and structural material
properties used for modelling the
XD-115. For IP reasons, the values
have been slightly changed from
the actual values in the turbine
Young’s Modulus [GPA]
0.5
Density [ mkg3 ]
7850
Poisson’s ration [-]
Conductivity in radial/circumferential
direction [ mS ]
0.29
Conductivity in axial direction [ mS ]
H-B Curve
8 ⋅ 106
1
⃗ = 150∣⃗
∣H∣
B∣ + 10∣⃗
B∣12
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
147
The geometry used for the model reduces the leakage flux compared to the actual design in the turbine. The magnetic flux density
in the air gap, and thus also the effect of the magnetic field on the
structural dynamics, are overestimated.
The analysis is done without any current in the coils. It is, thus, a
closed system according to the derivation in Sec. 2.5. The force calculation in the model has been done according to (2.102). Although
this techniques is less accurate than the method using nodal values,
it has the advantage that it is integrated in the software package
used. The material constants and properties used for the model are
listed in Tab. 5.4.
Internal Dynamics
Tab. 5.5 lists the modes of the rotor structure with and without
magneto-mechanical coupling. Tab. 5.5 clearly indicates that the
change of the resonance frequencies due to coupling is minimal.
Hence, it can be neglected for predicting the dynamic response of
the generator of the XD-115. Also the damping increase caused by
the coupling is negligible, because the structural damping of steel
is an order of magnitude higher. The shape of the modes are not
significantly changed by the magneto-mechancial coupling.
One-Way Coupled Model of The XD-115 Generator
The two-way coupled analysis in Sec. 5.3.2 showed that the change
of the modal parameters due to the magneto-mechanical coupling
is negligible for the rotor of the XD-115. It is, therefore, sufficient
to conduct a one-way coupled analysis, in which the effects of the
magnetic field on the modal parameters are neglected. The model
still contains a coupling, as the mechanical system is excited by
magnetic forces. However, the length of the air gap, as well as any
other displacements or displacement velocities, do not influence
the magnetic field. The interaction between the elastic field and
the magnetic field occurs only in the direction from the magnetic
domain to the mechanical domain.
For this analysis, a 2D magnetic model is sufficient as it is only used
to compute the excitation forces that are generated by the interaction of the armature field with the rotor field. These forces are assumed to have a radial and a tangential component only and can,
thus, be computed by a 2D model. An axial component, which
would be created by an axial misalignment of the rotor and stator,
is assumed to be zero.
5.3.3
148
5 Application to the XD-115
Results without coupling
Mode description
normalised
Frequency
Mode shape
Results with coupling
normalised
Frequency
0.81
0.00045i+0.81
0.82
0.0005i + 0.82
1.02
0.003i + 1.02
1.02
0.003i + 1.02
1.45
0.00005i+1.45
2.6
0.0013i + 2.6
2.6
0.0013i + 2.6
2.66
0.005i + 2.67
Mode shape
tilting mode
1st bending modes
axial mode mode
2nd bending mode
torsional mode
Table 5.5 Mode shapes of the two-way coupled problem with and without magneto-mechanical coupling. The colour
represents the magnitude of the dispalcement
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
149
2D Magnetic Model
This model consists of an eighth of the total circumference of the
rotor. An eight is sufficient to depict the whole magnetic field as the
magnetic-active parts of the generator are cyclic-symmetric. The
stator iron material and the casing of the magnets were modelled
taking saturation into account.
The 2D model consist of approximately 260000 DoFs, which is only
a fraction of the 3D magnetic model used to determine the modal
parameters. The material properties are the same as the ones used
for the 3D model, listed in Tab. 5.4. To determine the excitation, a
parameter sweep of a stationary solver over various rotor positions
has been conducted. This approach neglects dynamic effects of the
magnetic field as well as the dynamics of the coil circuits. These are
considered small in the generator due to segmentation and lamination. Global forces have been calculated using the method of
global virtual work as introduced in Sec. 2.5.8. When local forces
were needed Maxwell’s stress tensor was used.
Analysing the Excitations
Within an electric machine, there are several possible excitation
mechanisms that are important to analyse, when looking at the
electric machine as a dynamic system. Depending on the type of
machine and its operation conditions, some of the excitation mechanisms are less important or can even be ignored completely.
Rotational Excitation: The turbine is excited during operation by
the rotation of the rotor. Eccentricity of the rotor, which
is unavoidable during production, results in a rotating force
acting on the stator. The excitation frequency of this unbalance force is either the rotation frequency itself or a multiple
of the cyclic symmetry of the rotor multiplied with the rotation frequency. The later can occur when the mass distribution of the rotor is not uniform due to the cyclic symmetry.
In wind turbines, there are also the 3p and 9p frequencies
which results from the aerodynamics of the blades. These
frequencies are always multitudes of 3, because there are 3
blades attached to the hub. However, these frequencies play
a minor role for the dynamics of direct-drive wind turbine
generators.
Electro-Magnetic Excitation: This excitation source is the main
cause for vibrations for the generator rotor. It is created by
the interaction between the electro-magnetic active parts of
the rotor with the electro-magnetic active parts on the stator.
The most pronounced effect is the interaction between the
5.3.4
150
5 Application to the XD-115
magnetic field created by the permanent magnets on the rotor and the slots of the stator, called cogging torque. Furthermore, space harmonics of the armature field are an important source of excitation.
The rotation frequency and the 3p and 9p frequencies are too low
to excite the structural modes of the generator and the rotor’s mass
distribution is too homogeneous to cause a significant unbalance
force. According to their importance the excitation resulting directly from the rotation of the shaft will be neglected and not further
analysed.
Cogging Torque
To understand the underlying mechanism of cogging torque, the
contribution of one magnets to the total torque of the machine is
analysed. [155–157] conduct an extensive analysis of the influences
of various parameters on torque cogging in slow rotating permanent magnet machines. [156] is dedicated to the combination of pole
and slot numbers.
The torque contribution of one magnet in no-load condition is determined by the interaction of the magnet’s field with the stator
slotting. The energy of the field created by one magnet is minimal,
when the volume of the air gap above that magnet is minimal. This
is the preferred configuration for that magnet and the torque it creates will pull it into this configuration.
For one magnet, this preferred configuration occurs as often per
revolution as there are stator teeth. In other words, a configuration minimising the volume of the air gap above a magnet, can be
reached for each stator tooth. During rotation, one magnet creates thus a harmonic torque content at nslots the rotation frequency,
where nslots denotes the number of slots 1 .
The harmonic content of the total torque of the generator can be determined by analysing how often, during one revolution, the same
relative position of stator slots and magnets is reached. To clarify
this, consider the two configurations in Fig. 5.6. The top of Fig.
5.6 shows a configuration in which magnet 0 is aligned with stator
tooth 0. At the bottom of Fig. 5.6, the same slot pole combination
is shown rotated, so that magnet 1 is aligned with stator tooth 5.
Because neither the distances between stator teeth nor the distance
between magnets have changed, the two subfigures of Fig. 5.6 show
1 Assuming
ally
that the spatial force distribution over the magnet varies harmonic-
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
1
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
0
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
3
2
6
7
8
9
1
151
4
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2
3
4
360○
npoles
0○
○
5 n360
r
slots
φ
the same configuration rotated by
5
360○ 360○
−
nslots npoles
(5.9)
where nslots denotes the number of slots and npoles the number of
poles. In general, the next configuration that is identical with the
original configuration is reached after a rotation that is equal to
360○
nlcm
(5.10)
where nlcm denotes the least common multiple of the number of
slots and the number of poles. This configuration will thus reoccur
nlcm times during one revolution. This reoccurring configuration
between rotor magnets and stator teeth creates a periodicity when
the rotor is rotating that depends linearly on the rotation frequency.
Because the torque depends on the magnetic flux density in the air
gap, the above mechanism creates a periodic component of the total
torque.
It can be shown that the same configuration reoccurs after a rota○
tion of 360
by considering a cyclic symmetric section of the gennlcm
erator. That sections contains an integer number of poles and slots
so that:
360○ 360○
360○
(5.11)
=m
=
k
npoles
nslots nsym
where nsym denotes the number of cyclic-symmetric parts of the
electro-magnetic active parts of the generator. k denotes the num-
Figure 5.6
Magnets passing the slots of the
stator. The same configuration is
reached when a magnet and stator
tooth are aligned again.
152
5 Application to the XD-115
Torque of 5 magnets
Torque of 1 magnet
Torque of 2 magnets
Torque [Nm]
103
100
10−3
1
2
4
3
5
ωext
nslots ωrot
Torque from 5 magnets
Torque from 1 magnets
Torque from 2 magnets
Torque [Nm]
103
100
10−3
2
4
6
12
16 18 20
30
40
48
2ωext
npoles ωrot
Figure 5.7
Spatial spectral analysis of the
torque contribution of 1, 2 and 5
neighbouring magnets for the
no-load case (top) and the load
case (bottom)
ber of poles per symmetric section and m the number of slots. From
(5.11) it can be derived that
mnpoles = knslots = nlcm
(5.12)
Bringing all fractions in (5.11) on the smallest denominator yields
thus
360○
360○
= mk
(5.13)
km
mnpoles
knslots
360○
360○
denotes thus the largest angle which contains kn
as well as
nlcm
slots
360○
in its multiples. Taking the difference between two arbitrary
mnpoles
○
○
○
multiples of 360
and n360
, yields again a multiple of 360
.
nslots
nlcm
poles
l
360○
360○
360○
−n
=s
npoles
nslots
nlcm
N
with l, n ∈
and s ∈
and n < m, l < k
Z
(5.14)
The smallest possible rotation angle between two configurations
that are equal is reached for s = 1.
The top of Fig. 5.7 shows the spatial spectral analysis of the torque
of one, two and five neighbouring magnets in no-load condition.
These were computed using Maxwell’s stress tensor on the outer
surface of the magnets. For one and two magnets nslots times the
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
153
rotation speeds, and multiples of it, is the dominant excitation frequency. For five magnets, the torque cogging at nslots times the rotation speed decrease, while it increases for the multiples of this
frequency. This is caused by a small phase shift of the torque harmonics for neighbouring magnets. This phase shift diminishes the
amplitude of the torque cogging, while it increases the number of
frequencies as can be seen in Fig. 5.7
The excitation frequencies created by torque cogging are exactly in
the frequency range in which some resonance frequencies of the
rotor structure are located. It is, thus, possible that the resonance
frequencies are excited by them.
Influence of Space- and Time Harmonics
Spectral analysis of magnetic field of stator
Spectral analysis of magnetic field of rotor
1
0.5
0
0
2
4
6
order of space harmonic
8
10
Time harmonics are the result of the switching in the frequency
converter of the generator. Ideally, the current waveform is sinusoidal in time. The switching causes the current to deviate from this
ideal sinusoidal waveform. The resulting frequencies depend on
the switching frequency of the frequency converter. For directdrive generators the switching frequency is so high compared to the
resonance of the structure that time harmonics play no role. The
resulting frequencies are too high to excite any of the global modes.
For smaller machines these frequencies can be very important (see
[112] for an example).
Space harmonics are the harmonics in the magnetic flux density in
the air gap of an electric machine that result from the spatial distribution of the windings. The windings are never distributed ideally
sinusoidal, because they are located in slots. These slots allow only
discrete distributions of the coils. Fig. 5.8 shows the spectral analysis of the MMF of the stator and the rotor in the XD-115. Besides
the fundamental, there are several higher and lower harmonics.
Figure 5.8
Spatial spectral analysis of the MMF
for the stator at ia = 1, ib = −0.5
and ic = −0.5 and the rotor
154
5 Application to the XD-115
Comparing the torque spectrum for 5 magnets in Fig. 5.7 shows
that under load different orders are dominant. The dominant orders for the load are the ones created by the space harmonics. In
order to create a torque, the same harmonic must be present in the
rotor and the stator. The rotor MMF follows a square wave profile
and, thus, only the odd higher harmonics are present in this spectral analysis. Due to the winding of the stator, the spectral analysis
of the stator MMF shows harmonic content higher and lower than
the fundamental. But only the harmonic at 5, 7, 11,13, ... create a
torque, because only those are also present in the rotor.
When the 5th and 7th space harmonic of the stator field interact with
the rotating field of the rotor, they both create an oscillating torque
n
. The same happens with the 11th and 13th harat ωext = 6ωrot poles
2
n
monic, which create a dynamic excitation force at ωext = 12ωrot poles
.
2
This torque harmonic can be seen in Fig. 5.7. It is the dominant
torque ripple harmonic in operation of the turbine. See Sec. C for
a derivation of this behaviour using an analytical model of an electric machine.
The additional peaks in the plots for one and two magnets in Fig. 5.7
are probably created by the sub harmonics that are present due to
the winding scheme of the XD-115 generator. These subharmonics
create a torque contribution when they interact with the rotor field,
when only one or two magnets are analysed. For five magnets they
cancel out.
Spatial Distribution of the Magnetic Forces
The top part of Fig. 5.9 shows the torque distribution over the surface of the rotor. The bottom part of Fig. 5.9 shows the radial force
acting on the rotor. The torque is strongest at the edges of the magnets enclosure, while the radial forces are strongest under the stator
teeth.
When the turbine rotates, the stator teeth pass the magnets and the
maximum of the normal forces with them. This can be seen in Fig.
5.9 by the moving force intensity on the surface of the magnets. The
magnets experience a changing torque density over time due to the
slotting. For both plots the armature field rotates with the rotor as
it would do in normal operation. In the first couple of seconds, the
speed up of the rotor can be seen
Analysing Fig. 5.9, two assumptions can be made. Firstly, the force
on the outer rotor surface next to the magnets can be neglected. All
magnetic forces concentrate on the magnets’ surfaces. Secondly, it
is convenient to use a uniform force distribution per magnet. The
magnitude of this uniform force distribution depends on the pos-
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
155
1
Time [s]
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0
1
0.5
−1
−1.2
−0.8
−0.6
1.5
−0.4
2
Arclength [m]
−0.2
0
0.2
Specific Torque [Nm/m2 ]
2.5
3
0.4
0.6
3.5
1
0.8
1.2
⋅106
Time [s]
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0
1
0.5
−1
−0.8
−0.6
1.5
−0.4
2
Arclength [m]
2.5
−0.2
0
0.2
Specific Normal Force [N/m2 ]
0.4
ition of the rotor to the stator. Due to symmetry, every fifth magnet shows the same configuration and, thus, the same normal force
and torque. Fig. 5.10 shows the development of the radial force and
torque for two neighbouring magnets. The delay between the normal forces and torque of the two magnets is visible by the horizontal
shift of the plots.
Approximating Magnetic forces
Making the simplifying assumptions about the magnetic force distribution above, the magnetic force can be described by a simple
analytical expression. This is necessary, as the structural model has
much less DoFs than the 2D magnetic model on the magnets’ surfaces. The details of the force distribution cannot be described ac-
3
0.6
3.5
1
0.8
⋅106
Figure 5.9
The computed torque distribution
(top) and specific radial force
(bottom) on the outer surface of
the rotor.
5.3.5
156
5 Application to the XD-115
Figure 5.10
Total normal force and torque per
magnet under load
normal force [N]
Torque [Nm]
magnet 1 torque;
⋅104
−3.2
−3.4
−3.6
−3.8
−4
0
0.5
1
magnet 2 torque
1.5
Time [s]
magnet 1 normal force;
2
2.5
magnet 2 normal force
50,000
48,000
46,000
44,000
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
curately by the coarse mesh. Furthermore, the shape of the magnets
is much simpler in the structural model. This was done to reduce
the number of DoFs of the structural model and keep them within
a limit that can still be handled.
For the analytic description, it is convenient to separate the force
term in a static part and a dynamic part.
Static Forces
The static part describes the average force in time in radial and tangential direction. It results from the applied torque of the generator
and the attracting forces between stator and rotor. They can be described by multiplying three quantities.
fpos (θ) is a scalar quantity that identifies where the magnets are
located over the circumference of the rotor. Its output values are
between 0 and 1. By multiplying this quantity with a force vector,
the force vector will only be applied at the locations where fpos is
not zero.
⃗frel contains the information about the relation between radial and
tangential component. In electric machines, the attracting forces
between stator and rotor are higher than the tangential forces that
create the torque. This is expressed by this vector, which multiplies
the radial component with the factor 3.58. This factor was extracted from Fig. 5.9 by dividing the average torque per magnet by the
radius of the rotor and comparing it with the average radial force
per magnet.
f̂mag , the last component, determines the magnitude of the forces.
To ensure that the total torque created by the static forces is equi-
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
157
valent to the nominal torque value Tnom
∬ rr,out⃗eθ ⋅ ⃗fmag,stat dΩmag = Tnom
(5.15)
Ωmag
needs to be solved for the force vector amplitude f̂mag . In (5.15), rr,out
denotes the outer radius of the rotor, Ωmag denotes the surface of
the cylinder barrel, where the magnetic force is applied, and ⃗eθ a
vector pointing in tangential direction.
All these considerations lead to the following expression for the
static magnetic force density.
⎡3.58⎤
⎥
⎢
⃗fmag,stat (⃗xmag ) = f̂mag ⎢⎢ 1 ⎥⎥ 1 (1 − sin(npoles θ))
⎥
⎢
⎢ 0 ⎥ ´¹2¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
⎦
⎣
fpos
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
(5.16)
⃗frel
where θ denotes the circumferential coordinate in cylindrical coordinates. The radial component of the static force distribution is
depicted on the right of Fig. 5.11.
−2
−1
0
1
2
−1
0
⋅104
Dynamic tangential force density
1
⋅105
Static radial force density
Dynamic Forces
The dynamic part of the force describe the deviation of the tangential and radial forces from the average values in Fig. 5.9. As shown
in that figure, the dynamic content of the total magnetic forces that
the generator creates is much smaller than the static content. The
dynamic force acts at the same locations as the static force, the surface of the magnets. Therefore, the quantity indicating the position
of the magnets fpos can be reused.
Figure 5.11
Force distribution of magnetic
forces
158
5 Application to the XD-115
The vector ⃗fmag,dyn is described in the frequency domain as complex quantities. The magnitude of the complex vector denotes the
magnitude of the force, where as the phase angle gives the time shift
between certain components of the excitation force vector. The frequency of the excitation forces is not specified but can vary. This is
beneficial as the excitation frequencies in the generator vary a lot.
Fig. 5.9 shows that the amplitude of the dynamic part of the torque
is about a fifth of the static value. The vector ⃗frel,dyn contains the
relation between the tangential static force and the dynamic force
amplitudes.
The last term in (5.17) describes the phase lag of some parts of the
dynamic force. As discussed in secref1way:excitation, there is a
360○
small phase lag of about 2n
between neighbouring magnets. All
sym
these consideration can be condensed to the following equation for
the dynamic forces
⎡0.5⎤
⎡ eiθshift ⎤
⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢
⎢
⎥
⃗fmag,dyn (⃗xmag ) = f̂mag ⎢0.2⎥ fpos ⎢⎢ei(θshift + π2 ) ⎥⎥
⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎢
⎥
⎢0⎥
⎢
0
⎦
⎣ ⎦
⎣
²
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
⃗frel,dyn
with
(5.17)
⃗fshift
θshift = 2nsym θ
In (5.17), θshift denotes the phase shift of the magnetic force that
depends on the location around the rotor. The π2 in ⃗fshift originates
from the delay between the normal force and the torque that can be
seen in Fig. 5.10, which is about a fourth of the period. ⃗xmag is the
subset of ⃗x that includes all points, where the magnetic force ⃗fmag
is applied. The radial dynamic force distribution is depicted on the
left of Fig. 5.11.
5.3.6
Simulation Results
After the structural system was determined in Sec. 5.3.1, the response of the system to the loads defined in Sec. 5.3.5 can be computed. A run up of the turbine in time domain cannot be simulated
due to the high number of DoFs in the system. Therefore, the response is estimated by a frequency sweep and by computing the
modal participation factors to the system.
The response to the static magnetic forces, defined in (5.16), can
be computed. For that the displacement at the blade roots was set
to zero, to simulate the wind induced torque that is applied there.
This way the displacements of the generator rotor can be computed.
The maximal displacement in tangential direction is 1.4 ⋅ 10−7 m ,
5.3 The Coupled Dynamics of the XD-115 Generator
159
in radial direction 6.8 ⋅ 10−5 m and 2.8 ⋅ 10−6 m in axial direction, at
the outer surface of the generator rotor. The maximal displacement
of any node is 7.9 ⋅ 10−5 m.
Frequency Sweep
To identify the magnitude of the amplitude and the system’s behaviour, the magnetic forces identified in (5.17) were applied to
the structural model. A frequency sweep was simulated for which
the harmonic magnetic forces were applied to the structure at frequency steps of 0.015 between 0.59 and 2.94. This way any resonance frequencies are identified by increased amplitudes.
For stability reasons, an isotropic loss factor of 1 % was added, so
that resonances do not lead to amplitudes that are too high. This
damping factor moves the resonance frequencies slightly compared
to the ones listed in Fig. 5.5
Amplitude [m]
10−5
u1
u3
u2
u4
2.6
2.8
10−6
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
Normalised Frequency [-]
Fig. 5.12 shows the amplitudes of four locations on the outer surface
of the rotor. Looking at the simulated deflection shapes, identifies
the peak at ω/ωref = 0.89 and ω/ωref = 0.74 as a tilting motion.
The shape of the peak at ω/ωref = 1.43 corresponds to the axial
mode at ω/ωref = 1.45. The shape of the peaks at ω/ωref = 2.71,
ω/ωref = 2.01 and at ω/ωref = 2.9 could not be identified and, thus,
could not be matched with any of the modes in Tab. 5.5.
Integrating the amplitudes of all simulated frequencies gives an indication of the magnitude of the total amplitude of the system.
2.94
utot = ∫ û(ω) dω
(5.18)
0.59
For the four plots in Fig. 5.12, this yields the total amplitude of
2.2
2.4
Figure 5.12
The amplitudes of four locations
on the outer surface of the rotor
during the frequency sweep
160
5 Application to the XD-115
utot,1 = 0.29 mm, utot,2 = 0.3 mm, utot,3 = 0.16 mm and utot,4 = 0.26
mm
Participation Factors
Analysing the participation factors of the modes is another way to
examine the response of the system to external periodic excitations.
Participation factors for magnetic systems were already introduced
in (4.13). For structural modes, they can be computed by
ηr =
ω2ext
− ω2r
1
⃗ r ⋅ ⃗fmag dΩ
∫ φ
+ 2ζ r ωext ωr
(5.19)
Ω
⃗ r denotes the mass normalised shape of rth mode, Ω its exwhere φ
citation frequency, ωr is the resonance frequency, ηr the participation factor, ζ r the damping coefficient and ⃗fmag the dynamic excitation force (5.17). The discrete form of (5.19) reads as
ηr =
ω2ext
φr ⋅ fmag
− ω2r + 2ζ r ωext ωr
(5.20)
where the magnetic force and the the structural mode are substituted by their discrete counterpart, φr and fmag , respectively
The participation factors, as described in (5.20), are computed for a
certain excitation frequency. In the XD-115, however, the excitation
frequencies cover such a large frequency range that it is difficult to
determine which excitation frequency to use for the computation
of (5.20). Fortunately, the force distribution stays the same for all
excitation frequencies. Using only the nominator of (5.20), it is
possible to make an analysis to what extend a certain mode can be
excited by the dynamic force distributions defined in (5.17), when
the excitation and resonance frequencies coincide. In this analysis,
the distance between the resonance and excitation frequency is not
accounted for.
Tab. 5.6 lists the participation factors for the mode shapes identified by the finite element method with respect to the magnetic force
distribution. The fifth column, headed by (max(φr )(φr ⋅fmag )), lists
the maximal amplitude of each mode under the computed excitation.
The participation factors reflect the frequency sweep computation
in Sec. 5.12. The largest participation sees the axial mode. The
other modes are less pronounced. Especially, the 1st mode is hardly
excited.
5.4 Experimental Validation
161
Experimental Validation
5.4
In Sec. 5.3, the dynamic behaviour of the XD-115 generator was
predicted. Although the techniques used were already validated in
Chapter 3, it is necessary to verify that the parameters chosen to
simulate the XD-115 generator are correct. This is done by in-situ
vibration measurements of the rotor structure.
In this section only the measurements used to validate the models
in Sec. 5.3 are presented. Further measurements were conducted
that are not used for this purpose. They are presented in Appendix
B.
The main problem during the measurements is a sufficient excitation of the structure. The rotor structure of the XD-115 weights
about 110 tons. That includes the hub, the blades and the generator
rotor. The generator rotor alone, the structure of interest for this research, weighs about 20 tons. It is necessary to excite this structure
to an extend that the accelerometers can pick up the vibration. To
accomplish that, the vibration amplitudes need to reach a certain
level. Ideally, only the structure of interest, i.e. the rotor stiffener,
is excited while the rest of the turbine does not vibrate. . However,
it is not possible to excite the rotor of the turbine without exciting
the rest of the structure too, making the identification of the resonance frequencies and modal damping parameters of only the rotor
structure difficult.
For ’normal’ vibration measurements either a shaker or an impact
hammer is used to excite the structure. Although, these two tools
come in all variations and sizes, they are difficult to employ in the
turbine due to the limited space available within the nacelle and the
accessibility of the rotor structure.
Besides a manual excitation, the structure can be excited by the
forces and movements that arise during the operation of the turbine. This technique is called operational modal analysis (OMA).
The structure of the rotating generator is excited by unbalanced
forces and the higher harmonics created by the magnetic field in
the air gap. By comparing the identified resonance frequencies in
Normalised
freq.
description
1.02
1st bending
φr ⋅ fmag
max(φr )(φr ⋅ fmag )
0.0644 − i 0.0636
6.3 ⋅ 10−7 − i 6.3 ⋅ 10−7 m
1 bending
0.0036 + i 0.0132
5.1 ⋅ 10−8 + i 1.9 ⋅ 10−7 m
axial
0.5987 + i 1.9053
1.7 ⋅ 10−6 + i 5.4 ⋅ 10−6 m
2.6
2 bending
0.1068 − i 0.1402
3.3 ⋅ 10−6 − i 4.3 ⋅ 10−6 m
2.6
2nd bending −0.1152 + i 0.0734 −6.5 ⋅ 10−6 + i 4.1 ⋅ 10−6 m
1.02
st
1.45
2.66
nd
torsional
−0.3649 + i 0.2304
−0.0013 + i
0.0008 m
Table 5.6
The participation factors for
various modes identified by the
finite element method.
162
5 Application to the XD-115
Sec. 5.3.2 and the excitation frequencies in Sec. 5.3.4, it becomes
apparent that the resonance frequencies of the structure are in the
same frequency range as the frequencies created by space harmonics and cogging torque in the generator. Other excitation frequencies, coming for instance from the rotation directly or from supply
harmonics, are either too high or too low to be of importance for
the XD-115.
In this section, the measurement set-up is presented first. Afterwards, the results of the various excitation methods are presented.
Finally in Sec. 5.4.5, the measurements results are compared with
each other and to the simulation results.
The Experimental Set-Up
5.4.1
The left side of Fig. 5.13 shows the set-up of the measurement during rotation.
RPM-Sensor
DAQ
Accelerometer
Current Probe
Personal
Computer
wireless
connection
Hammer
DAQ
Accelerometers
on rotor
Figure 5.13
Measurement Set Up for the
XD-115. The grey box indicates
equipment that is located on the
rotor
Measuring during Rotation
Measuring on the rotor and stator simultaneously during rotation
requires two data acquisition systems (DAQs) that are synchronised. One is installed in the rotor, depicted on the right side of Fig.
5.13, the other one is connected to the sensors in the rest of the nacelle. A hammer is used for synchronising the two systems. Its signal is split and fed to both systems. Before the start of the turbine, it
is disconnected from the rotor DAQ. After the measurements are
completed, a cross correlation analyse between the two hammer
channels at either DAQ will yield the time difference between the
two signals. This method has one significant disadvantage. Any
delay introduced in either of the DAQs during the measurement
cannot be identified. Thus, at the beginning of the measurements
5.4 Experimental Validation
163
the stator and rotor measurements are synchronised, but the longer
a measurement is the more likely the two DAQs desynchronise.
The measurement set-up in Fig. 5.13 shows various sensors on the
stator. After investigating the rotor and stator acceleration data, no
correlation between the stator and rotor side for the structural vibrations could be identified. The measurement data of the stator
data was thus neglected for the modal analysis and only the RPMsensor is used on the stator side. However, this sensor is crucial
because all order tracking methods require accurate values of the
instantaneous rotation speed at all times of the measurements. Further measurements using the other sensors were conducted but did
not lead to any research results. These measurements concerned
the monitoring of the bearing using the current of the generator.
The measurements are presented in the Appendix B.
Measuring at Stand Still
For measurements at stand still, the rpm sensor is not necessary.
Therefore, the stator side can be neglected completely and only the
DAQ and the sensors on the rotor are used. The sensor placement is
the same as for the measurement during rotation. For the impact
measurements, the excitation points are indicated in blue on the
right hand side in Fig. 5.14.
Sensor Positions
In total, 11 channels were used for acceleration measurements on
the rotor. Fig. 5.14 shows the positions of the accelerometers in the
rotor of the XD-115. The position of the sensors were chosen in such
a way that bending modes can be distinguished from tilting modes.
There are not enough sensors to distinguish the second from the
first bending mode and only one channel measures accelerations in
tangential direction. Channels 1 and 3 as well as channels 4 and 6
are purposely located at different distances from the rotation centre
of the rotor. This allows to distinguish bending modes from rigid
motion of the rotor. On position C, this is not necessary as there
is an additional measurement channel in z-direction. In this case,
one of the channels 11 and 10 is, indeed, redundant.
Measurement Techniques
To perform the modal analysis, four different methods of excitation were used: hammer impact, operational forces, wind forces
during idling and yawing forces. Various analyse algorithms were
5.4.2
164
5 Application to the XD-115
Pos A
Ch 2
Pos 2
Pos B
Ch 3
Pos 3
y
Pos A
z
Pos B
x
Ch 5
Pos 5
Pos C
Ch 9
Ch 6
Pos 6
Ch 1
Pos 1
Ch 7 Pos 7
Ch 8
Ch 4
Pos 4
Ch 11
Pos 8
Ch 10
Pos 6
Pos C
Figure 5.14
Accelerometer positions in rotor
stiffener. Sensors directions
indicated in red. Impact directions
indicated in blue.
used for the operational measurements which are listed here as separate methods. This subsection lists the various measurement techniques and analysis methods employed. Tab. 5.7 lists all the various
excitation methods and its characteristics.
The measurement methods can be classified in methods for which
the excitation force is measured and methods for which only accelerations are measured. In this thesis, the impact measurement
is the only method for which the excitation is measured. All other
methods are output-only measurement techniques.
For output-only measurements techniques, the vibrations of the
turbine, induced by wind or by the operation of the turbine, are
used to conduct a modal analysis. Because the excitation forces are
not measured, some assumptions about the forces occurring in the
system are made. This makes these techniques convenient to use
for large structures, as for these excitation proves difficult. However, the assumptions made over the excitation forces are often not
accurate and can, thus, lead to questionable results of the modal
parameter identification, if the violation of the assumptions is too
extensive.
Impact Measurements
The excitation during hammer testing is accomplished by applying
an impulse force to the structure with a hammer, measuring the
hammer force simultaneously. Ideally, a Dirac impulse is created
that way, of which the Fourier transform is a constant line, exciting
thus all frequencies. Practically, the quality of the Dirac impulse
depends on the elasticity of the hammer tip, the elasticity of the
structure that is tested and the skill of the test engineer. These influences limit the excitation to the lower frequencies.
5.4 Experimental Validation
Excitation technique
165
Advantages
Disadvantages
Hammer Testing
• No excitation harmonics
• Hardly enough energy input to excite
whole structure
• Pole necessary because impact point
not accessible
Yawing testing
(Free decay)
• Huge amount of energy brought into
the system
• Only lower frequencies excited
• Short system response, making damping estimate difficult
Operational Modal
Analysis (OMA)
• No excitation necessary
• Assumption not satisfied
• Long measurements necessary
• Excitation harmonics deteriorate system identification quality
Vold-kalman filtered
Operational Modal
Analysis
• Assumption not satisfied
• Better identification of modes than normal OMA
• No manual excitation necessary
• Data preparation necessary
• Might filter system response from data
• Long measurements necessary
Order based modal
analysis (OBMA)
• Uses harmonics for system identification
• No excitation necessary
• Questionable if assumption are satisfied
For the impact hammer tests, the rotor does not rotate. This has the
advantage, that any harmonics produced by the rotation will not
be present in the measured data, and therefore will also not disturb
the modal parameter estimation. On the other side, the drawback
of this methods is that any effects the rotation has on the system
dynamics, such as varying bearing stiffness or gyroscopic forces,
are not measured.
Because there is only limited space around the rotor structure, a
hammer excitation was difficult. Using a pole of approximately 2
meters length made it possible to excite the structure in radial direction. This way, the hammering action could be relocated to an
easily accessible location, because the hammer did not have to hit
the rotor structure directly. The excitation location and direction
was chosen to be next to the measurement point of channel 5 and
8 in radial direction (see Fig. 5.14).
The time it takes the impulse to travel through the pole was estimated to be about 3.7697⋅10−4 seconds. That is about 7.5 % of a period
at 200 Hz. The phase delay for a resonance frequency is usually 90○ .
Due to the delay introduced by the pole a resonance frequency will
be found at a different phase lag. 7 % of 360○ is about 25○ . This will
introduce inaccuracies for the modal parameter identification.
Table 5.7
Advantages and drawbacks of all
excitation techniques used
166
5 Application to the XD-115
Although using the pole made hammer measurements possible, the
method shows significant disadvantages. Using the pole led to unavoidable double impacts. Furthermore, the impact force is measured at the upper end of the pole, including the pole into the system that is measured. These two effects lead to a deterioration of
the measurement quality, but could not be avoided when using a
hammer as excitation.
The parameter identification was performed using the SDTools software package [6]. The algorithms employed are based on [4, 5].
Operational Modal Analysis during Idling
This technique conducts an operational modal analysis on the turbine while it is idling. The excitation for the structure is provided
by the wind that passes the turbine. The turbulence of the wind
creates a dynamic force that is characterised by a good approximation to white noise. For the parameter identification the Canonical
Variant Analysis (CVA) method was used. This is an operational
modal analysis method based on a state space representation of the
system (See [109] for further explanation). Additionally, the Enhanced Frequency Domain Decomposition (EFFD) method was
applied.
The EFDD technique is based on the Frequency Domain Decomposition (FDD) technique. The FDD technique applies a singular value decomposition to the power spectral density matrix for
each measured frequency. This decomposes the spectral matrix
into a set of spectral density functions of which each corresponds
to a single degree of freedom (SDOF) system. The singular values
represent the auto power spectral density of that particular SDOF
system at a certain frequency. The number of singular values that
are significantly higher than the rest of the SV corresponds to the
number of SDOF systems that are contributing to the global system
response at that particular frequency.
The modal parameters are identified by calculating the power spectral density function for the SDOF system around peaks of the first
singular value in the singular value plot. Whether the calculated
power spectral density still belongs to the same SDOF system that
was identified at the peak is determine by comparing the singular
vector at the peak with the singular vector of the current frequency.
As long as they are the same, it is assumed that the same SDOF system is still dominant at this frequency. From the auto power spectral density function calculated around a peak, the damping and
natural frequency can be estimated.
The EFDD method determines the modal parameters differently. I
5.4 Experimental Validation
167
uses the power spectral density function identified around a peak to
calculate the time response of the SDOF system. The modal parameters are identified in the time domain by counting the zero crossings per time unit and the logarithmic decrement of the response.
In the propriety software used in this thesis, the kurtosis is calculated to distinguish harmonic excitation from natural frequencies.
(For further reading about the EFDD and FDD methods, refer to
[20, 71].)
The SSI-CVA algorithm transforms the system to the state-space
representation. Afterwards, a singular value decomposition is applied to the weighted output values of the system (See [109] for further explanation).
According to [122], operational modal analysis makes the following assumptions about the system and the excitation forces that is
measured:
• The system is time invariant.
• The structure is excited by uncorrelated white noise.
• The structure is reciprocal, i.e. the transfer function (TF)
measure from point A to point B is the same as from point B
to point A.
The quality of the modal parameter identification depends to what
extent the assumptions above are satisfied. At idling of a turbine
these assumptions are almost all satisfied. Only the excitation force
deviates from the assumptions as wind induced forces are not perfect white noise.
Operational Modal Analysis during Rotation
As discussed in Sec. 5.3.4, the interaction between the permanent
magnets and the stator slots create harmonic magnetic forces during the rotation of the turbine. These forces are also created when
no torque is generated, because the field originating from the permanent magnets cannot be switched off. Although the magnetic
V
Application to the XD-115
As mentioned, a single singular value that is significantly larger
than the rest indicates that only one SDOF system dominates the
global response. Two singular values that show a significant larger
value than the rest indicate that the oscillation at that particular
frequency can be represented by two single degree of freedom systems. This means that two modes are contributing to the global
response of the system at that frequency. The case that all singular values at a certain frequency are significantly larger than zeros,
indicates a forced vibration at that frequency.
168
5 Application to the XD-115
500
Time [s]
400
300
200
100
0
V
Application to the XD-115
Figure 5.15
Spectrogram of a vibration
measurement during rotation
without power production.
0
1
0.5
0
1
1.5
2
2.5
normalised Frequency [-]
4
2
3
Log(Acceleration [ sm2 ])
3
5
3.5
6
forces cannot be measured, it is possible to apply output only analysis techniques on the vibrations induced by the magnetic forces.
Fig. 5.15 shows the spectrogram of a vibration measurement during rotation of the turbine without power production. In the first
150 seconds, the turbine starts up. After that, the turbine operates
for several seconds at almost constant speed, before it shuts down
at the end of the measurement. The lines that vary with the rotation speed are the increased vibration amplitudes caused by the
harmonic excitation forces.
A colouring of the noise content of the excitation forces poses some
challenges for the output only modal analysis. Extensive research
has been done to overcome this issue. [103] gives a good overview
about available techniques and under what circumstances they improve the results of an OMA.
In this thesis, three different approaches are followed to deal with
the harmonic content of the excitation forces. The first technique
ignores the problem all together and employs standard frequency
domain and stochastic subspace techniques to identify the modal
parameters. The second technique attempts to diminish the effects
that the harmonic excitation forces have on the structure by filtering them from the signal. The third approach of techniques uses
these harmonic excitation forces to identify the system.
5.4 Experimental Validation
Generic Operational Modal Analysis
The generic operational modal analysis conducts an operational
modal analysis without employing any methods to alleviate the effects that the force harmonics have on the parameter identification.
The same techniques are employed as for the operational modal
analysis during idling.
This technique makes the same assumptions as the idling OMA, but
because of the rotation of the turbine, the first two assumptions are
violated. The gyroscopic forces, which are introduced by the rotation, depend on the rotation speed and the distance to the rotation
axis. During the duration of a measurement, the rotation speed
is never perfectly constant. Therefore, the gyroscopic forces introduce a stiffness that varies with time as the rotation speed varies
with time. Additionally, the bearing stiffness depends on the position of the bearing elements and thus on the rotor position. The
second assumption is violated by the magnetic forces in the system
that introduce a harmonic content into the excitation forces in the
generator.
It is assumed, that the first of the violated assumptions has a minor
influence on the measurements because of the low rotation speed of
the rotor. The assumption that the system is time invariant is thus
reasonably satisfied. The second violation poses a larger challenge
than the first one, as the encountered harmonic excitation is quite
strong and coincide with resonance frequencies that are subject to
the parameter identification.
Vold-Kalman Filtered Operational Modal Analysis
In a second approach, a Vold-Kalman filter was used to filter the
harmonics from the measurement signal [91]. The Vold-Kalman
filter is a particular formulation of the Kalman filter that can be
used to extract a certain frequency, which can change over time,
from a signal. The extraction of the harmonics is possible because
the frequencies of the harmonic forces are known from the analysis
done in Sec. 5.3.4.
Removing the harmonic frequencies from the measurement signal
helps to distinguish the excitation frequencies from the resonance
frequencies. In the case that a resonance frequency is close to an
excitation frequency, the resonance frequency is also filtered from
the signal. This is an issue, when the whole measurement is done
at a fixed rotating frequency, because in that case a resonance frequency that is too close to an excitation frequency is filtered completely from the measurement. When measuring at changing rotation speeds, the resonance frequency is only filtered from the signal
when the excitation frequency and the resonance frequency coincide. After filtering, the same parameter identification techniques
169
170
5 Application to the XD-115
that were used for the first method are applied to conduct the modal
parameter identification.
Order Based Modal Analysis
The Order-Based Modal Analysis (OBMA) method (details can be
found in [33]) assumes a constant sinusoidal excitation at a changing frequency that depends on the rotation speed. It deviates from
the assumption of the perfect white noise excitation that the previously introduced OMA methods use. During a start-up or rundown of the turbine, the excitation sweeps over a certain frequency
range of which the maximal frequency depends on the maximal
rotation speed and the relation between excitation frequency and
rotation speed.
The assumption of a constant excitation amplitude is not necessarily satisfied in variable speed wind turbines. The excitation forces
are created by the same effect as the total torque in the generator.
They both depend on the magnetic flux density in the air gap. The
torque is set by the controller of the turbine which determines the
rotation speed of the rotor. In normal operation, the rotor speed
is supposed to be constant. To accomplish that, the controller sets
the torque in the generator according to the wind speed to keep the
wind torque and generator torque balanced. During a run up, no
power is produced in the turbine. In that case, the generator torque
does not match the wind torque, as the intention is to speed up the
turbine.
To extract the modal parameters, a particular order is chosen that
excites the resonance frequencies in the frequency range of interest.
This order is extracted from the signal using a Vold-Kalman order
tracking algorithm [91]. The modal parameters can be identified
using the same method as for shaker measurements that apply a sinusoidal sweep [4, 5]. The frequency response functions of the accelerometers can be taken as the transfer functions from the shaker
to the sensor, assuming that the force amplitude is equal to one over
all excited frequencies.
For the extraction of the phase information the RPM signal was
used as reference (for other possibilities see [33]). Assuming that
the excitation force is a sinusoidal force with a magnitude of one,
the transfer function is the same as the measured frequency response function (FRF). These TFs can be used in any single input
multiple output modal parameter estimation algorithm. Because
the magnitude of the force is not know, the scaling of the modes is
not possible. Assuming that the excitation force amplitude is the
same for every frequency, the parameters of interest, i.e. the mode
shapes, frequencies and damping, can be extracted.
5.4 Experimental Validation
171
Yawing Test
This method is based on the force that acts on the rotor structure,
when the yawing motion is stopped suddenly. During yawing, the
nacelle is moved around the centre axis of the tower. Because the
generator’s centre of gravity is not aligned with this axis, it experiences a translational movement. When this movement stops, inertia forces are generated acting on the rotor. The time distribution
of this force resembles an impulse force used for the impact hammer tests. Measuring the response to this force makes it possible to
identify the modal parameters of the system.
The excitation by yawing forces shows some properties that cannot be found for the other excitation methods. This technique is
especially suited to excite lower structural modes, because the excitation is weak in the higher frequency range. This method can
introduce a lot of energy into the system which is necessary to excite large, heavy structures. The applied inertia forces excite the
structure everywhere instead of locally as it is done for the impact
measurements.
The forces used to excite the structure in this method cannot be
measured, necessitating an output-only parameter identification
technique. For the identification of the modal parameters, the Least
Square Complex Exponential method (LSCE) (see for instance [94]
for an description) was applied to the part of the measurement that
was recorded directly after the yawing stopped. In this time frame
the vibration show a free decay.
Measurement Results
In this subsection, the results of the various measurement techniques will be discussed in detail.
Impact Measurement
In the measurement data of the impact measurement, five peaks
could be identified in the frequency range of interest. The results
can be seen in Fig. 5.16. Most peaks were fitted double, because
theoretically every mode should have a symmetric counter part at
the same frequency. This was not done for the peak at ω/ωref =
1.62, because this peak is in the range where the axial mode was
expected. The figure shows that the modal fit for the collocated
measurement points is rather good over the whole frequency range
of interest. This is not the case for the non-collocated points as
5.4.3
172
5 Application to the XD-115
10−2
10−5
Transfer function 7y - 7-y
Synthesised Transfer function 7y - 7-y
10−8
0
0.5
|Acceleration|
|Acceleration|
10−2
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
Normalised Frequency [-]
1
10−5
Transfer Function 4z - 7-y
Synthesised Transfer Function 4z - 7-y
0
0.5
Coherence
|Acceleration|
Transfer Function 5x - 5-x
Synthesised Transfer Function 5x - 5-x
10−8
1
1.5
2
2.5
Normalised Frequency [-]
10−2
10−8
10−5
ω/ωref = 0.41
ω/ωref = 0.58
ω/ωref = 1
ω/ωref = 0.47
ω/ωref = 0.63
ω/ωref = 1
Coherence from 5x to 5-x
Coherence from 7y to 7-y
Coherence from 4z to 7-y
0.9
0.85
1
1.5
2
2.5
Normalised Frequency [-]
Figure 5.16
Transfer functions (TF) of the
collocated hammering positions
(top), Transfer function from 4z to
7-y (middle left) and the
coherence for the three different
transfer functions (middle right).
The bottom part of the figure
shows the mode shapes identified
by the impact measurements. The
colour indicates the magnitude of
the displacement
0.95
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
Normalised Frequency [-]
ω/ωref = 1.62
3
ω/ωref = 2.76
ω/ωref = 2.77
shown in the middle left plot in Fig. 5.16. This is especially true for
the frequency range that shows a low coherence.
The modes shown in Fig. 5.16 were expanded using linear interpolation. No data was available at the top of the modes, as there were
no sensors located at that position. It was consequently left blank,
though the behaviour of the modes there can be estimated from the
rest of the mode.
The two peaks at ω/ωref = 1 and ω/ωref = 2.76 are especially pronounced in the impact measurements. These two resonance frequencies can be fit in any of the transfer functions. Fig. 5.16 indic-
5.4 Experimental Validation
173
2
1
1.
2.7662
2.77
2.7
7
6
2.7
1.6
0.4
1
0.4
7
0.5
8
0.6
3
1
1
0
normalised frequencies
of measured modes
0
0.2
0.
0. 41
0.5847
0.
1 63
0.4
0.6
MAC vaue
normalised frequencies
of measured modes
0.8
1
ates that the mode at ω/ωref = 1 is the first bending mode. The
modes at the frequencies ω/ωref = 0.41 and ω/ωref = 0.6 seem
to be rigid tilting modes around the bearing. They are clearly not
as strongly excited as the bending modes. The mode type for the
modes at ω/ωref = 1.62 and ω/ωref = 2.76 is not as easily identifiable. The FE model indicates that the second bending mode should
be at ω/ωref = 2.6. So the mode at ω/ωref = 2.76 might in fact be
the second bending mode.
The bottom part of Fig. 5.16 shows two modes for each peak in
the TF. For all frequencies but ω/ωref = 1 and ω/ωref = 1.62, two
symmetric modes could be identified. For the modes ω/ωref = 1,
this is not possible, because both excitation points were located at
fixed points of the associated symmetric mode. This way the same
mode was fitted twice which leads to the same mode shape for the
two identified modes of ω/ωref = 1, as can be seen in Fig. 5.16 .
Fig. 5.17 shows the Auto-MAC plot of the impact measurements.
High off-diagonal values indicate that too few sensors were used
to distinguish a mode from the modes on the diagonal. Fig. 5.17
indicates that the tilting modes at ω/ωref = 0.41, ω/ωref = 0.47,
ω/ωref = 0.58 and ω/ωref = 0.63 are not distinguishable from the
second bending modes at ω/ωref = 2.76 and ω/ωref = 2.77. All of
these modes show mainly a displacement in axial direction (see Fig.
5.1). They differ by the number of locations where the maximum
displacement is reached. When too few accelerometers are used
this number cannot be determined accurately and the modes seem
to be the same.
Figure 5.17
The auto mac plot of the impact
measurements.
174
5 Application to the XD-115
Operational Modal Analysis during Idling
Fig. 5.18 shows the spectrogram and the singular values (SV) for an
OMA conducted during idling of the turbine.
Time [s]
20
10
0
0
0.2
Singular Value
−11
0.6
0.8
1
−9
−8
−7
0.4
−10
1.4
1.2
1.6
1.8
Normalised Frequency [-]
−5
−4
−6
Log(Acceleration [ sm2 ])
2
2.2
−3
−2
2.4
−1
SVD 1
10−5
2.6
2.8
0
SVD 2
3
1
SVD 3
10−10
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
Figure 5.18
The spectrogram and the singular
value plot of the no-rotation
operational modal analysis
0.8
1
1.4
1.2
1.6
1.8
Normalised Frequency [-]
2
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3
Comparing the measurements in Fig. 5.18 and Fig. 5.19 reveals that
the noise level in the non-rotating measurement is, as expected,
much lower than the noise level in the rotating turbine. The few
peaks visible in Fig. 5.18 have a much lower maximum value than
the peaks in the measurement during operation in Fig. 5.19 and Fig.
5.20. The SV plot indicates that there might be modes at ω/ωref =
0.55, ω/ωref = 0.64, ω/ωref = 0.72, at ω/ωref = 1.27, ω/ωref = 1.91
and at ω/ωref = 2.56.
The mode shape of all these frequency cannot be identified as bending or torsional modes. In fact, all of them do not look ’physical’.
Consequently, it is assumed that the peaks in the SV plot in Fig.
5.18 are not modes of the rotor structure under consideration.
Operational Modal Analysis during Rotation
The plot in Fig. 5.19 shows the spectrogram of the generic operational modal analysis. The OMA was applied to the part of the
measurement that shows an almost constant speed (starting after
5.4 Experimental Validation
175
90 seconds of the measurement). The singular value plot in Fig.
5.19 indicates that there might be modes at ω/ωref = 0.1, ω/ωref =
0.17, ω/ωref = 0.27, ω/ωref = 1 and ω/ωref = 1.34. The other
peaks at ω/ωref = 0.52, ω/ωref = 0.7, ω/ωref = 0.84, ω/ωref = 1.05,
ω/ωref = 1.18, ω/ωref = 1.41 , ω/ωref = 1.69 and ω/ωref = 2.53
are generated by harmonics, as can be deduce from the excitation
analysis in Sec. 5.3.4.
As explained in Sec. 5.4.2, a peak in the SV plot corresponds to a
SDOF system that is dominant at that peak. When for a certain
frequency two SVs are significantly higher than the rest of the SVs,
it indicates that two SDOF systems are contributing to the vibrational behaviour of the system at that frequency. When all SVs
show a peak at a certain frequency, then the same amount of number of SDOF contribute at that frequency. It is, however, unlikely
that three or more modes have the same frequency, so that the increased SVs in this case do not indicate the contribution of a mode
but instead a harmonic excitation. The peak at ω/ωref = 2.78 is
peculiar, as at that peak, three singular values increase, although
there is no harmonic present at that frequency.
At the bottom of Fig. 5.19, the stability plot of the SSI-CVA method
is shown. This plot is produced by using the settings as shown in
Tab. 5.8 for the CVA-SSI algorithm. These indicators have to be fulfilled to declare a mode stable, when comparing the mode with the
same mode of the model one model order lower. Most harmonics
(indicated by a blue vertical line) are identified as stable modes. Besides the wrongly as modes identified harmonic excitations, there
are two stable modes at ω/ωref = 1 and ω/ωref = 2.78.
Parameter Name
Parameter Values CVA
Maximum Deviation of parameters
Frequency [Hz]
Damping [%]
Mode Shape MAC
0.05
2
0.01
Expected Range of Damping
Min [%]
Max [%]
0.05
2
Vold-Kalman Filtered Operational Modal Analysis
The top of Fig. 5.20 shows the spectrogram and the bottom the
singular value decomposition plot of the Vold-Kalman filtered operational modal analysis. The harmonic frequency, clearly visible
in Fig. 5.19, have now disappeared from the spectrogram in Fig.
5.20. Plotting the singular values over the frequencies shows a gap
Table 5.8
Modal indicators for the SSI-CVA
algorithm
176
5 Application to the XD-115
400
Time [s]
300
300
200
200
100
100
0
0
0.2
−4.5
0.4
−4
0.6
0.8
−3.5
−3
1
−2.5
Singular Value
100
1.4
1.2
1.6
1.8
Normalised Frequency [-]
−1.5
−1
−2
Log(Acceleration [ sm2 ])
2
2.2
−0.5
SVD 1
2.4
0
SVD 2
2.6
2.8
1
0.5
SVD 3
3
1.5
SVD 4
10−5
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.4
1.2
1.6
1.8
Normalised Frequency [-]
2
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3
Dimension
200
150
100
50
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.4
1.2
1.6
1.8
Normalised Frequency [-]
2
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3
Figure 5.19 Spectrogram (top), SVD plot (middle) and stability plot of the SSI-CVA algorithm (bottom) of the operational
measurement. The blue regions in the bottom plot indicate harmonic excitation frequencies, identified in Sec. 5.3.3
5.4 Experimental Validation
177
400
Time [s]
300
300
200
200
100
100
0
0
1
0.5
−4.5
−4
−3.5
1.5
2
Normalised Frequency [-]
−3
Singular Value
100
−2.5
−1.5
−1
−2
Log(Acceleration [ sm2 ])
SVD 1
2.5
−0.5
SVD 2
3
0
3.5
0.5
SVD 3
1
1.5
SVD 4
10−5
10−10
0
1
0.5
1.5
2
Normalised Frequency [-]
2.5
3
3.5
Dimension
200
150
100
50
0
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
Normalised Frequency [-]
2.5
3
Figure 5.20 Spectrogram (top), SVD plot (middle) and stability plot of the SSI-CVA algorithm (bottom) of the
Vold-Kalman filtered measurement
3.5
178
5 Application to the XD-115
at each location where a harmonic excitation was present in the SV
plot in Fig. 5.19.
Applying the Vold-Kalman filter, enables the SSI-CVA algorithm to
identify more stable resonance frequencies. This is shown in Fig.
5.20 at the bottom. Additional frequencies that could be identified this way include ω/ωref = 1.34, ω/ωref = 1.89, ω/ωref = 2.10,
ω/ωref = 2.26 and ω/ωref = 2.6. The identified modes and damping
values for this method are listed in Tab. 5.9.
ω/ωref = 0.27
ω/ωref = 0.35
ω/ωref = 0.65
ω/ωref = 0.74
ω/ωref = 1
ω/ωref = 1.34
ω/ωref = 1.89
ω/ωref = 2.10
ω/ωref = 2.45
ω/ωref = 2.76
Figure 5.21
A selection of modes identified by
the operational modal analysis
Fig. 5.21 shows the modes that were identified by applying the OMA
to the Vold-Kalman filtered measurements. The mode at ω/ωref =
0.2
0.3 7
0.6 5
0.6 5
0.7 5
1.0 4
1.3 0
1.8 4
2.1 9
2.2 0
2.4 6
2.4 5
2.7 6
6
0
Figure 5.22
The Auto-MAC plot of the
Vold-Kalman filtered measured
modes
normalised frequencies
of measured modes
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
MAC vaue
0
0 .27
0 .35
0.65.65
0
1 .74
1 .00
1.89.34
2
2 .10
2.45.26
2
2.76.46
normalised frequencies
of measured modes
0.8
1
5.4 Experimental Validation
179
1 can be identified as the first bending mode, where as the mode
at ω/ωref = 1.33 seems to be the axial mode identified by the FE
model. Although, hardly visible in the SV plot in Fig. 5.20, the
two small peaks at ω/ωref = 0.65 match the mode shapes identified
by the impact measurement method at ω/ωref = 0.65. The mode
shapes of both measurements show a tilting mode at that frequency.
The peaks are so small, that the SSI-CVA method does not identify
them as modes.
Fig. 5.22 shows the Auto-MAC of the modes identified by applying
the OMA to the Vold-Kalman filtered measurements. Significant
off-diagonal entries exist only for the modes at ω/ωref = 0.27 and
ω/ωref = 0.35 and for ω/ωref = 0.65 and ω/ωref = 2.76. The lower
off-diagonal entries indicate that the modes measured by the VoldKalman OMA are better distinguishable than the modes measured
by the impact measurements. The sensor position is still the same
as for the impact measurements, thus the identified mode shapes
must have changed.
Order-Based Modal Analysis
The top of Fig. 5.23 shows the vibration measurement of channel
8, as indicated in Fig. 5.14, during the run up of the XD-115. The
diagonal lines represent an excitation which depends linearly on
the rotation speed. During a start up of the turbine such an excitation harmonic excites various frequencies. When the excitation frequency coincides with a resonance frequency the measured
amplitude of the vibration increases.
th
The bottom part of Fig. 5.23 shows the extracted 2nth
slots and 5nslots
orders. The modal parameters of the peak at ω/ωref = 1 were identified by a local fit around that peak. This way the damping value
of that resonance frequency could be identified. It is listed in Tab.
5.9.
Yawing Test
Fig. 5.24 shows the stability plot of the LSCE method on the left
and the spectrogram of the measurement on the right. In the spectrogram, the noise generated by the yawing motion and engines
is clearly visible. After the movement stops at around 21 seconds,
some frequencies seem to be damp out slower than others. Assuming that the lower damping at those frequencies originates from the
fact that there is a resonance at those frequencies, a modal parameter identification can be conducted on the time frame directly
after the movement stops.
5.4.4
180
5 Application to the XD-115
5nslots
4
Normalised Frequency
3.5
3
3nslots
2.5
2
2nslots
1.5
npoles
16
2
npoles
12
2
nslots
1
npoles
6
2
0.5
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
RPM
−4
−3.8
−3.6
−3.4
−3.2
−3
−2.8
Log(Acceleration [ sm2 ])
−2.6
10−3
10−5
0
1
0.5
Normalised Frequency [-]
1.5
−2.2
−2
Meas. FRF at 5nslots the rotation speed
|Acceleration|
|Acceleration|
Meas. FRF at 2nslots the rotation speed
Synth. FRF at 2nslots the rotation speed
−2.4
10−2
10−3
0
1
2
3
Normalised Frequency [-]
Figure 5.23 Spectrogram of the run up, normalised with the rotation speed (top). Orderplot of the harmonic at 2nslots
times the rotation speed and its modal fit (bottom left). The harmonic at 5nslots the rotation speed (bottom right). Both
plots are done for the 8th channel, indicated in Fig. 5.14
5.4 Experimental Validation
181
30
40
28
150
30
Time [s]
Number of modes
200
100
50
0
26
20
24
10
0
0.15 0.29 0.44 0.59 0.74 0.88
Normalised Frequency [-]
min damping
max damping
22
1
0.5
Normalised Frequency [-]
0
−10
−8
normalised damping
The LSCE method was applied to a time interval from 22 to 25
seconds of the measurement shown in Fig. 5.24. The stability plot
on the left side of Fig. 5.24 shows that the lower frequencies, which
were mainly excited by this method are relatively unstable. Even
the modal parameters of the mode at ω/ωref = 1, which is easily
identifiable in the other methods, could not be extracted. Only
some modes around ω/ωref = 0.05 are stable. Those are probably
modes of other turbine parts, such as tower or blades modes, which
also get excited during the sudden stop of the rotating motion of the
nacelle. The frequencies of those modes are too low to interact with
the resonances of the generator structure. Consequently, they are
not of interest in the scope of this thesis.
Discussion
The difficulties encountered when exciting the structure, resulted
in measurements of which the results are less certain than hoped
for. This section discusses the quality of the measurements.
By comparing the results of the various identification methods, it
becomes apparent that the strong harmonic excitation in the frequency range of interest poses a large problem for the operational
modal analysis methods. Filtering them out before applying the
parameter identification method yields better results. Other methods, such as a cepstrum analysis (see [103]) or [19], probably improve the parameter identification. Only the excitation methods
that are directly present in the generator seem to excite the modes
of the generator structure. Other excitation techniques such as
yawing excitation failed to excite the modes of interest.
The yawing method was omitted from the following two subsections as no modes of interest could be identified with this method.
−4
−6
−2
Log(Acceleration [ sm2 ])
1.5
0
2
Figure 5.24
Stability plot of the LSCE method
(left) and spectrogram of the
measurement (right)
5.4.5
182
5 Application to the XD-115
Normalised Frequencies ω/ωref
0.27 1
Method
Damping values [%]
OBMA
Constant Speed Measurement EFFD
Constant Speed Measurement SSI-CVA
Vold-Kalman Filtered OMA EFFD
Vold-Kalman Filtered OMA SSI-CVA
Impact Hammer
Table 5.9
Overview over identified damping
values by the Operational Modal
Analysis (OMA), the impact
measurements and the
Order-Based Modal Analysis
(OBMA) for various resonance
frequencies
1.34 1.88 2.09 2.25 2.44 2.78
1.173
1.35
-
0.0734
0.346
1.23
0.387
1.11
0.35
1.827
1.762
0.941
-
0.49
0.891
-
0.796
1.334
-
0.772
1.274
-
0.3
0.118
-
0
0.073
0.081
0.246
0.12
Comparison Among Measured Methods
Tab. 5.9 presents the identified damping values of several resonance
frequencies and for various methods employed. For resonance frequencies that were not identified by a certain method a dash was
used.
Only the damping value of the resonance frequency at ω/ωref = 1
is consistent over 3 modal parameter identification methods. All
other damping values do not show any consistency or trend. The
modal damping is difficult to extract for operational modal analysis
methods, so that it is not surprising that the identified values are not
consistent [110].
The low damping values for the second bending mode at ω/ωref =
2.78 are curious. A low damping value in operational modal analysis is usually associated with harmonic excitations that are mistaken as resonance frequencies. Taking into account the odd fact
that more than two singular values show a peak around ω/ωref =
2.78, it cannot be ruled out that the peak at ω/ωref = 2.78 is actually a forced response to a harmonic force. On the other hand, this
mode was identified in the impact measurements too, which rules
out a harmonic excitation from rotation. This could indicate that
the measured excitation is caused by a device in the turbine that
excites the structure even when the turbine stands still. However,
the spectrogram at stand still in Fig. 5.18 does not show a vibration
at ω/ωref = 2.78. Therefore, further research is necessary, to undoubtedly identify the effect that causes the peak at ω/ωref = 2.78.
In Tab. 5.9, it is possible to identify the trend, that the damping of
the two modes at ω/ωref = 1 and ω/ωref = 2.78, that were identified
by almost all methods, are lower than the other measured mode.
Comparison with Simulation
Comparing the measured with the simulated modes reveals that
not all modes predicted by the finite element method in Sec. 5.3
5.4 Experimental Validation
183
could be identified by the measurement. In fact, most techniques
could only identify the two modes at ω/ωref = 1 and ω/ωref = 2.78.
The absence of the modes missing in the measurements can be explained by taking a closer look at the measurement results and excitation techniques.
2
1
1.6
2.76 2
2.77
6
2.6
normalised frequency of
FEM modes
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
MAC vaue
normalised frequency of
measured modes
0.8
1
Fig. 5.25 depicts the MAC plot that compares the mode shapes
which were computed by the finite element model to the shapes
measured by the impact hammer test. The only mode for which the
agreement between the measured and the simulated modes is relatively good are the first bending modes (modes around ω/ωref = 1).
This mode is also the most excited mode during the measurement.
Most likely, the reason for the unsatisfying identification of some
modes by the impact measurements is their weak excitation. In the
case of the impact measurements, this is easily explained. Only the
bending modes show a significant displacement in the excitation
direction. i.e. in radial direction. Because, the excitation force was
applied in radial direction, these modes were excited while the axial
mode and torsional modes are hardly affected.
The high off-diagonal values in Fig. 5.25 an be explained by the low
number of accelerometers used for the measurement. The AutoMAC in Fig. 5.17 suggests that the 2nd bending mode and the tilting modes are not distinguishable. The location of the sensors was
chosen in such a way that it was possible to distinguish the first
bending mode from the second bending modes and from the tilting modes. It is, however, not possible to distinguish the second
bending mode from tilting modes, leading to a linear dependency
of the measured modes of these two mode types. That can be seen
by the increased values for certain MAC entries.
Figure 5.25
MAC plot, comparing modes
recorded by the impact
measurement with calculated
modes.
V
Application to the XD-115
2.6
2.6
5
1.4
1.0
0.8
1
0.8
2
1.0
2
0
0.4
0.47 1
0.5
0.63 8
1
184
5 Application to the XD-115
Figure 5.26
Mac plot to compare the
operational mode shapes,
measured by the vold-kalman
filtered measurement and the
simulated mode shapes
V
0.8
0.8 1
1.0 2
1.0 2
1.4 2
5
2.6
2.
2.6 6
6
0
normalised frequencies
of FEM modes
0
0.2
0
0 .27
0.65.35
0
0 .65
1 .74
1.34.00
1
2 .89
2 .10
2.45.26
2
2.76.46
normalised frequencies
of measured modes
0.4
0.6
MAC vaue
0.8
1
Application to the XD-115
In Fig. 5.26, the MAC plot is depicted that compares the mode
shapes measured by the operational testing to the shapes computed
by the finite element model. There is only agreement for the modes
at lower frequencies. The OMA identified only one mode for the
frequencies ω/ωref = 1 and ω/ωref = 0.77, although it was expected that for each of these frequencies two modes can be identified
due to the symmetry of the rotor. For the higher modes, no agreement between measured and computed modes can be identified.
This bad match between measurements and computation is probably caused by the difficult measurement conditions. As the AutoMAC in Fig. 5.22 suggested, the 2nd bending mode and the tilting
modes are hard to distinguish.
The excitation forces used for the operational modal analysis are
mainly in torsional and radial direction. It is expected, that modes
showing a displacement in these two directions are excited during
operation, while the axial mode at ω/ωref = 1.33 is not excited. It
is, thus, astonishing that the first bending mode is more excited
than the axial mode and that no torsional mode is visible in the
measurements.
There are three possible reason, why a mode is not excited and thus
cannot be measured during operation. All of them can be derived
from the formula to calculate modal participation factors, which
was introduced in (5.20).
• The damping ζ r of the mode is so high that it is not excited.
• The force distribution fmag does not match the mode shape
Φr , so that their scalar product fmag ⋅ Φr is low.
• The excitation frequency Ω is too far from the resonance frequency ωr .
Looking at the identified damping values in Tab. 5.9, the first reason
5.5 Conclusion
185
can be ruled out, as the damping values are too small to significantly
influence the participation of a mode. The third reason can be ruled
out too, because the measurement was done at a frequency sweep,
during which various frequencies were excited, including the resonance frequencies. That leaves the second point as possible reason
why the structure is not excited.
The mode shapes of the 1st bending mode and axial mode are validated by the vibration measurements in the turbine. Therefore, the
cause for an excitation of the 1st bending mode that is higher than
expected is most likely the incorrect approximation of the magnetic
forces. The local magnetic forces cannot be measured directly and
thus no experimental validation was conducted.
In what way the magnetic forces do not resemble the actual force
distribution in the turbine, remains a task for future research. Possible reasons include imperfections or manufacturing tolerances in
the generator such as ovalisation of rotor and stator, eccentricity of
stator and rotor, and axial misalignment of stator and rotor.
Although difficult measurement conditions were encountered in
the turbine, a successful experimental dynamic analysis of the generator rotor could be concluded. Some of the measured modes
were matched to the modes computed by the FE model. The mode
shapes of various modes seem to match very well the computed
modes, although the computed frequencies deviate.
The reasons for the less accurate match at higher frequencies and
the deviation of the frequencies has two probable causes. The difficult measurement conditions and the placement and low number
of sensors deteriorates the quality of the measurements. Furthermore, the simplifications applied to the FE model do not take the
surrounding nacelle and turbine dynamics into account. These dynamics could have an impact on the dynamics of the rotor structure, which leads to the encountered deviation between measured
and simulated dynamics.
The FE model suffered from the maximum limit of DoFs imposed
on the model by the available hardware. This limitation decreases
the accuracy of the computed modes as well as the accuracy of the
magnetic forces. For this problem, the model reduction techniques
developed in Chapter 4 could help to improve the accuracy.
It was identified that for the XD-115 generator structure, the two
way coupled dynamics are less important. This indicates that the
design of the turbine’s generator is robust and can withstand the
5.5
Application to the XD-115
Conclusion
V
186
5 Application to the XD-115
dynamic forces with ease. It also indicates that the generator structure is over engineered and significant weight reduction is possible
without compromising the functionality of the generator.
This result does not indicate that the two-way coupling can be neglected for direct-drive wind turbine generators all together. For
designs that are more compliant, i.e. the lowest eigenfrequencies
are lower, the two-way coupling can be of major importance and
influences the dynamics significantly.
Furthermore, the measurements showed that in-situ operational
modal analysis of the generator structure of direct-drive wind turbines is possible, making structural health monitoring during operation possible. Further measurements, conducted on the static part
of the bearing, indicate that structural health monitoring of the rotor resonance frequencies is even possible by measuring stator vibrations. These measurements are shows in Appendix B.
V
Improvements for future Dynamic Analyses of Generators
Application to the XD-115
The analysis of the XD-115 was rather thorough and could explain
the dynamic behaviour that was measured. However, there was
some uncertainty left about the results. Several points could be improved for the identification process of the dynamic behaviour of
wind turbine generators in the future.
More sensors: The measurements were carried out with too few
sensors. Ambiguity remained about the exact shape of some
of the modes.
Include the stator: Some of the vibrations might have originated
in the stator. This could not be determined ultimately, because the stator was not equipped with sensors. Including
the stator in the measurements could also yield valuable information explaining noise generation in the turbine as noise
is usually generated on the stator side.
Lab measurements of generator: Several of the vibrations measured in the generator might be caused by other parts of the
turbine. To distinguish the generator vibrations form the vibrations originating in other parts of the turbine, the generator’s dynamics should be measured before it is installed in
the turbine. This way, the change of the dynamic behaviour
caused by coupling with the nacelle or other structures can
be identified.
Increase frequency range: The frequency range was limited to up
to 200Hz. However, the frequency range should be reach up
5.6 Summary
187
to the resonance frequency of the bending mode or ovalisation mode that has the same order as the cyclic symmetry as
the electro-magnetic part. Those modes are especially likely
to be excited and should thus be carefully analysed.
Use other OMA and filtering techniques: [103] lists a number of
techniques to improve parameter identification of outputonly measurement techniques in the presence of harmonic
excitations. Some of these techniques are expected to improve the results of the measurements present here.
Summary
In this chapter, a dynamic analysis of the XD-115 was conducted,
including a 3D structural analysis, a 3D magnetic model interacting in two directions with the structural model and a 2D magnetic
model estimating the influence of the armature field on the structure. The two-way coupled analysis, conducted first, identified that
a two-way coupled analysis is not necessary for the generator of
the XD-115. The one-way coupled analysis, conducted afterwards,
could simulate the dynamics of the generator of the XD-115 reasonably well. Measurements showed that in the frequency range
of interest, several eigenmodes could be predicted by the simulations. This was seen as strong indications, that the models indeed
are a representation of the vibrational behaviour of the turbine. In
the higher frequency range, the agreement between simulation and
measurements was weaker, so that some doubts about the model
could not be dispelled.
The source of and the mechanisms causing the excitation frequencies could be identified, so that for other generators, the excitation
frequencies were predicted. Furthermore, a methodology was developed to identify modes that can possibly be excited by the magnetic harmonics.
5.6
188
5 Application to the XD-115
Reducing the weight of off-shore wind turbine
nacelles is currently a key driver of innovation
within the wind turbine industry. Weight
reduction will not only lead to smaller mass and
thus smaller towers of the turbine, but also reduce
logistic costs during the turbine’s installation. A
reduced nacelle weight will, subsequently, lead to
reduced cost of wind energy.
For direct-drive turbines, the generator is one of
the heaviest parts of the wind turbine nacelle. Due
to the low rotational speed of the generator, the
loads are especially high in this type of turbine,
which increases the necessary structural mass of
the rotor. Recently, designed flexibility has been
identified as one approach to achieve weight
reduction. However, reducing the weight of the
support structure has proven difficult, due to the
complex pattern of dynamic excitation forces.
Until now, density based topology optimisation
has hardly been employed for the design of wind
turbine parts. This chapter investigates the
possible weight reduction, which results from
applying this method to the support structure of
the generator rotor.
Optimisatio
6
Abstract:
190
6 Optimisation
6.1
Introduction
In Chapter 5, the dynamic behaviour of the XD-115 generator was
analysed. The insights in the load cases for the stationary operation
of the turbine can be used to improve the dynamic behaviour of the
generator.
Vibrations in wind turbine generators are of interest, because of the
following reasons. Firstly, vibrations during operation can cause a
noise annoyance for the surrounding area. Furthermore, vibration
amplitudes that exceed a secure limit, can compromise the functionality of the turbine. The second aspect is the focus of this thesis.
When analysing the vibrations for either of the two reasons above,
insights and recommendations for the other cause are also gained.
It is, therefore, helpful keeping both aspects in mind during the following analysis.
Topology Optimisation, the method mainly used in this chapter, is
still subject to extended research. As such, there are still issues that
need to be addressed before this method can show its full potential.
This chapter focuses on identifying the potential that this method
develops, when using it to improve designs of generator structures.
For that, this thesis adapts the method for wind turbine generators,
including identification of suitable constraints and ways to measure the performance of a design. The chapter does not focus on
improving the methods itself. It uses a self developed version of
the algorithm that does not include the latest, cutting edge methods that improve the optimisation result. Accordingly, the results
presented in this chapter suffer from practical difficulties during
the implementation of the optimisation algorithm and can be improved significantly, when the latest research results from the field
of topology optimisation is incorporated. Approaches that potentially improve the results are pointed out.
6.1.1
Effects of Torque Ripple in Electric Machines
Torque Ripple is caused by the interaction of the magnetic field of
the rotor with the armature field and the stator teeth. It causes a
variation of the torque during the rotation of the turbine. This effect is undesirable as it can excite the structure of the generator and,
consequently, causes noise and high vibration amplitudes. Furthermore, it can complicate the start-up of the generator, as it might
create a magnetic torque that opposes the torque induced by the
wind, even when there are no currents present in the coils.
To avoid vibrations in wind turbines generators in particular and
electric machines in general, efforts have concentrated on minim-
6.1 Introduction
191
ising the cause for the vibrations, i.e. torque ripple, in the past.
The various approaches for minimising these torque fluctuations
were listed in Sec. 1.3.3. Instead of minimising the cause of torque
ripple, analysing the impact it has on the machine can identify new
approaches to minimise its effects. The vibrations caused by torque
ripple can be minimised, by designing the structure in such a way
that it does not excite the structure of the electric machine. This
will reduce noise and vibration amplitudes. It does not improve
the start-up characteristics of the generator.
To find a mechanical design that minimises the effects of torque
ripple, topology optimisation was chosen. This method is most
suited for this task, as it is not limited by what shapes it can describe.
Optimisation for Weight Reduction
6.1.2
The insights in the load cases, gained in Sec. 5.3.4 and Sec. 5.3.5, for
the steady-state operation of the turbine can be used to optimise
the design of the generator structure, so that the deflection resulting from those forces is minimal. In the past, many different topologies to optimally support the electro-magnetic active parts of
the generator were suggested [145]. The proposed designs can be
categorised in constructions using arms, spokes, discs and tension
rods. The various designs that were proposed are thus quite diverse.
The challenge of the optimisation is finding the optimal topology
and identifying the optimal design, while ensuring that the result
is still manufacturable. Shape optimisation is based on a parametrisation of the geometry. Parametrisation is difficult when there are
many topologies to consider. Topology optimisation is not parameter based and can thus represent any design listed in [145]. However, the designs yielded by topology optimisation are often difficult to manufacture with conservative production techniques, i.e.
without a 3D printer. A combination of topology optimisation and
shape optimisation was chosen for this optimisation. This way, all
possible geometries listed in [145] are included, yet the resulting
geometries consist of shapes that are manufacturable.
Content of the Chapter
This chapter will introduce a dynamic optimisation problem, which
quantifies and optimises the dynamic performance of the generator
rotor structure of the XD-115. The method can be used in the same
way for any electric machine but yields the largest improvements in
electric machines that are very flexible, like direct-drive generators.
6.1.3
192
6 Optimisation
It can be used to address either of the two effects mentioned above:
reduce generator vibrations and reduce the weight of the structure.
The method is used for single bearing direct-drive topologies as
well as multi bearing designs. The results of the optimisation of
single bearing designs are compared to the current design, which
is used as benchmark.
6.2
The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
This section will introduce the various methods used during the
optimisation. Due to the large variety of generator topologies that
need to be considered, topology optimisation was chosen as optimisation method. Topology optimisation is a technique that mathematical determines the optimal distribution of material for a given
cost function within a certain control volume. Compared to shape
optimisation, topology optimisation is not limited by parametrisation. However, it leads to a large number of design variables that
lead to models that consist of many DoFs and are computational
expensive.
6.2.1
The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
How can the optimal design be measured for a certain set of functions that a structure needs to fulfil? The functions that the generator rotor structure needs to perform were mentioned in Sec. 1.2.3.
The first objective requires a stiff connection between all electromagnetic active materials on the rotor. To ensure this, a hollow
cylinder is needed, on which the magnets are mounted.
The other two objectives can be quantified by taking the displacement caused by the magnetic forces during steady-state operation
of the turbine. In this thesis, the focus rests on the dynamic behaviour of the generator. That means that not only the static forces of
the generator, described in (5.16), are taken into consideration but
also the dynamic forces, that were identified in (5.17).
Another indicator for the performance of the rotor structure is its
weight and its cost. The objectives have to be reached with the least
weight possible at the cheapest price. The first of these indicators
is easily measurable as the weight can be computed directly from
the volume. The second indicator is difficult to determine, because
it heavily depends on the geometry of the rotor. Therefore, it is
neglected here during the optimisation. It is however accounted
for by using a shape optimisation after the topology optimisation
that yields shapes that are easier to manufacture.
6.2 The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
193
The optimisation problem can be phrased into the qualitative statement:
Determine the structural generator design that uses
the least amount of material, while not exceeding a certain maximal displacement under dynamic forces found
at steady state operation
Shaping this expression into a mathematical formula, as necessary
for optimisation algorithms, will be complex, due to the limitation
of current algorithms.
A solid steel ring is necessary for a feasible electro-magnetic design,
because the magnetic flux lines need to be able to close. This steel
ring gives enough support to the magnets, so that the first function
defined in Sec. 1.2.3 is automatically performed.
Quantifying the Performance of the Design
Ωmat
6.2.2
Figure 6.1
Domain of a structural
optimisation. Ωmat denotes the
volume of the material. For the
topology optimisation, Ω denotes
the whole optimisation domain
and Γmag denotes the surface
where magnetic forces are applied
Ω
Γmag
⃗fmag
The qualitative statement in the previous section needs to be transformed into a mathematical formulation. For that, the constraints
as well as the optimisation criteria need to be quantified. For the
mass constraint, this is rather easy as the maximal mass of the total
structure may not exceed a certain value
mmax > ∫ ρ(⃗x) dΩmat
(6.1)
Ωmat
where ρ denotes the density of the structure, Ωmat the material domain and mmax the maximal allowed mass of the structure. See Fig.
6.1 for a schematic of the system that is optimised. The second constraint ensures that there is a solid steel ring at the locations where
194
6 Optimisation
the magnetic force is applied
mmax,mag = ∫ ρ(⃗x) dΓmag
(6.2)
Γmag
where Γmag denotes the surface where the magnetic force is applied,
and mmax,mag a minimal value for the average density of the surface.
kg
Note that mmax,mag is not a mass. Its unit is m .
For formulating the mathematical optimisation performance criteria, two different kinds of displacement need to be distinguished.
The static displacement created by static forces in the generator. In
addition, there are the dynamic displacements that are the result of
periodic forces in the generator. These two kinds of displacement
have to be computed separately.
Static Performance
For the static case, the displacements can be determined by solving
the equilibrium equation (see Chapter 2 for details)
⃗fmag,static = −∇ ⋅ σ(⃗
u)
(6.3)
where ⃗fmag,static denotes the magnetic forces as defined in (5.16).
The performance of the structure is determined by the displacement in the air gap, i.e. at Γmag . When the absolute value of the displacement in Γmag is minimal, the second and third functions of the
support structure are fulfilled as best as possible. Minimising the
absolute value of every DoF in Γmag will lead to as many objective
functions as there are DoFs in Γmag . Most algorithms are designed
for one scalar objective function, because this makes the optimisation computational cheaper. One objective function means that
only one gradient needs to be determined. So instead of minimising every DoF in the domain, the integral over all displacements
is formed.
u∣ dΓmag
(6.4)
min ∫ ∣⃗
Γmag
This is minimal, when the square of the displacement is minimal
⃗2 dΓmag
min ∫ u
(6.5)
Γmag
Minimising (6.5) will lead to an optimal design in terms of static
performance. For numerical reasons, (6.5) is not ideal as it increases computation time drastically. Computing the sensitivities
of (6.5) is expensive. Why that is the case will be explained in Sec.
6.2 The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
195
6.2.4. Instead of the square of the displacement, the strain energy
is minimised.
⃗T⃗fmag dΓmag
min gobj = min ∫ u
Γmag
= min ∫ ε(⃗
u)T σ(⃗
u) dΩmat
(6.6)
Ωmat
Dynamic Performance
The dynamic performance of a structure can be measured by the
overall displacement of the structure under a dynamic loading. In
a steady state operation point of the generator, only periodic excitation forces are generated by the system. The partial differential
equation describing the response of the system is
⃗(t, ⃗x)
∂2u
∇ ⋅ σ(t, ⃗x) + ⃗fmag (t, ⃗x) = ρ
∂t2
(6.7)
This equation can be optimised in two ways. The used approach
depends on the system properties and has a significant influence
on the formulation of the optimisation problem.
The Harmonic Approach
The first approach is the harmonic approach. In this case, the dis⃗ is calculated for a certain harmonic excitation
placement field u
frequency ωext . The solution is a forced vibration at the same frequency as the excitation.
ˆ
ˆ⃗(⃗x)eiωext t
∇ ⋅ σ̂(⃗x)eiωext t + ⃗fmag (⃗x)eiωext t = −ρω2ext u
(6.8)
ˆ
ˆ
⃗ and ⃗fmag denote the amplitude of the response over Ω and
where u
the spatial distribution of the displacement and magnetic force, respectively and the exponential terms eiωext t the time information.
The same separation has been done for the stress tensor σ.
The solution is only valid for that particular frequency. To get an
impression of how the system performs at various excitation frequencies, (6.8) has to be solved repeatedly for those frequencies.
Once the PDE is solved, the displacement for that frequency can
be used to calculate the performance. As performance indicator,
the dynamic energy is used
Wdyn (ωext ) = ∫ εT (⃗
u, ωext ) dΩmat
u, ωext )σ(⃗
Ωmat
(6.9)
196
6 Optimisation
When a certain frequency range is of interest, (6.8) needs to be
solved for all frequencies in that frequency range. There are infinite frequencies in any frequency range. Thus, a frequency sweep
with a certain step size needs to be done. The size of the step should
not exceed a certain value, as then resonance frequencies that are
located between the evaluated frequencies might not be picked up.
On the other side, it should not fall below a certain length as this
increases the computational costs.
This approach has the disadvantage that the larger the frequency
range of interest, the more often (6.8) needs to be solved. The advantage is that the the sensitivity analysis for the various performances is rather simple and can thus be calculated easily as shown in
Sec. 6.2.4.
The Modal Approach
The modal approach transforms (6.7) into a system of independent
ordinary differential equations, using modal analysis according to
the description in [52]. It is then possible to identify the amplitude
of each of these modes with the help of the participation factor
⃗ r ⋅ ⃗fmag dΩmat
∫ φ
ηr =
Ωmat
ω2r − ω2ext
(6.10)
Often, only a certain frequency range is of interest for the optimisation. In that case, the participation factor of modes within that frequency range are considered for the optimisation function. Considering only a certain frequency range has one disadvantage. The
frequencies of the modes change when the density distribution, and
with it the design, changes. It is, thus, possible that due to a change
of the design parameters a mode is no longer considered, when its
resonance frequency is no longer in the frequency range for which
the amplitudes are evaluated. Furthermore, it is possible that a certain mode starts being considered when its resonance frequency
is changed in such a way that it enters the frequency range of interest. This problem could be addressed by employing mode tracking methods [40, 75] or using a Hanning window so that modes just
outside the frequency range of interest are still taken into account
but at a lower weighting factor.
This method has the advantage that the resonance frequencies are
identified and, thus, the evaluation of the response is independent
of the difference in frequency between resonance frequency and
evaluation frequency. This way, it can be ensured that all resonance
frequencies in the optimisation function are weighted equally, if
desired. However, the computational cost to analyse each mode is
more expensive than for each frequency in the harmonic method.
6.2 The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
This is balanced by the fact that there are usually less modes than
frequencies in a certain frequency range and thus the number of
evaluations per optimisation step is lower.
Multi-Objective Optimisation
Optimisation functions that consist of a sum of several terms do not
necessarily minimise all these terms. An optimisation algorithm
that minimises such an expression will concentrate on minimising
the largest term. A step that increases one of the smaller terms
while leading to a huge decrease for the largest term, will still yield
an overall decrease of the optimisation function. Only when the
various terms are of the same magnitude, the algorithm will take
the other terms into account.
To overcome this problem, only one of the terms is used in the optimisation function, while the other terms are used to define a set
of constraint which ensures that these terms do not exceed a certain value. By computing the optimal value for several constraint
value sets, the so called Pareto front can be determined. This front
indicates the optimal solution for the optimisation problem, over a
parameter space.
For the static optimisation problem, a Pareto front is computed by
minimising the static performance indicator defined in (6.6) for
several maximal mass values. This is done for the static optimisation in Sec. 6.3.1 and shown in Fig. 6.6
The performance indicators for the harmonic and modal approach
are both sums of several terms. Because there are so many terms,
computing a Pareto front is expensive. That is why instead the optimisation function consisting of the sum of various terms is optimised.
For the modal approach, this means, that mainly the largest participation factor will be minimised. All other participation factors
might increase during the optimisation process. The same is valid
for the various frequencies in the harmonic approach. In this case,
mainly the largest dynamic energy computed at one of the evaluated frequencies is minimised. That could lead to the situation
that a resonance frequency that is located between two evaluated
frequencies is not minimised for two possible reasons. Because
the resonance frequency does not coincide with an evaluation frequency, its contribution to the dynamic energy at the nearest evaluated frequency is small. Furthermore, the summand of that frequency might be small and thus neglected by the optimisation algorithm.
197
198
6 Optimisation
6.2.3
Topology Optimisation
This short introduction to topology optimisation is based on the
introduction in [160].
Topology optimisation is an optimisation technique that has the
aim to find the optimal distribution of material within a certain
design space Ω under a certain loading and set of constraints. To
formulate the topology optimisation problem and indicator function χ is introduced that can take values of 1, i.e. material and 0,
i.e. no material
χ(⃗x) ∈ {0, 1}
(6.11)
The topology optimisation finds the field of χ(⃗x) that minimises a
certain objective function gobj . The optimisation problem can then
be written as:
⃗)
min gobj (χ, u
χ,⃗
u
subject to 0 = δ (Wstrain (⃗
u, χ) + T (⃗
u, χ) − Wext,m (χ)) (6.12)
gconstr ≤ 0
χ(⃗x) ∈ {0, 1}
where gconstr denotes a constraint, gobj the objective function. The
second line represents the variational form of the partial differential
equation as derived in Chapter 2 with Wstrain the potential energy
and Wext,m the external energy as described in (2.59).
To solve (6.12) various approaches have been derived in the past.
The two most common ones are level-set methods [159, 167] or
density based topology optimisation [14]. This thesis will only employ the latter method.
Density Based Topology Optimisation
Density based topology optimisation is currently the most widely
used method to solve optimisation problems such as (6.12). The
approach of density based topology optimisation is to relax the
problem in (6.12) to a problem that is solvable by gradient based
optimisation algorithms. To do that, the discrete indicator function is substituted by a continuous density function ρf (⃗x) ∈ [0, 1].
Regions within the design without material are modelled as very
compliant material that hardly has an influence on the deformation behaviour of the structure. Usually, (6.12) is given in its nested
⃗ is an implicit function
form, i.e. ρf is the only design variable and u
of ρf through the second line of (6.12). The second line of (6.12) is
omitted from the optimisation problem.
To compute the displacements, the domain is discretised using the
finite element method, where the elements of the stiffness and mass
6.2 The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
199
matrix depend on the design parameters ρf .
u(ρf ))
min gobj (⃗
ρf
subject to gconstr (⃗
u(ρf )) ≤ 0
(6.13)
ρf (⃗x) ∈ [0, 1]
Because, the equilibrium equation, which was still part of (6.12),
⃗, all possible solutions
is now implicitly solved when computing u
for (6.13) satisfy the equilibrium equation. The stiffness and mass
⃗, depend on the design parameters ρf
matrix, needed to compute u
M = M(ρ(ρf ));
K = K(E(ρf ))
(6.14)
where ρ and E are vectors containing the scaled values of the density and Young’s modulus respectively at the nodes within the design
domain. The total stiffness matrix and mass matrix are assembled
from the element matrices, which depend on the nodal values of
the density and Young’s modulus.
K = ∑ Ke (Ee )
(6.15)
e
Scaling the Young’s modulus nonlinearly, while scaling the density
linearly makes intermediate densities (10−3 < ρf < 1) less feasible.
This is the case, because the intermediate densities show a relative
low stiffness compared to their density. This way the achieved stiffness is paid for by a lot of weight. The optimal solution will thus
not include material that has intermediate densities but tends to a
black and white, i.e. material/no-material, design. Fig. 6.2 shows
the relation between the normalised density and elasticity and the
design variable ρf . This method is called modified Solid Isotropic
Material with Penalisation (SIMP) method [139, 150]. The Young’s
modulus is defined by
En = Emax ρ3f
(6.16)
In dynamic topology optimisation, local modes with low resonance
frequencies can occur due to the penalisation function applied to
the Young’s modulus. This problem is tackled by lowering the density for low values of the design parameter.
⎧
⎪
ρ for ρf ≥ 0.1
⎪ρ
(6.17)
ρn = ⎨ max 5f
⎪
ρ
ρ for ρf < 0.1
⎪
⎩ max f
Solving the topology optimisation problem was done by using the
Method of Moving Asymptotes (MMA) [149]. The code was adapted from the code supplied by the author of [149] in Matlab.
VI
Optimisation
where Ke denotes the stiffness matrix of the eth element and Ee the
nodal values of the Youngs’s modulus at the nodes associated to the
eth element.
200
6 Optimisation
6.2.4
Computing Sensitivities
Topology optimisation requires optimisation algorithms that evaluate the gradients analytically. The large number of design variables make algorithms based on finite differences infeasible. For
topology optimisation, remeshing between iteration steps is not
necessary. This makes gradient based topology optimisation possible.
The sensitivity of a value is its change with respect to another. For
the optimisation the change of the objective function gobj (⃗
u) with
respect to the design variables are the sensitivities that need to be
determined. In the case of density based topology optimisation, the
design variables are the densities at each node of the mesh ρf (⃗x).
The value of interest is, thus, the gradient of the objective functions
with respect to the densities. Various methods exist to calculate
the sensitivities. Which method to use depends on the objective
functions and how it depends on the design parameters. For this
thesis, the objective function is a scalar function depending only
on the design parameters where a load is applied. In such a case,
the adjoint method for calculating sensitivities is the computational
least expensive method.
VI
Optimisation
The Adjoint Method
The adjoint method adds a design parameter independent part to
the optimisation function. It does depend on the current solution
⃗(⃗x). This part includes adjoint variables, which need
of the system u
to be solved only once for each optimisation iteration regardless of
the number of design parameters. This way, the computation of
the sensitivity of the objective function or constraint with respect
to each design parameter can be avoided. Instead, only one set of
Young’s Modulus
Density
E
/ ρ
Emax ρmax
1
Figure 6.2
The normalised density and
elasticity plotted over the design
variable ρf
0.5
0
0
0.5
ρf
1
6.2 The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
201
equations for every constrain or optimisation function needs to be
solved to compute the sensitivities, reducing computational cost
significantly. The adjoint problem is tailored to a certain load case
and needs to be adapted for each load case.
Stationary Optimisation
For stationary optimisation problems, the calculation of the sensitivities is easier than in the harmonic or modal case. For the discrete
case, the system equation is
Kqu = f
(6.18)
The adjoint methods introduces the performance measure
g∗obj = gobj − λT (Kqu − f)
g∗obj
(6.19)
where λ denotes the adjoint variables.
Instead of computing the sensitivities for gobj , the sensitivities for
g∗obj are computed.
dρf
T
=(
⎛ dK
∂gobj dqu
dqu ⎞
)
− λT
qu + K
∂qu
dρf
dρf ⎠
⎝ dρf
(6.20)
VI
(6.21)
Optimisation
dg∗obj
By a wise choice for λ the first term can be eliminated
T
∂gobj
λ K=(
)
∂qu
T
leaving for the sensitivity of g∗obj
∂g∗obj
∂ρf
= −λT
dK
qu
dρf
(6.22)
Because, (6.22) contains the solution to the static problem, qu , the
linear systems (6.18) and (6.21) need to be solved. The derivation of
the adjoint variables for calculating the sensitivities of constraints
is analog.
If the objective function gobj only consists of the strain energy Wpot ,
the system is self-adjoint. This means that the adjoint variables λ
are the same as the displacement solution qu . This can be shown
by considering that the potential energy for the discrete case can
be calculated by
1
Wpot = qTu Kqu
(6.23)
2
in this case (6.21) becomes
λT K = qTu K
(6.24)
Self-adjoint systems are cheaper to optimise as (6.21) does not need
to be solved explicitely.
202
6 Optimisation
Modal Optimisation
The adjoint method for modal sensitivities was used by Lee [89,
90].
1 1
T
(6.25)
g∗obj = gobj − ξ (K − λk M)φk + ζ ( − φTk Mφk )
2 2
where ξ and ζ denote the adjoint variables and λk denotes the square
of the eigenfrequency ωk . The derivative of the objective function
with respect to the design parameters becomes then
dg∗obj
T
∂gobj ∂λk
∂φk
∂f
=
+(
)
+
dρf
∂λk ∂ρf
∂φk
∂ρf
+ξ
T ⎛ ∂K
⎝ ∂ρf
−
∂M ⎞
∂λk
M − λk
φ
∂ρf
∂ρf ⎠ k
∂φ
+ ξ (K − λk M) k +
∂ρf
(6.26)
T
⎛
∂φ
1 ∂M ⎞
+ ζ −φk M k − φTk
φ
∂ρf 2 ∂ρf k ⎠
⎝
VI
Optimisation
Solving the following system of equations to calculate the adjoint
variables ζ and ξ, will eliminates the terms depending in the original optimisation function
(K − λk M)
[
−(Mφk )T
⎡ ∂gobj ⎤
⎢− ∂φ ⎥
−Mφk ξ
k ⎥
] [ ] = ⎢⎢ ∂g
⎥
ζ
0
⎢− ∂ λobj ⎥
⎣
k ⎦
(6.27)
Calculating the adjoint variables this way leads to
dg∗obj
dρf
=ξ
T ⎛ ∂K
⎝ ∂ρf
− λk
∂M ⎞
1 ∂M
φ
φ − ζ φTk
∂ρf ⎠ k
2 ∂ρf k
(6.28)
for the sensitivities. (6.27) has to be solved for each eigenvalue and
vector individually. So in order to calculate the sensitivities for all
modes within a certain frequency range, first the eigenvalue problem itself has to be solved and then (6.27) for each mode within that
range.
Finding a solution to (6.27) is the most computationally expensive
part of the modal method for large systems. The zeros on the main
diagonal in (6.27) can pose a problem for some preconditioners for
iterative solvers. This leads to a slow convergence rate of the iterative solver, which are preferred for large systems, due to reduced
memory requirements compared to direct solver methods. Finding a way to solve (6.27) iteratively and efficiently is still a topic of
research.
6.2 The Dynamic Optimisation Problem
203
Harmonic Optimisation
The sensitivity analysis for the harmonic case is different from the
two cases covered above. To increase the possibility that a resonance frequency is excited by the excitation force that does not perfectly coincide with the resonance frequency, damping is added to
the system. This increases the width of the peak of a resonance frequency in the FRF of the system and thus increases the chance of an
increase response to an excitation frequency. However, the damping complicates the sensitivity analysis as the displacement of the
system becomes complex.
The adjoint sensitivity analysis for time harmonic systems including damping is derived in [170]. The objective function gobj is extended by two adjoint variables ξ and ζ, one for the complex and
the other one for the complex conjugate residual.
g∗obj = gobj + ξ (Squ − f) + ζ T (Squ − f)
T
(6.29)
where ● denotes the conjugate complex of a value and S denotes the
sum of the system matrices
S = K(ρ) + iωC(ρ) − ω2 M(ρ)
ζ=ξ
(6.31)
The remaining adjoint variables can be computed by solving the
system
T
∂gobj
∂gobj
1
−i
)
S(ρ)T ξ = − (
2 ∂ R(qu )
∂ I(qu )
(6.32)
After the adjoint variables have been computed, the sensitivities can
be calculated by
⎛ T ∂S ⎞
=2R ξ
qu
∂ρf
⎝ ∂ρf ⎠
(6.33)
f = qu Squ
(6.34)
For the case that
as defined for the harmonic approach, the system is self-adjoint and
the solution of (6.32) is obtained by computing the dynamic displacements.
Optimisation
(6.30)
as shown in [170], one of the sets of adjoint variables can be eliminated by
∂g∗obj
VI
204
6 Optimisation
6.2.5
Shape Optimisation
The topology optimisation explained in Sec. 6.2.3 can identify the
optimal topology for a certain load case and domain. However,
due to the coarse mesh the computed stiffness is probably overestimated. It is, therefore, necessary to validate the results with a
shape optimisation where this overestimation is avoided. For that
the results of the topology optimisation are used to identify a parametrisation for the shape optimisation.
Furthermore, the shape optimisation yields results that do not require a 3D printer to be manufactured. Because of the parametrisation, the shape optimisation yields geometries that consist of easy
shapes.
For every iteration step of the shape optimisation, the structure is
remeshed. This makes the usage of methods determining the gradient analytically difficult (using a moving mesh, would theoretically make a gradient based method possible). It is, thus, necessary
to use an optimisation method that is based on finite differences
or does not try to identify the gradient at all. There are several
algorithms that fit this description, including particle swarm optimisation [39], algorithms based on evolution or the BOBYQA algorithm [119]. In this thesis, the Nelder-Mead algorithm is used
[106].
VI
Optimisation
6.3
Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
The focus of this thesis is on single bearing direct-drive topologies.
The XD-115, analysed in Chapter 5, also belongs to this type of wind
turbine.
For the optimisation of the single bearing design, the forces described in (5.16) and (5.17) were used. In a first step, a topology optimisation was used to determine the rough design of the turbine.
In a second step, a design parametrisation was conducted, which
was inspired by the result of the topology optimisation. This parametrisation makes a shape optimisation of the system possible.
The current design of the XD-115 was used as benchmark for the
optimised designs. It is depicted in Fig. 6.3. The compliance, the
total mass and the participation factors for selected modes are listed
in Tab. 6.2.
The optimisation relates only to the part of the rotor that is located
between bearing and air gap. For the optimisation, the magnet assembly was left out and thus excluded from the optimisation process. Only the steel stiffener structure, including the ring the mag-
6.3 Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
205
Figure 6.3
The benchmark design, i.e. the
current design of the XD-115
nets are mounted on, was included. For simplicity, the bearing was
modelled as fixed displacements. The hub was omitted, although it
was discovered that the hub structure has an small influence on the
dynamic response of the rotor stiffener structure. All these simplification were also applied to the benchmark design, to ensure
comparability between the benchmark and the optimised designs.
Topology Optimisation
6.3.1
Fig. 6.4 shows the mesh and the optimisation domain used for the
topology optimisation. The topology optimisation was coded in
Matlab and run on a computer cluster node with 48 cores. The
static optimisation took about a day while the modal optimisation
took about one to two weeks. The harmonic optimisation was carried out in Comsol and took about six days.
While using the topology optimisation, it crystallised that the resolution of the material distribution is the bottleneck of the method.
The volume of the structure of direct-drive wind turbines is large.
Furthermore, structures that consist of thin plates, beams or spokes
are usually the stiffest. Therefore, a high resolution is necessary
to represent the thins structures, while at the same time the large
volume needs to be covered. This gives rise to models with huge
amount of DoFs.
ca. 5 m
ca. 3 m
The mesh used for the topology
optimisation
The Design Domain used for the
Topology Optimisation
Figure 6.4
Force distribution and schematic
of the topology optimisation
206
6 Optimisation
The topology optimisation was conducted with and without density filter. The filter was based on [84] and prevents the optimisation algorithm from including checkerboard-like structures. These
occur in solutions of topology optimisation, because the stiffness
computed by the FEM for structures including material distributions in checkerboard patterns is greatly overestimated. They perform better when a large stiffness is desired with limited amount of
mass available. A comparison of homogenous designs with designs
including checkerboard-like structures is thus not fair.
The solutions of the unfiltered topology optimisation can still be
used as a starting point for a shape optimisation. The unfiltered topology optimisation can create thinner structures. Consequently,
the resulting designs can look very different from the filtered solutions. The above mentioned problem of comparing various results is overcome by comparing the solution of the shape optimisation, which does not include checkerboard-like structures, with the
benchmark solution.
Static Optimisation
In a first step, the system was optimised for a static load case using
the load identified in (5.16) and depicted in Fig. 5.11. This was done
in order to ensure that the solution computed with the used mesh
is able to excel the current benchmark design in terms of statical
performance.
Discretising the general optimisation problem, (6.13), yields the following discrete optimisation problem
min qu ⋅ fmag,stat
ρf
subject to
∑ ρn vn − mmax ≤ 0
n
− ∑ ρn vn + 0.999 ∑ vn ≤ 0
(6.35)
n∈Γmag
n∈Γmag
−3
ρf ∈ [10 , 1]
where qu denotes the values of the structural DoFs as defined in
(2.104), ρn is the density at node n, vn the volume associated with
node n and ρf denotes the vector of all design parameters. The objective function denotes the strain energy of the system that is minimised. The first constraint ensures that the mass mmax is not exceeded, while the second constraint ensures that the design is feasible from a magnetic point of view by imposing a solid steel ring at
the outer surface of the design domain.
To identify the minimal mass at a given compliance a Pareto front
was computed for filtered and unfiltered topology optimisation.
6.3 Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
207
Design Density ρf
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Design Density ρf
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
This front, shown in Fig. 6.6, identifies minimal values of the static
compliance for various values of the constraint limiting the maximum mass. Fig. 6.6 shows the influence of the density filter. The
unfiltered topology optimisation yields lower compliances than the
the benchmark design for the same mass, whereas the filtered topology optimisation, on the other side, yields a compliance that is
slightly higher than the compliance of the benchmark design. For
very low mass constraints, the filtered topology optimisation yields
very high compliances. This is caused by the density filter, because
the mass cannot be distributed in a way, that a connection between
the outer cylinder and the bearing is established.
The top part of Fig. 6.5 shows the resulting design of the static unfiltered topology optimisation at the point of the Pareto front that
shows roughly the same compliance as the benchmark design. The
total strain energy, which is an indication for the compliance of the
system, is 157J and the mass is 13039kg. That is 96% of the total
strain energy of the benchmark solution and 81% of the mass of
the benchmark solution.
The bottom part of Fig. 6.5 shows the design that is produced by
the filtered topology optimisation. This design performs slightly
worse than the benchmark design. The mass at 99% slightly below
the benchmark design, whereas the strain energy of 186J is slightly
above the benchmark design of 164J. Tab. 6.2 shows the comparison of the various optimisation results.
Modal Optimisation
The static solution was used as an initial guess for the dynamic optimisation. This speeds up the optimisation process, because the
Figure 6.5
The result of the static topology
optimisation without density filter
for m = 13039kg (top) and the
result of the static filtered topology
optimisation for m = 20525kg
(bottom)
208
6 Optimisation
boundary conditions of the optimisation problem are a priori satisfied.
The load for which the structure is optimised is given by Sec. 5.3.5.
For a rotation speed of 18rpm, which is the maximal rotation speed
of the turbine the maximal excitation frequency is
ωmax
2πnmax
= nlcm
(6.36)
ωref
60ωref
where nmax denotes the maximal number of revolutions per minute
of the turbine, ωmax the maximal frequency in the frequency range
of interested. ωref the normalisation rotation speed introduced in
Chapter 5 and nlcm denotes the least common multiple of the number of slots and the number of poles defined in (5.12). For the used
parameters the frequency range of interest is between ω/ωref = 0
and ω/ωref = 3. The modal topology optimisation intends to minimise the excitation of any modes in this frequency range. For that
10 modes were computed in each iteration step. If the number of
modes in the frequency range of interest exceeds 10 modes, the lowest 10 modes were used for evaluating the optimisation function.
The excitation frequency of fmag,dyn varies with the rotation speed
of the turbine. That is the reason why only the nominator in (5.20)
is used in the objective function. The nominator represents the correlation of the spatial distributions of excitation forces and modes.
It is independent of the excitation frequency. The optimisation
decreases the participation of the modes by either changing their
shape, so that they are no longer excited, or it changes their resonance frequency so that they are no longer considered for the optimisation, because they are outside the frequency range of interest.
Static strain energy [J]
In contrast to the strain energy in the objective function in (6.35),
the scalar product φk ⋅ fmag,dyn can be positive as well as negative.
Therefore, the square of that product needs to be minimised.
Unfiltered Optimal Designs
Filtered Optimal Designs
Benchmark Design
Shape Optimised Designs
600
400
200
Figure 6.6
Pareto fronts of the various static
optimisations
1
1.5
2
2.5
Total mass [kg]
3
⋅104
6.3 Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
209
Design Density ρf
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Design Density ρf
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Using the discrete version of the dynamic excitation forces, fmag,dyn ,
defined in (5.17), the modal optimisation problem can be written as
min
ρf
subject to
Figure 6.7
The result of the modal topology
optimisation without density filter
∑ ∣φk ⋅ fmag,dyn ∣
2
k
∑ ρn vn − mmax ≤ 0
n
− ∑ ρn vn + 0.99 ∑ vn ≤ 0
n∈Ωf
(6.37)
n∈Ωf
qTu,0 Kqu,0 − Wmax ≤ 0
ρf ∈ [10−3 , 1]
where Wmax denotes a maximal strain energy for the static load
case, φk the k th eigenmode that is within the frequency range specified above. qu,0 denotes the static displacement caused by the
static forces in (5.16).
The dynamic forces, fmag,dyn , are complex quantities. (6.27) shows
that ∂gobj /∂φk , the derivative of the objective function with respect
to the mode shapes, is required to calculate the adjoint variables.
Special attention is necessary, when deriving this quantity, because
fmag,dyn is complex. The required derivatives can be computed by
∂gobj
∂
∂
=
∣φ ⋅ fmag,dyn ∣2 =
(φ ⋅ fmag,dyn )(φk ⋅ fmag,dyn )
∂φk ∂φk k
∂φk k
= fmag,dyn ⋅ (φk ⋅ fmag,dyn ) + fmag,dyn ⋅ (φk ⋅ fmag,dyn )
Fig. 6.7 shows the result of the modal topology optimisation while
Tab. 6.2 lists the values for compliance, mass and participation
factors. All participation factors except the one for the axial mode,
are lower than those of the benchmark design.
(6.38)
210
6 Optimisation
Comparing the results of the modal topology optimisations in Fig.
6.7 to the results of the static topology optimisations in Fig. 6.5
reveals that the changes are minimal. Apparently, small changes
to the structure can have already a large effect on the participation
of the modes. It is conspicuous that the modal topology optimisation introduces more intermediate density values, i.e. density
values between 0.001 and 1, compared to the static topology optimisation.
Harmonic Optimisation
The harmonic optimisation minimises the dynamic energy associated with a certain excitation. The dynamic energy can only be
calculated for a certain excitation frequency and force distribution.
The distribution does not change in the case of an electric machine,
but the frequency varies with the rotation speed. To cover a certain frequency range, the sum of the dynamic energies over several
frequencies within the frequency range has to be minimised. The
same frequency range as for the modal optimisation was used. The
step size was set to approximately 0.15ω/ωref . As an initial guess a
homogeneous distribution of mass was used.
1
Design Density ρf
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Figure 6.8
The result of the harmonic
topology optimisation.
The optimisation problem for the harmonic case can be written as
min
ρf
subject to
∑ qu (ωk ) ⋅ fmag,dyn
k
∑ ρn vn − mmax ≤ 0
n
− ∑ ρn vn + 0.999 ∑ vn ≤ 0
n∈Ωf
(6.39)
n∈Ωf
qTu,0 Kqu,0 − Wmax ≤ 0
ρf ∈ [10−3 , 1]
where qu (ωk ) denotes the displacement for an external forced har-
6.3 Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
211
monic excitation that is computed by solving
(K(ρ) + iωk C − ω2k M(ρ)) qu (ωk )eiωk t = fmag,dyn eiωk t
(6.40)
C was created by using a Rayleigh damping with the mass damping
parameter α = 7 and the stiffness damping parameter β = 2 ⋅ 10−5 .
Fig. 6.8 shows the result of the harmonic topology optimisation
while Tab. 6.2 lists the values for compliance, mass and participation factors. Some of the optimised participation factors are higher
than the participation factors of the benchmark design. Note that
the torsional mode was excluded from the optimisation as its resonance frequency is too high.
Shape Optimisation
6.3.2
The shape optimisation uses the solution of the unfiltered topology
optimisation and sets up a parametrisation that can represent this
solution. Fig. 6.9 shows the parametrisation for the static shape
optimisation. Tab. 6.1 lists the design parameters used. To avoid
absolute values and use relative design parameters instead the following formulas were used for the parameters in Fig. 6.9 that are
not listed in Tab. 6.1.
z22 = (z2 − (0.55 − d2 /2))f22 − (0.55 − d2 /2)
nstiffener = round(fstiffener )
2π
φstiffener =
fφ,stiffener
nstiffener
Parameter
Name
Initial
min
Value
max
(6.41)
Description
z2 [m]
0.3 0
f22
0.1 0
dcylinder [m]
0.02 0.01
d1 [m]
0.03 0.025 0.3
Thickness of disc 1
d2 [m]
0.03 0.025 0.3
Thickness of disc 2
d3 [m]
0.03 0.025 0.3
Thickness of disc 3
lb [m]
0.05 0.025 0.15
fstiffener
fφ,stiffener
φ0,stiffener [rad]
dstiffener [m]
0.55 Axial coordinate of outer end of disc 1
Dimensionless parameter for the
1
outer end of disc 2
0.1
Thickness of outer cylindar
Thickness of bearing ring
Continuous parameter of number of
14
4
14
stiffeners
Parameter for thickness of axial
0
0.01 1
stiffeners in circumferential direction
Angle between φ = 0 and first
0
0
22.5
stiffener
Thickness of stiffeners in radial
0.01 0.01 0.14
driection
Table 6.1
Design parameters of the shape
optimisation
212
6 Optimisation
dcylinder
z22
z2
d1
φstiffener
φn,stiffener
d2
d3
φ=0
φ0,stiffener
φ
y
z
lb
dstiffener
y
φ
z
lb
0.295m
Parametrisation of the cut through the
rotational symmetric part
Figure 6.9
Parametrisation of the geometry
for the shape optimisation
Parametrisation of the cyclic symmetric part
This way the absolute geometry values for the axial length z22 and
the angle φstiffener can be replaced by the values fstiffener and fφ,stiffener ,
which relate the values of the former two variables to other design
parameters. nstiffener is a discrete parameter that denotes the number of axial stiffener bars in the solution. Because the Nelder-Mead
algorithm cannot cope with discrete parameters, nstiffener is computed from the continuous parameter fstiffener by rounding to the
next integer.
The parametrisation used in the shape optimisation is very limited
with respect to the number of designs that can be represented. But
the only purpose of this optimisation is to fine tune the values of
the parameters. The rough values were estimated by looking at the
optimal design in Fig. 6.5.
The second reason for this shape optimisation is to verify the values
for compliance computed by the topology optimisation. Additionally, the shape optimisation checks if the design identified by the
topology optimisation as optimal is still stiffer than the benchmark
design, when assembled from easy geometries.
The shape optimisation was carried out in Comsol using again the
48 core node already used for the topology optimisation. It took
several hours to converge.
The shape optimisation reaches a static compliance of 73.8J at a
total mass of 20790kg, the same mass as the benchmark design.
With these values it shows a lower compliance than the topology
optimised results at 20790kg. Also the shape optimised designs of
lower mass constraints show a better static performance than the
6.3 Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
213
Figure 6.10
Result of the shape optimisation
Benchmark
Static,
unfiltered
Static Strain Energy [J]
164
157
159.1
158
164
Relative Strain Energy [%]
100
96
97
96
100
20790
13039
20785
15877
10492
100
62.7
99.9
76
50.4
−2.87 − 4.85i
Total Mass [kg]
Relative Mass [%]
Harmonic Modal, unfiltered
Shape Opt.
Mode participation and Frequency
1st bending
mode
part. fact.
axial
mode
part. fact.
torsional
mode
part. fact.
−0.08 − 0.1i
−1.18 + 2.99i
0.11 + 4.14i
0.01 − 0.01i
1.2
1.07
0.79
1.04
1.21
0.003 − 0.007i −26.57−12.27i −0.096 − 0.07i
0.007 + 0.015i
12.05 − 4.65i
1.307
norm. Freq.
Freq. [Hz]
1.34
1.02
1.27
0.1 + 0.27i 36.08 + 45.24i
1.29
1.1 + 1.42i
0.02 + 0.04i
Freq. [Hz]
3.24
2.925
3.46
2.73
2 bending part. fact.
Freq. [Hz]
mode
53.94 + 12.2i
−6.86 + 9i
−2.74 + 9i
−0.14 + 0.19i
5.70 + 8.84i
3.2
2.37
2
2.32
2.07
nd
topology optimised designs.
Changing Boundary Conditions
In Sec. 6.3.1 the design of the XD-115 was optimised using topology
optimisation. The results of that optimisation are only optimal for
the configuration within the XD-115. The solution changes significantly, when the location of the bearing or the load is changed.
The top of Fig. 6.11 shows the solution for the static case when the
static load in radial direction is increased by a factor of 14. The
bottom of Fig. 6.11 shows the result of the modal analysis when the
bearing is moved to the edge of the design domain.
The two parts of Fig. 6.11 show how volatile the results of the topology optimisation are. Even the slightest change of the boundary
conditions has an effect on the design. That is why it is impossible
to determine one optimal design, but the design should always be
Table 6.2
Results of the optimisation of the
single bearing design.
6.3.3
214
6 Optimisation
determined in close coordination with the rest of the rotor design.
6.3.4
Discussion
The application of topology optimisation to the generator structure
of the XD-115 showed that this method is suitable to improve the
design of the XD-115, in particular, and of direct-drive wind turbine
generator structures in general. The limited time that was available
to implement the algorithms made a more thorough optimisation
analysis impossible. The results of the topology optimisation reflect
this as they are not as good as they could be if a cutting edge topology algorithm was used. But even this rudimentary code lead to
an improved design. This proves the great potential of this method.
All results of the topology optimisation suffer from a coarse mesh
that lowers the resolution and thus the minimal thickness of thin
walled parts of the structure. An increase of DoFs was not possible
due to the memory requirements of the algorithm and the available
hardware. Using an algorithm that uses the available memory more
efficiently will increase the limit of DoFs and improves the quality
of the solution.
The result of the harmonic topology optimisation shows an ambiguous quality. Some of the participation factors increase due to
the optimisation, where as others decrease. It is assumed that the
problem of multiple summands in the optimisation function, dis-
Design Density ρf
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
Figure 6.11
The results of the topology
optimisation with changed
boundary conditions
Design Density ρf
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
6.3 Optimisation of Single Bearing Topologies
cussed in Sec. 6.2.2 leads to this result. The large step size between
the frequencies for which the dynamic compliance is computed is
probably the reason for this. The solution might improve by decreasing the step size between the frequencies at which the dynamic
energy is evaluated or by increasing the damping in the structure
and thereby increasing the participation of modes do not exactly
coincide with the discrete frequency steps.
Although, the modal topology optimisation decreases the participation factors of the design, the density distribution is not as black
and white as desired. The modal topology optimisation, compared
to the static topology optimisation, introduced more intermediate
density values, i.e. density values that are neither 1 nor 0.001 as
desired. One possible explanation is that the modal topology optimisation does no longer optimise for the compliance, but instead
for the participation factors. This way, the penalisation, introduced
in (6.17) and (6.16), does not lead to a distinct separation of material and no-material. If this is the reason for the intermediate values, a topology optimisation that minimises the static compliance
while setting constraints on the participation factors might resolve
the problem. Further research is necessary to confirm this assumption.
The modal topology optimisation is not completely converged. The
numbers in Tab. 6.2 indicate this as the mass is not close to the maximal allowed mass. The maximal density change per optimisation
step needs to be much lower for the modal optimisation than for
the other topology optimisation approaches described here. This,
together with the high computational cost of the sensitivities, is the
reason, why it took to long to let the solution converge completely.
Consequently, a better result than the one presented here is possible.
The modal topology optimisation shows a lot of checkerboard-like
structure, just like the unfiltered static solution. Using the solution of the static optimisation problem, the dynamic optimisation
problem always converges to the local minimum that is closest to
the static solution. This way, the solution of the modal optimisation problem is strongly influenced by the static solution. This is
the reason why the solution of the static and modal topology optimisation hardly differ.
Cyclic symmetry plays a major role for dynamic excitation. Depending on the usage, it can either create a high response to a dynamic load or can minimise it. For electric machines, the magnetic
forces have a certain cyclic symmetry that depends on the cyclic
symmetry of the electro-magnetic active parts of the generator. A
mode that does not have the same cyclic symmetry as the magnetic
forces, does, theoretically, not get excited by these forces, because
215
216
6 Optimisation
the integral over the circumference of the rotor is zero. This can be
explained by the fact that the integral over two sinus functions that
have not the same periodicity is also zero
2π
∫ sin(kφ) sin(nφ)dφ = 0
n≠k
(6.42)
0
However, no modes follows a perfect sinus function and so there
will always be a small excitation possible.
Nonetheless it is expected, that the cyclic symmetry of the optimised structure will not be the same as the cyclic symmetry of the excitation forces as this reduces the excitation. It is expected that the
solution either shows no cyclic symmetry at all or the combination
of the cyclic symmetry of the forces and structure is as odd as possible. However, there are other major influences on the cyclic symmetry of the structure. Starting with a cyclic-symmetric design,
as done for the dynamic optimisation, will decrease the number
of possible solutions, because only a local minimum close to this
design will be found. The local minimum will most likely have the
same cyclic symmetry as the initial guess. Furthermore, the mesh,
can have an influence on the cyclic symmetry, when it is too coarse
to support a non-cyclic structure, like a thin disc.
VI
Optimisation
6.4
Double Bearing Configurations
The goal of Sec. 6.3 was to find the optimal topology for the rotor support structure of single bearing generator designs. Now, the
focus shifts towards designs incorporating two bearings.
Double bearing designs have the advantage that the bearing can
have a smaller diameter, because the load of wind induced torques
on the rotor blades can be distributed on two bearings. This has
the advantage that the loads on each individual bearing are lower,
when the distance between the bearings is large enough.
This section aims to give an impression what the possibilities of
topology optimisation are when it is applied to other direct-drive
generator designs. The description of the optimised systems will be
shorter as for single-bearing designs.
6.4.1
Magnetic Load
Fig. 6.12 shows the domain for the double bearing generator. For
this model, the location of the bearings is not a priori determined.
They can be chosen freely by the algorithm. The whole area that
6.4 Double Bearing Configurations
217
ca. 2 m
ca. 5 m
ca. 2 m
−1
0
1
⋅105
Force Density [ mN2 ]
−2
−1
0
1
2
⋅104
Force Density [ mN2 ]
Static radial force density Dynamic radial force
density
The domain used for the
topology optimisation of
the double bearing
design
Figure 6.12
Force distribution and schematic
of the topology optimisation for
the double bearing design
Design Density ρf
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
is coloured orange is clamped in radial and axial direction. The
topology optimisation algorithm will chose distinct rings on this
area for the bearing location. The same is done for the connection
to the hub. The whole yellow area is clamped in tangential direction. This way the connection to the hub can be determined by the
optimisation algorithm.
Because of a lack of time, only the static optimisation has been applied. The optimisation problem is the same as for the single bearing optimisation and is defined in (6.35). The applied load in the
static and dynamic case stays the same as for the single bearing.
Because it is not necessary to compare this design to an existing
design, a coarser mesh was used, as only the optimal topology is
of interest and to what extend it differs from the optimal topology
found for single bearing designs.
Fig. 6.13 shows the result of the static topology optimisation for the
double bearing design. Although the algorithm could choose the
placement of the bearings freely along the inner cylinder (showed
in orange in Fig. 6.12), there is only one bearing present. This
shows that when only the magnetic forces are taken into account,
Figure 6.13
The design identified by the
topology optimisation for the
double bearing configuration
218
6 Optimisation
the single bearing design is superior to the double bearing design.
The connection to the hub is done by a hollow cylinder, of which
the diameter is as big as possible.
6.4.2
Including Wind Induced Forces
When looking at the topology of the turbine hub, the electro-magnetic force are not the only forces influencing the design. The wind
induced forces play a much larger role when it comes to bearing
placement. The bearing placement fundamentally influences the
optimal design of the part of the rotor holding the magnets in place.
It is, thus, not possible to look at the optimal design without taking
into account all forces acting on the rotor.
For this analysis, additional loads were added to the system. A constant torque opposing the magnetic torque of the generator was added at the places where the blade roots are located. Furthermore,
gravitational forces of the blade were added. Gravitational forces of
the structure self depend on the density and, thus, complicate the
optimisation problem significantly. Additionally, a bending moment around the horizontal axis orthogonal to the rotation axis was
added that simulates the torque that is produced whenever a blade
passes the tower.
1
Design Density ρf
0.8
Figure 6.14
The result of the topology
optimisation when wind induced
forces are taken into account
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
The optimised system includes some constraints and parts of the
objective function that are evaluated at rotation and some that are
evaluated at stand still. This is necessary, because some forces,
such as the gravitational force and some of the wind induced forces
change with the rotation of the turbine. A harmonic topology optimisation was conducted with an excitation frequency of ωext =
6.5 Conclusions & Summary
219
2πrad/s for the dynamic forces. The frequency was so low, because
its only purpose was to simulate the changing torque and the varying direction of the gravity force. Internal dynamics were not supposed to play a role for this optimisation. The static magnetic forces
are the same as in the optimisations before, defined by (5.16).
Fig. 6.14 shows the results of this optimisation, which indicates that
the two bearing should be as far apart as possible to support the
torque around the horizontal axis. To carry the weight of the blades,
the front bearing is directly underneath the blades. This way, the
gravitational forces of the blades do not contribute to the torque
that is created by the wind around the horizontal axis orthogonal
to the rotation axis. The torque is transmitted from the blades to the
magnetic active parts of the generators by a hollow cylinder with a
diameter that is as big as possible.
Conclusions & Summary
6.5
This chapter covered the improvement of the current design of the
XD-115 wind turbine generator rotor and the investigation to what
extend the developed methods can be applied to other topologies
to improve their designs.
Conclusions
Despite an rudimentary implementation of the topology optimisation algorithm, a substantial weight reduction for the generator
rotor structure of the XD-115 could be achieved. This shows that
topology optimisation can be used to improve the design of the
generator structure of direct-drive wind turbines. However, the
results should be used with caution as the optimisation is solely
based on minimising the strain energy. The design of a wind turbine generator is, however, strongly influenced by manufacturing
considerations. These are not taken into account in this optimisation. The results shown in this chapter can, thus, identify regions
in space where material will decrease the compliance of the structure. Whether it is feasible or the resulting design is economically
the best, cannot be answered.
During the application of the topology optimisation to wind turbine generators, the large number of DoFs necessary posed a substantial challenge. The structure spans a rather large volume, while
individual elements of the design are comparatively fine. This way,
a fine mesh on a large volume is needed, increasing the overall
number of DoFs. This high number of DoFs makes expensive computer hardware necessary. Approaches, such as adaptive remesh-
6.5.1
220
6 Optimisation
ing, promise an improved DoFs to volume ratio, while retaining a
high resolutions [21, 98, 144].
Some design aspects were not accounted for in this chapter. A more
thorough analysis of the dynamic behaviour can be achieved when
transient responses to wind induced forces and short-circuit failure modes are included in the optimisation. This way, the integrity
of the generator could be ensured for extreme load cases. Another
aspect, which was disregarded here, is fatigue. In wind turbines,
fatigue is one of the main driver behind design improvements. The
introduced analysis will have a direct influence on the fatigue of
the generator rotor support structure. However, the influence of
diminishing the vibration’s amplitude on the fatigue was not quantified.
The analysis and optimisation introduced here can also be applied
to the generator stator, which usually has the same light weight
requirements as the rotor. The structural modelling of the stator
is, however, more complicated, due to the lamination of the stator
back iron. It is expected that the stator weight reduction can be
substantial and even exceed the one for the rotor.
Ideally, the optimisation processes that were introduced here also
include the electro-magnetic side of the generator. Research on topology optimisation for electric machines was conducted in [26,
108]. Chapter 2 showed that the structural dynamics and the magnetic field influence each other. Therefore, the design of the generator structure and of the magneto-active parts should be conducted simultaneously. A multi-physical topology optimisation, including the electro-magnetic design and the structure of stator and
rotor, is the approach that promises the most light weight, most
efficient and most cost effective results. Ideally, the rotation of the
rotor is taken into account during the design and optimisation process.
6.5.2
Summary
This chapter showed how topology optimisation can be used to find
the optimal structural design for a certain load case and bearing
configuration in direct-drive wind turbine generators. These optimal designs do not consider manufacturability of the designs. In
a second step, a shape optimisation was performed to verify the
results found by the topology optimisation. This way the manufacturability was increased by basing the design on simple geometries.
Employing topology and shape optimisation, the mass of the rotor structure could be decreased by 37 % without any substantial
increase in compliance. Instead of decreasing the weight, the re-
6.5 Conclusions & Summary
duce weight that is not needed to reach the same compliance as
the benchmark solution can be used to improve the dynamic behaviour of the rotor structure compared to the benchmark solution.
This was done in a second analysis, improving the dynamic performance of the generator structure.
In the final part of the chapter, bearing topology including more
than one bearing were investigated, and the optimal topology for
the structure identified. However, only few cases were computed
due to limited time.
221
222
6 Optimisation
PART III
Discussion and Conclusions
Abstract:
In Chapter 5 and 6, the dynamic analysis and
optimisation of the generator structure was carried
out. This research lead to some insights in the
dynamics and interdependencies of the various
parts of a generator.
This chapter will summarise the gained insights
from the chapters before and assemble some
guidelines what to look out for and ideas for
improvements for the design of generator
structures.
Design Consideration
7
226
7 Design Considerations
7.1
Introduction
In Chapter 5, the dynamic behaviour, including excitation frequencies, of the XD-115 was analysed. The gained insights into the dynamics of a large direct-drive wind turbine generator can be used to
identify possible design flaws and short comings of the current generator design of the XD-115. In Chapter 6, several approaches were
undertaken to improve the dynamic behaviour of the structure in
generators of direct-drive wind turbines. The knowledge gained in
these two chapter makes it possible to derive design guidelines for
future generator designs.
The functions of the generator structure was already listed in Sec.
1.2.3. A ‘good’ or efficient design is achieved by fulfilling these functions. The effects discussed here will influence either one or several
of those functions and diminish the efficiency or jeopardising the
functionality of the generator by either increasing the deformation
or the weight of the generator.
The design choices of direct-drive wind turbine generators are also
determined by manufacturability and assembly concerns. These
have a large impact on the cost of a wind turbine. The focus of
the research in the previous sections was on minimising vibration
amplitudes and weight reduction. Consequently, the manufacturing and assembly cost associated with the design changes proposed
here are unknown.
7.1.1
Dynamic Load Cases
For the dynamic analysis of the turbine, two load cases have to be
considered: harmonic and transient load cases. The transient cases
include extreme wind conditions, such as the 50 year gust, and failure modes like the a short circuit failure in the generator. Theses
load cases create extreme loads for a short amount of time that lead
to a large displacement of the rotor. In this case, the maximal allowed stresses within the bearing may not be exceeded. Furthermore, the maximal displacement has to stay within the limits that
ensure the integrity of the turbine. For that, the stiffness of the
structure and the bearing needs to be sufficiently large.
For the performance under harmonic loading, fatigue plays a major role. Usually, the displacements are small compared to the displacements under transient loading, unless a resonance frequency
is excited. The fatigue on the other side, is one of the main design
considerations. The wear is usually reduced by reducing the load
of the bearing, which can be greatly influenced by the placement
and size of the bearing as well as the structural design.
7.2 The Influence of Bearings
Content of Chapter
227
7.1.2
This chapter will summarise the important influences on the dynamic behaviour of wind turbine generators and their origins. For
that, various aspects of the generators are examined. Important
points, to which attention needs to be paid during the design process, will be indicated. Further, ideas for design improvements are
given.
This chapter will start by discussing the influence of the bearings on
the structural dynamics. Although the focus of this thesis was on
magneto-mechanical coupling, the bearing influence was not completely neglected as it has an effect on the structural dynamics and
interacts with the magneto-mechanical coupling. Afterwards, the
influence of the magneto-mechanical coupling on the modal parameters, as explained in Chapter 3, and the influence of the excitation mechanism in Chapter 5 are discussed. Finally, the influence
of cyclic symmetry, which was identified in Chapter 6 is discussed.
For all these effects, important consideration affecting the design
and possible solution approaches are identified.
The Influence of Bearings
7.2
Bearings have a major impact on the structural dynamics of the
generator rotor structure. Therefore, they have to be taken into account when analysing the structural dynamics of the rotor or when
analysing magneto-mechanical coupled dynamics.
There exist a number of various bearing topologies including one,
two and even three bearings. The review paper by Stander et al.
[145] gives a good overview of the various topologies of bearings
and support structures of direct-drive wind turbine generators.
Functions of Bearings
The bearing within the generator of a wind turbine has three functions:
• Allow rotational movements of the rotor relative to the stator
of the generator with as little friction as possible.
• Transmit any forces and bending moments induced by the
wind or by gravity in axial and radial direction to the static
part of the nacelle.
• Transmit any radial or axial forces of the magnetic field in
the generator to the static part of the electric machine.
7.2.1
228
7 Design Considerations
The requirements of the bearing include that it is as stiff as possible
in radial and axial direction, in order to minimise the displacement
caused by a certain force, and to produce as little friction as possible during rotation, to maximise the efficiency of the wind turbine. Furthermore, its life time should be as long as possible, i.e.
the wear as small as possible. Some of these requirements contradict each other.
7.2.2
Magnetic Load
As shown in Sec. 6.4, the influence of the magnetic forces on the
bearing design is small as these ideally even each other out over the
circumference of the generator. Only due to imperfections, magnetic forces can act on the bearing. An eccentricity, for instance,
usually leads to a radial rotating magnetic force on the bearing.
This is different, for transient loads. Short circuit failures will apply
a radial forces as well as a huge torque to the rotor and stator of the
turbine. While the torque in such a case is of minor importance
for the bearing design, the reduced radial force at the location of
the short circuit will create a net translational force acting on the
bearing. To what extend this force is important for the bearing load
and the total displacement of the rotor needs to be clarified in future
research.
7.2.3
Wind Induced Forces
Wind induced forces and moments play a much larger role than
magnetic loads for the bearing placement and design, as these apply
large translational and rotational forces (bending moments) to the
rotor that need to be counteracted by the supporting forces in the
bearing.
As shown in Sec. 6.4, the various bearing topologies cope with
wind induced bending moments around the horizontal axis of the
turbine by increasing the distance between bearings or bearing elements. For designs including several bearing, the distance between
the bearings is increased, while for single bearing designs, the diameter of the bearing is enlarged. This increases the leverage of the
bearing forces and decreases the bearing loads, when the total wind
induced torque is constant. Consequently, the stress on the bearing
elements and, thus, the wear of the bearing is decreased. Designs
including several bearings have an advantage in this case, as the
maximum diameter of a rolling element bearing is limited. Designs
including several bearings can, thus, reach a much larger leverage
than a single bearing design.
7.3 The Influence of the Static Magnetic Field
229
Large single bearing designs with cylindrical bearing elements lead
to additional wear in the bearing, because slipping is difficult to
avoid, leading to increased friction and consequently to additional
heat loss and wear on the bearing elements as well as on the race
ways. A long distance between bearings has the disadvantage that
the nacelle gets very long or the design becomes unfeasible.
The Influence of the Static Magnetic Field
7.3
The interaction between the magnetic field and the structure of the
generator, which was thoroughly explained in Chapter 2 and 3, can
lead to various effects. Using the test set up in Chapter 3, most of
the resulting effects where explained. Chapter 5 showed that the
structural dynamics are dominant in generators of wind turbines.
However, the influence of the magnetic fields can cause the dynamics of the complete system deviate from the structural dynamics in
several ways.
For generators of wind turbines, the resulting effects of the coupling
are the same as for the test set-up in Chapter 3. The modal parameters of the coupled system differ from the modal parameters of the
uncoupled systems, when the structural dynamics interact with the
magnetic field and vice versa. This can either mean that the resonance frequencies change or that the damping increases compared to
the uncoupled systems. The modal parameters changes when the
energy transferred between structural system and magnetic field is
sufficiently large, as explained in Sec. 4.4.1. This happens when
the stiffness of the structure, and consequently the energy stored in
the vibration of the structure, is so low that the exchanged energy
represents a significant part of the total vibration energy.
The exchanged energy depends on the magnetic forces as well as
the magnetic flux density in the air gap. The latter quantity hardly
deviates from an average value over all generators, because generators are all designed to operate in saturation. The saturation limits
the magnetic flux density to a certain value.
When designing a new generator, it is thus important to check the
relation between internal forces of the structure, i.e. internal energy, and magnetic forces, i.e. energy that is exchanged between
the two physical domains.
The changing modal parameters do not necessarily pose a problem.
The change becomes important, when excitation frequencies are
7.3.1
VII
Design Considerations
Changing Modal Parameters
230
7 Design Considerations
present. In that case, it is imperative to know the modal parameters
exactly to avoid excitation.
7.3.2
Rotor-Stator Coupling
Coupling of the beam and yoke or rotor and stator was left out in
Chapter 3 and 5, respectively. The magnetic field between stator
and rotor acts as a weak spring on the structure. Modes of the rotor and stator can be coupled by this spring, when they fulfil two
conditions:
• The stator and rotor mode’s resonance frequencies are close
together.
• The shape of the stator and rotor modes are similar.
An ovalisation or bending mode of the rotor structure can thus
couple with an ovalisation or bending mode of the stator structure,
if the resonance frequencies are close together and both modes have
the same shape. When designing the generator, the resonance frequencies of stator and rotor should not coincide.
7.3.3
Nonlinear Dynamics
The magnetic field can introduce nonlinear dynamics. The coupled
system is nonlinear, as shown in Chapter 2. The linearisation introduced in that chapter is only valid around the linearisation point.
The magnetic forces, however, do not change linearly with a displacement. When the amplitude of a mode is large enough, the
nonlinear effects of the magnetic field can appear and lead to nonlinear dynamic behaviour of the structure. This can lead, for instance, to a dependency of the resonance frequency on the amplitude of the excitation.
7.3.4
Other Aspects
There are some other aspects, that are of minor importance but
should be mentioned nonetheless.
A research area, which has not been looked into, are the interaction between modes influenced by rotor dynamics and the two-way
magneto-mechanical coupling. This would answer questions about
the influences of whirl on the magneto-mechanical coupling and
the effect that the increased imbalance force caused by the magnetic field has on modes with whirl. The influence of the magnetic
7.4 Excitation by Magnetic Forces
231
field on a whirling eigenmode and other phenomena of rotor dynamics cannot be simulated by the models introduced in Chapter
2 as it does not include rotation.
Another aspect of the interaction between the magnetic field and
the structure is the effect that the structural modes have on the currents in the coils. The movement of the modes change the inductance of the coils, inducing higher harmonics in the produced currents. For direct-drive generators, this aspect is however minor, as
the full frequency converter in the turbine filters these higher harmonics. The current measurements, shown in Appendix B show
that there are no resonance frequencies present in the generator
current. Therefore, the resonance frequencies have no influence
on the current quality of the turbine. According to [38], the current
of smaller induction machines are influenced by bearing frequencies. It can be assumed that also DFIG generators are influenced by
this. It needs to be investigated if structural frequencies can also be
picked up in this case.
Excitation by Magnetic Forces
7.4
The excitation of structural modes by magnetic forces was covered
extensively in Sec. 5.3.3. It was shown that the excitation forces have
a significant impact on the vibrations of the generator structure.
For the XD-115, they are the single source of excitation.
However, the case that the resonance forces and the excitation frequencies produced by the space harmonics coincide cannot be generalised. It is caused by a combination of pole numbers, slot numbers and a certain amount of stiffness of the structure. Changing
any of these parameters may lead to a very different response of the
system to the excitation originating from magnetic forces.
Space Harmonics
The interaction of space harmonics caused by the distributions of
the coils with space harmonics of the rotor field create harmonic
forces at frequencies which are a multiple of the rotation speed.
Which harmonics are created depends on the number of slots and
poles. Besides the explanations given in Sec. 5.3, [156] investigates
this extensively. Other influences on the magnetic forces such as
loading and shape of the pole shoes are investigated in [155, 157] for
low speed direct-drive permanent magnet generators. In directdrive wind turbine generators, these force harmonics can coincide
with resonance frequencies, because the rotation frequencies are so
low.
7.4.1
232
7 Design Considerations
For the case that the force harmonics and resonance frequencies
coincide, like in the XD-115, the frequencies can be separated by
increasing the rotation frequencies. This will lead to higher excitation frequencies. At higher frequencies, local modes dominate the
dynamic behaviour. These modes are usually not excited by global
forces distributions such as the magnetic forces. It is, thus, expected
that the dynamic behaviour of the generator structure improves. In
this case, it needs to be ensured that the resonance frequencies of
the global modes are higher than the highest excitation frequencies
created by imbalances or ovalisation and lower than the lowest frequencies caused by space harmonics. These excitation frequencies
are much lower than the magnetic force frequencies in machines
with high pole numbers. A similar effect can be achieved by reducing the stiffness of the rotor, decreasing the resonance frequencies.
The pole/slot combination is usually chosen in a way that very large
least common multiples and very small greatest common dividers
are achieved. This guarantees that the torque cogging is small because this way the phase shift between neighbouring magnets is as
low as possible and, consequently, more magnets generate a torque
with a slight phase shift (see Sec. 5.3 for details). The decreased
amplitude of the torque cogging is payed for by an increase in frequencies at which torque cogging happens. In the case for the XD115, five neighbouring magnets create the same torque cogging with
a slight phase shift. This means that there are four additional frequencies at which torque cogging is visible in Fig. 5.6.
From a structural dynamic point of view, there is no reason why
torque ripple should be avoided. The mass and inertia of the rotor
is so large that the torque ripple is negligible. Furthermore, dealing
with only one frequencies makes it easier to separate the excitation
frequency from the resonance frequencies. However, for the start
up of the turbine a low torque cogging can be beneficial.
7.4.2
Time Harmonics
Another effect that can cause higher harmonics in the forces are
time harmonics. Time harmonics are created by the switching of
the frequency converter used in direct-drive wind turbines. The
switching introduces higher harmonic in the current of the turbine
and consequently also in the spatial distribution of the magnetic
field. Therefore, the effect of space harmonics and time harmonics
on the force harmonics is quite similar.
For smaller machines this effect, and its effect on vibrations in electric machines, has been studied in the past [86, 112]. In direct-drive
wind turbine generators, these effects have not been studied. The
measurements in Chapter 5 and in Appendix B indicate that for
7.5 Cyclic Symmetry
233
direct-drive wind turbines, the time harmonics are too high frequent compared to the global resonance frequencies. They do not
excite any of them.
Force Distribution
7.4.3
The method of separating the excitation and resonance frequencies from each other to avoid excitation was already mentioned in
above. In Chapter 6, another method, based on the spatial distribution, was introduced. This method uses topology optimisation
to find a design of the rotor support structure that is not excited by
the magnetic forces because of the spatial distribution of the mass
of the structure and the magnetic forces.
The method using the separation of frequencies has the drawback
that either the ideal pole/slot combination cannot be used or the
structure of the rotor and stator need to be modified that they do
not coincide with the excitation frequencies. In the second approach, the resonance frequencies are pushed either towards very
high or very low frequencies. This makes the structure of rotor and
stator either very stiff or very compliant. Both have disadvantages,
as either the structure becomes very heavy or the displacements
created by static loads become very large.
The new method to optimise the generator design, introduced in
Chapter 6, can decrease the excitation of the structure without any
of the drawbacks mentioned above.
Cyclic Symmetry
When it comes to excitation, cyclic symmetry is important. The
cyclic symmetry of the magnetic forces is determined by the cyclic symmetry of the electro-magnetic active parts of the generator.
Choosing another cyclic symmetry for the structure than for the
electro-magnetic construction, results in mode shapes that have a
different cyclic symmetry than the electro-magnetic forces. This
will most likely lead to mode shapes that are hardly excited by the
magnetic forces.
Another phenomenon which is associated with cyclic symmetry
are travelling waves in the structure. This happens when the rotor experiences a static force at a fixed position on the rotor. The
rotation of the rotor transforms this force into a harmonic load in
the rotating reference frame. For the case that the rotor is perfectly
point symmetric or cyclic symmetric, i.e. there are two modes at
the same resonance frequency that are rotated by 90○ , this force can
7.5
234
7 Design Considerations
create a travelling wave in the rotor, of which the amplitude is fixed
in the stator frame.
7.6
Summary
This chapter collects various effects and design consideration that
have an influence on the dynamics of a direct-drive wind turbine
generator. Design challenges that are linked to the dynamics of the
generator were identified and possible solutions discussed.
The chapter focuses on the influence of the bearing, the magnetomechanical coupling and symmetry within the generator. All these
aspects influence the dynamic performance significantly. Bearing
placement and type have a huge effect on the dynamic behaviour of
the turbine rotor, although they are of less importance for the magnetic loading within the generator. Depending on the stiffness of
the structure, magneto-mechanical coupling can have a major influence on the structural dynamics of the generator, as it can affect
the modal parameters as well as excite the structure. It is, therefore,
essential to be aware of the excitation frequencies as well as the exact value of the modal parameters. Cyclic symmetry is a tool that
can be used either to minimise or increase excitation. Proper use
of it is essential for an efficient wind turbine design.
Using the XD-115 as a benchmark for current generator design, it
can be concluded that there is potential for improving the design of
wind turbine generators by taking into account the above aspects
during the design phase of the turbine.
Conclusions & Outloo
8
236
8 Conclusions and Outlook
8.1
Conclusions
In Chapter 1, it was discussed that one of the challenges for the success of direct-drive wind turbines in the future is the weight reduction of the nacelle. Many approaches have been proposed how to
deal with this challenge (see Chapter 1.2.2). This thesis followed the
approach of designed flexibility. It looked at the internal dynamics of the wind turbine generator and identified to what extend a
detailed analysis of it could contribute to the goal of reducing the
weight of the nacelle. Along the way, it developed methods to predict the coupled dynamics and investigated to what extend existing methods can be applied to wind turbine generators to achieve
weight reduction.
In particular, the thesis looked at the appropriate modelling techniques to accurately simulate magneto-mechanical coupling. Afterwards it built a two-way coupled model of the generator structure and the magnetic field. The model was used to conduct an optimisation, to see to what extend the weight of the structure could
be reduced and to determine the influence of the excitation forces
created by the magnetic field on the general design trade-offs of the
wind turbine.
This section will summarise the conclusions that were drawn in the
various chapters of the thesis.
8.1.1
Modelling Dynamics of Direct-Drive Wind Turbine
Generators
Part I of this thesis covered modelling techniques and reduction
techniques of magneto-mechanical coupled systems in electric machines.
Magneto-Mechancical Coupling
In chapter 2, a method was introduced that made it possible to
identify the dynamics of the coupled mechanical and magnetic systems. A literature survey showed that, although the methods to
couple the magnetic and mechanical systems statically is well understood, the dynamic coupling of the two physics still needs to be
investigated. Furthermore, the practical implications of this coupling, a change of modal parameters, need further research. It was
argued for wind turbine generators that this coupling can be especially important. The conditions that need to be satisfied for this
coupling to play a major role, a low stiffness of the structure and
8.1 Conclusions
237
large magnetic forces, can be satisfied in compliant direct-drive
generators.
The measurements conducted in Chapter 3 identified that the accuracy of the magneto-mechanical coupled model depends largely
on accurate values of the material parameters. This is a challenge,
as usually either the mechanical or the magnetic properties of a material are known.
The scientific contributions of the Chapters 2 include the collection
of all relevant modelling techniques and formulas to form a consistent set of equations for modelling magneto-mechanical coupled vibrations in electric machines. Furthermore, it derives the damping
cross coupling terms for the coupled damping matrix of the system.
These are required to form a monolithic eigenvalue problem, which
makes it possible to predict the influence of the magnetic field onto
the modal parameters, including the modal damping. The formulation of the monolithic eigenvalue problem is validated in Chapter
3 by lab measurements.
Model Reduction Techniques
In Chapter 4, model order reduction techniques were introduce
that can address the challenge of solving large coupled problems,
as those that arise when analysing wind turbine generators in 3D.
The techniques introduced in Chapter 4 can reduce computation
time significantly and accelerate the analysis process of magnetomechanical coupled systems. The reduction techniques can also be
used for reducing the computational cost of purely magnetic systems. It was shown that they are especially effective for electric
machines. However, for this application they lack the capability
of taking nonlinear effects such as saturation and hysteresis into
account.
The scientific contributions of Chapter 4 includes the introduction
of modal analysis for quasi-static magnetic fields and the physical
interpretation of its modal parameters. Furthermore, the investigation to what extend models of quasi-static magnetic fields can
be reduced using reduction methods based on modal analysis. Finally, this chapter developed ideas how the reduction methods can
be extended to magneto-mechanical coupled systems.
Application to Wind Turbine Generators
Part II of the thesis focused on the application of the methods introduced in Part I and on improving the design of the structure of
8.1.2
238
8 Conclusions and Outlook
direct-drive wind turbine generators. Some major design improvements could be identified.
Dynamics of the XD-115
Applying the methods introduced in Chapter 2 to the XD-115 identified that the rotor structure is so heavy and stiff that the two-way
coupling plays no role. Consequently, a one-way coupled analysis
was conducted, for which the magnetic forces were seen as excitation forces.
The thorough dynamic analysis of the XD-115 generator showed
that the generator is well designed, dynamically seen. Although
the magnetic forces show a significant fluctuation locally, the resonances of the structure are not significantly excited. The dynamic
forces created by space harmonics and torque cogging were identified as crucial, as they are in the same frequency range as global
resonance frequencies. Measurements confirmed that these resonance frequencies do get excited, but the maximum amplitude is low
and, consequently, the vibration pose no problem for the functionality of the turbine’s generator. However, it was impossible to find
the reason why certain modes are excited while other modes are
not. It was assumed that this is caused by imperfections or manufacturing tolerance, but further research is necessary.
The model of the generator was validated using vibration measurements. These measurements were conducted in-situ, which posed
some challenges, such as the large mass that needed to be excited.
The use of a mix of experimental and operational modal analyses
techniques eventually yielded results that could validate the generator model.
The scientific contributions of Chapter 5 include a two-way coupled
modal analysis of an electric machine and, consequently, the identification to what extend the modal parameters change due to the
magneto-mechanical coupling. Furthermore, this chapter conducted a thorough one-way coupled dynamic analysis of a generator of
a direct-drive wind turbine, identifying excitation frequencies and
their effect on the structure of the generator. The simulation result
were validated by in-situ vibration measurements. During the vibration measurements, various excitation techniques were investigated for the generator of direct-drive wind turbine generators.
Topology Optimisation of Wind Turbine Generators
The goal of the optimisation in Chapter 6 was the improvement
of the current design of the XD-115 as well as looking at other to-
8.2 Research Outlook
239
pologies and identifying possible design improvements for them.
For this analysis, the magnetic force distribution from Chapter 5
was used as load case for a topology and shape optimisation of the
generator’s rotor structure. It was shown that topology optimisation in combination with shape optimisation is a suitable method
to identify ideal designs for the generator structures of direct-drive
wind turbine generators.
The topology and shape optimisation showed that the generator of
the XD-115 is rather heavy and could be lighten without any compromises for the performance. The topology optimisation indicated that a weight reduction of 37 % is possible. Furthermore, the
dynamic behaviour, i.e. the amplitude of the response of the system
to magnetic loads encountered during the operations of the turbine, could be significantly improved without increasing the weight
of the generator.
The optimisation of the single-bearing design, as well as other generator topologies, singled out the optimal shape of the rotor and
identified some ideas for design improvements. However, it was
shown that the optimal design is very sensitive to the boundary
conditions, such as bearing placement and exact loading. Further,
it was identified that the magnetic forces only have an influence on
the design of the the rotor between bearing and magnetic-active
material. The design of the hub and in particular bearing placement and dimensions depend entirely on the wind induced forces.
The scientific contributions of this Chapter 6 includes the investigation to what extend topology optimisation can be sued to improve the design of wind turbine generator structures. Topology
optimisation make it possible to realise the idea of minimising not
the torque ripple, but the vibrations that torque ripple causes in
the structure. Finally, it investigates to what extend an dynamic
analysis can lead to an improved dynamic performance of directdrive generator structures without compromising on the functionality and identifies a methodology how to identify the optimal static
and dynamic design for direct-drive wind turbine generator structures.
Research Outlook
This thesis covered various topics that are important for the design
improvement of the generator structure. Because of time limitations, it did not go deeper into the respective fields it covers. Further research, to improve the various methods introduced in this
thesis, is of course desirable.
8.2
240
8 Conclusions and Outlook
8.2.1
Calculation Methods
The modelling of magneto-mechanical coupling, which was introduced in Chapter 2 and the model reduction techniques introduced
in Chapter 4 cover the basics of dynamic analysis and model reduction of systems including magneto-mechanical coupling. Further
research to improve the accuracy and include more details can be
conducted. In particular the following points present themselves
for further research on magneto-mechanical coupled dynamics:
• Include the rotation of the rotor into the modal analysis by
using so called pseudo modes [85, 87]. This method would
allow the analysis of the generator dynamics under rotation.
Taking the armature field into account would be possible and
potential influences of the structural vibrations onto the generated currents would be visible.
• Include magnetic saturation into the coupled modal analysis
to account for the nonlinear magnetic material behaviour.
This is rather difficult as modal analysis is based on linear
superposition which is not possible anymore for nonlinear
systems.
• The armature field does have an effect on the modal parameters of the system, although it was neglected in this thesis.
Including the strengthening of the field due to the coils in the
stator, is implemented easily. The exact effects the rotating
magnetic field has on the dynamics is more complex and requires extensive research.
• Explore the influence of stator-rotor coupling. In this thesis,
the stator was assumed to be rigid. In a real turbine, however, the stator is just as flexible as the rotor and contributes
further. On top of that, modes in the stator and rotor could
couple through the magnetic field, and create new resonance
frequencies. This analysis can be conducted with the modelling techniques introduced in Chapter 2. However, the necessary models would be too large to be solved without reduction techniques.
• Investigate nonlinearity of modes caused by the magnetic
forces. Changing magnetic forces act as a nonlinear spring
for the mechanical system, even when the materials in the
magnetic field behave linearly. Consequently, the coupled
modes should be nonlinear too. To what extend this effect is
important and what kind of nonlinearity is created, remains
unknown.
• Incorporate a better bearing model that includes nonlinear
contact mechanics. In this thesis, the bearing model is rather
8.2 Research Outlook
241
simple. It is approximated by a constant stiffness. The bearing is however a much more complex system, that includes
nonlinear contact dynamics.
• The lamination in the stator is not an isotropic materials.
Neither is it an orthotropic material. Further research is necessary to identify modelling methods that are able to accurately simulate this highly complex system. First approaches
to this topic were introduced in Sec. 1.3.3.
Model Reduction
8.2.2
• The largest drawback of the methods described in Chapter
4 is their inability to handle saturation and hysteresis losses.
This results from the modal analysis which is at the heart of
all these reduction methods. Further methods to cope with
the nonlinear effects need to be developed. For magnetomechanical systems, an approach using modes and modal
derivatives is beneficial as it integrates nicely with the reduction methods used for the structure.
• As mentioned in Sec. 4.6.1, it is expected that a mixed formulation of model order reduction techniques will yield good
results. The dynamic of the structure is dominant, while the
dynamic of the magnetic field has a rather limited influence.
Therefore, it seems advantageous to use the CB method for
the structural part of the system and the DCB method for
the magnetic part. How well this reduction method simulates the coupled system needs to be researched.
Optimisation
The main challenge during the optimisation was the number of
DoFs necessary to simulate the structure. Consequently, the proposed future research is aiming at overcoming this.
• Include cyclic symmetry in modal topology optimisation.
Cyclic symmetry is a key property of electric machines and
can be used to reduce the number of DoFs in the system.
The Floquet theory is a method that allows to do this [85,
87]. This method can also be used in modal topology optimisation to reduce the DoFs
• As mentioned in Chapter 7, looking at the mechanical and
the magnetic domain simultaneously in the design phase of
the generator can alleviate many vibration problems. The
8.2.3
242
8 Conclusions and Outlook
ideal solution for this, would be a coupled topology optimisation taking both domains into account. There are research
approaches for topology optimisation for the electro-magnetic part of electric machines [24, 88].
• Include transient optimisation in the optimisation process.
The optimisation methodology introduced in Chapter 6 only
includes harmonic excitation frequencies. The performance
of the structure under transient loads cannot be simulated
using this method. Transient topology optimisation is necessary to reproduce the displacements seen during a 50 year
gust or a short circuit in the generator.
Appendix
’Ich dehne diesen Band mehr aus, da die deutschen Hunde den Wert
der Bücher nach dem Kubikinhalt schätzen.’
Marx to Engels, 1862 (Marx-Engels Werke 30, p 248)
Magnetic Energy in Structur
a
246
Appenix
At the heart of the magneto-mechanical coupling lies the principle
of virtual work as it is used to derive the mechanical force from the
change of the magnetic energy. In this section, the equations used
to describe the change of the magnetic energy will be derived. The
derivation is based on the papers [2] and [131] where the same derivations was done for electro static fields. Fundamental for this
derivation is the work in [62] as it derives the change of the magnetic flux density and magnetic field under deformation.
We will consider an infinitesimal small domain Ω with the volume
V within a deformable structure. This domain can be either a surface in 2D or a volume in 3D. The derivation can be done in both
spaces. For simplicity we will use a 2D element. Using the principal of virtual work the force can be calculated that acts on the
underlying structure
⃗mag
δWmag = δ⃗
u⋅F
(A.1)
where δ⃗
u, denotes the virtual deformation that causes the change
of the energy, is defined by
⃗x = δ⃗
u(⃗ξ) + ⃗ξ
(A.2)
The Jacobian of the coordinate transform from ⃗ξ to ⃗x reads as
∂x
J = ∇ξ,η ⃗x =
⎛ ∂ξ
∂y
⎝ ∂ξ
∂x
∂η ⎞
∂y
∂η ⎠
=
∂δu
⎛1 + ∂ξ x
∂δu
⎝ ∂η y
∂δux
⎞
∂η
∂δu
1 + ∂η y ⎠
= I + ∇ξ δ⃗
u
where∇ξ denotes a spatial derivative with respect to the ⃗ξ coordinate frame. The inverse can be written as
∂ξ
⎛ ∂x
J−1 = ∇x,y ⃗ξ = ∂η
⎝ ∂x
∂ξ
∂y ⎞
∂η
∂y ⎠
∂δu
=
⎛1 − ∂x ξ
∂δu
⎝ − ∂x η
∂δuξ
∂y ⎞
∂δu
1 − ∂y η ⎠
−
Assuming small deformations, we can assume
∂ξ ∂y
=
∂y ∂ξ
With this assumption
J−1 ≈ (I − ∇ξ δ⃗
u)
Derivation of Maxwell’s Stress Tensor
As shown in [62], the magnetic field and magnetic flux density behave differently under deformation. For the magnetic field strength
the change of of the vector for a deformation δ⃗
u is
⃗−B
⃗ tr(∇δ⃗
⃗
= ∇δ⃗
uB
u)
δB∣
δΦ=0
(A.3)
Appendix A - Magnetic Energy in Deformable Structure
247
For the magnetic field on the other side the variation comes down
to
⃗
⃗
δH∣
= −∇δ⃗
u⋅H
(A.4)
δI=0
This difference for the variation of the magnetic field and the magnetic flux density will result in the different formulation for Maxwell’s Stress Tensor in the case of magnetised material.
It is now possible to calculate the variation of the energy and coenergy based on (A.3) and (A.4). Depending on the material in
question the energy and co-energy equations vary. For the magnetic energy, the total flux should be held constant as this is an independent variable. Therefore, (A.3) is used to compute the energy
change as (A.3) was computed with the total flux held constant. For
a linear magnetic material this yields for the energy
⃗TB
⃗
⃗TB
⃗TB
⃗
⃗
B
B
B
V) = δ (
) V + δV (
)
2μ
2μ
2μ
⃗TB
⃗
⃗ T δB
⃗
B
B
V + δV (
)
=
μ
2μ
δWmag ∣δΦ=0 = δ (
(A.5)
δV denotes the change of the domain’s volume. Neglecting second
order terms it can be written as
δV = tr(∇δ⃗
u)V
(A.6)
Inserting (A.6) into (A.5) yields
⃗TB
⃗
⃗T
B
B
⃗−B
⃗ tr(∇δ⃗
[∇δ⃗
V
uB
u)] + tr(∇δ⃗
u)
μ
2μ
⃗ T ∇δ⃗
⃗
⃗TB
⃗
B
uB
B
=V
− tr(∇δ⃗
u)
V
μ
2μ
δWmag = V
(A.7)
Using the vector identity
C(AB)D = CD ∶ AB
(A.8)
(A.7) can be written as
⃗TB
⃗
⃗B
⃗T
B
B
−I
)
μ
2μ
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
δWmag = V∇⃗
u∶(
(A.9)
T
where the part in the parenthesis denotes Maxwell’s stress tensor.
⃗ in (A.4)
Starting from the co-energy and using the variation for H
will yield the same result for Maxwell’s stress tensor in linear ma-
248
Appenix
terials.
μ ⃗T ⃗
HV)
δW′mag ∣δI=0 = δ ( H
2
⃗ T δH
⃗ + μV H
⃗
⃗ T Hδ
= μVH
2
μV ⃗ T ⃗
⃗ T (∇δ⃗
⃗ + tr(∇δ⃗
H
= −μVH
u)H
u) H
2
⃗ T (∇δ⃗
⃗ + 1 tr(∇δ⃗
⃗
⃗ TH
= μV(−H
u)H
u)H
2
(A.10)
This yields for Maxwell’s stress tensor
⃗ TH
⃗
H
)
2
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹¸¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶
⃗H
⃗ T − Iμ
δW′mag ∣δI=0 = −V∇⃗
u ∶ (μH
(A.11)
T
which yields the same expression for Maxwell’s stress tensor as in
⃗ = μH.
⃗
(A.9), when inserting B
Discretisation of Magnetic Forces
The discrete form of the magnetic force can be computed in two
ways using Maxwell’s stress tensor. The first way is by multiplying
the tensor with a vector normal to a surface, which yield the force
on that surface. This was introduced in (2.151).
The other way is to employ the principle of virtual work locally.
(A.9) can be written in a way that the displacements gradients are
at the front of the equations. For a 2D system this yields:
δWmag = −⃗fmag ⋅ δ⃗
u = ∫ ∇δ⃗
u ∶ T dΩ
Ω
(A.12)
By By Bx Bx ∂v
1
∂v
∂u
Bx Bx By By ∂u
= ∫ (
−
)
+ Bx By
+ By Bx
+(
−
)
dΩ
μ
2
2 ∂ξ
∂η
∂ξ
2
2 ∂η
Ω
where Bx and By denote the x and y components of the magnetic
flux density.
This matrix can be written as a vector multiplication:
⎡ ∂u ⎤T ⎡B2 − B2 ⎤
⎢ ∂ξ ⎥ ⎢ x
y⎥
⎢ ∂u ⎥
1 ⎢⎢ ∂η ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ 2Bx By ⎥⎥
⎥ dΩ
δWmag = ∫
∂v ⎥ ⎢
2μ ⎢⎢ ∂ξ
⎥ ⎢ 2Bx By ⎥
Ω
⎢ ∂v ⎥ ⎢⎢B2 − B2 ⎥⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎣ y
x⎦
⎣ ∂η ⎦
(A.13)
Approximating the displacement gradient by using the finite element method yields for the gradient vector.
Appendix A - Magnetic Energy in Deformable Structure
249
⎡qu a ⎤
∂Nb
∂Nc
⎡ ∂u ⎤ ⎡⎢ ∂Na
0
0
0 ⎤⎥ ⎢⎢ q ⎥⎥
∂ξ
∂ξ
⎢ ∂ξ ⎥ ⎢ ∂ξ
⎥ ⎢ v a⎥
⎢ ∂v ⎥ ⎢
∂Nb
∂Nc ⎥ ⎢
∂Na
⎥
0
0
⎢ ∂ξ ⎥ ⎢ 0
∂ξ
∂ξ
∂ξ ⎥ ⎢qu b ⎥
⎢ ∂u ⎥ ≈ ⎢ ∂N
⎥
⎥
⎢
∂N
∂N
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ a
c
b
0
0
0 ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ qv b ⎥⎥
⎢ ∂η ⎥ ⎢ ∂η
∂η
∂η
⎢ ∂v ⎥ ⎢
∂Nb
∂Na
∂Nc ⎥ ⎢ qu c ⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 0
⎥⎢ ⎥
0
0
⎣ ∂η ⎦ ⎣
∂η
∂η
∂η ⎦ ⎢
⎥
´¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¸¹¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¹ ¶ ⎣ qv c ⎦
B2u
²
(A.14)
qu
for triangular 2D elements. In (A.14), Na , Nb and Nc are the components of the shape functions defined in (2.104) and qu a , qu b , qu c ,
qv a , qv b , qv c the nodal values for the displacement in ξ and η-direction at the three nodes of the triangular element. (A.14) defines the
matrix B2u which contains the derivatives of the shape functions,
which will be widely used in the following derivations for the various coupling matrices.
Then (A.13) can be written as
δWmag ≈
1
T
∫ qu B2u F(qA )dΩ
2μ
(A.15)
Ω
where F denotes a vector containing various products of the magnetic flux density components
F = [B2x − B2y
2Bx By
2Bx By
−B2x + B2y ]
T
(A.16)
The magnetic force can then be written as
Fmag = −
∂Wmag
1
= − ∫ BT2u F(qA )dΩ
∂qu
2μ
(A.17)
Ω
Maxwell’s Stress Tensor in Permanent Magnets
The derivation for permanent magnets is analog. Because the formulation for the energy stored in permanent magnets follows (2.10)
the resulting stress tensor will deviate from (A.9). Starting from the
energy for permanent magnets as defined in (2.10)
Wpm = (
⃗r B
⃗TB
⃗TB
⃗r
⃗TB
⃗ B
B
+ r −
)V
2μ
2μ
μ
(A.18)
250
Appenix
Taking the variation for a virtual displacement δ⃗
u yields
⃗TB
⃗
⃗ T δB
⃗
B
B
V + δV
μ
2μ
T
⃗TB
⃗r
⃗ δB
⃗r
B
B
V + δV r
+ r
μ
2μ
T ⃗
T⃗
⃗
⃗ T δB
⃗r
⃗
B
B Br Br δB
−
V−
V
− δV
μ
μ
μ
δWpm =
(A.19)
The change of the energy of the permanent magnets under deformation depends on the behaviour of the magnetic flux density, the
magnetic field and the remanence flux density under deformation.
The behaviour of the first two variables was established in (2.4.5)
and in [62]. The behaviour of the remanence flux density is not finally settled. It could either behave like the magnetic flux density or
it could behave like the magnetic field. Therefore, the two possible
case are defined as
⎧
⃗r − B
⃗ r tr(∇δ⃗
⎪∇δ⃗
uB
u)
⃗r = ⎪
⎨
δB
⃗
⎪
−∇δ⃗
u
B
⎪
r
⎩
case 1
case 2
(A.20)
In this section the operator δ will be used for both cases. Which of
the two cases is used will become apparent from the text.
Applying the first case to (A.19) yields
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗
⃗2
⃗2
B
u)B
B
B
− Vtr(∇δ⃗
u) + Vtr(δ∇⃗
u)
μ
μ
2μ
2
T
⃗
⃗2
⃗
⃗
B
B
B (δ∇⃗
u)Br
− Vtr(∇δ⃗
u) r + Vtr(δ∇⃗
u) r
+V r
μ
2μ
μ
T
T
T
⃗ (δ∇⃗
⃗ (δ∇⃗
⃗r
⃗TB
⃗
⃗r
⃗ B
⃗r
B
B
u)B
B
u)B
B
−V r
−V
+ 2tr(δ∇⃗
u)
− tr(δ∇⃗
u)
μ
μ
μ
μ
δWpm = V
(A.21)
which yields for Maxwell’s Stress Tensor:
⃗rB
⃗ Tr B
⃗B
⃗T B
⃗rB
⃗T
⃗TB
⃗TB
⃗r B
⃗TB
⃗ B
⃗r
⃗B
⃗T B
B
B
+
− r −
− I(
+ r −
)
μ
μ
μ
μ
2μ
2μ
μ
⃗ − B)
⃗ 2
⃗ Tr B
⃗T
⃗rB
⃗B
⃗T B
⃗rB
⃗B
⃗T B
(B
B
+
− r −
−I
=
μ
μ
μ
μ
2μ
T=
(A.22)
⃗ and the remanence
For the second case the magnetic flux density, B,
⃗
flux density, Br behave differently under deformation.
Appendix A - Magnetic Energy in Deformable Structure
251
⃗2
⃗2
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗
B
B
B
u)B
− Vtr(∇δ⃗
u) + Vtr(δ∇⃗
u)
μ
μ
2μ
2
T
⃗
⃗
⃗
B
B (δ∇⃗
u)Br
+ Vtr(δ∇⃗
u) r
−V r
μ
2μ
⃗TB
⃗r
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗r
⃗TB
⃗
⃗r
B
B
B
u)B
B
u)B
− tr(δ∇⃗
u)
−V r
+V
+ tr(δ∇⃗
u)
μ
μ
μ
μ
2
T
⃗
⃗
⃗
B
B (δ∇⃗
u)B
− Vtr(δ∇⃗
u)
=V
μ
2μ
⃗2
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗r
B
B
u)B
+ Vtr(δ∇⃗
u) r
−V r
μ
2μ
δWpm = V
(A.23)
which results in the following expression for Maxwell’s stress tensor
T=
⃗B
⃗T B
⃗rB
⃗ Tr
⃗TB
⃗TB
⃗r
⃗ B
B
B
−
− I(
− r )
μ
μ
2μ
2μ
(A.24)
Discretisation of Magnetic Forces in Permanent
Magnets
Like for linear magnetic materials, the forces for permanent magnets can be discretised in two ways. The first one is the multiplication of Maxwell’s stress tensor with a normal. This method was
introduced in (2.151).
The other one, which is followed here, uses the local principle of
virtual work. In the above section, the continuous formulation for
Maxwell’s stress tensor was derived. For the case the the remanence
magnetisation behaves like the magnetic flux density (case one in
(A.20)), (A.21) is yielded.
Reorganising (A.21) yields
⃗TB
⃗
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗
B
B
u)B
V − tr(δ∇⃗
u)
V
μ
2μ
⃗TB
⃗r
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗r
B
B
u)B
V − tr(δ∇⃗
u) r V
+ r
μ
2μ
T
T
⃗
⃗ T B⃗r
⃗
⃗
⃗
B (δ∇⃗
B
u)B
B (δ∇⃗
u)Br
V− r
V + tr(δ∇⃗
u)
V
−
μ
μ
μ
δWpm = −fmag δ⃗
u=
The first two and terms in (A.25) yield again (A.17). The third and
fourth terms in (A.25) is the same as the first and second term with
⃗ r instead of B.
⃗ So these two terms can be discretised as
B
(A.25)
252
Appenix
⃗ Tr (δ∇⃗
⃗r
⃗TB
⃗r
B
u)B
B
1
T T
− tr(δ∇⃗
u) r ≈
∫ qu B2u FPM (qA )dΩ
μ
2μ
2μ
(A.26)
Ω
with
FPM (qA ) = [B2rx − B2ry
2Brx Bry
T
B2ry − B2rx ]
2Brx Bry
(A.27)
The last two terms can be discretised by
−
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗ T B⃗r
⃗
⃗ T (δ∇⃗
⃗r B
B
1
u)B
B
u)B
− r
+ tr(δ∇⃗
u)
≈ − ∫ qTu BT2u FPM2 (qA )dΩ
μ
μ
μ
μ
(A.28)
Ω
with
FPM2 (qA ) = [Brx Bx − Bry By
Brx By + Bry Bx
Bx Bry + Brx By
T
Bry By − Brx Bx )]
(A.29)
Bringing the three terms together yields
δFmag = −
1
T
∫ B2u F(qA )dΩ
2μ
Ω
1
T
−
∫ B2u FPM (qA )dΩ
2μ
(A.30)
Ω
+
1
T
∫ B2u FPM2 (qA )dΩ
μ
Ω
for the magnetic forces on permanent magnets.
For the second case, the remanence flux density behaves like the
magnetic field, and the ’imaginary’ currents in the permanent magnet are held constant. Starting from (A.23), the discretisation is
analog to the first case, yielding
δWmag =
1
∫ qu B2u F(qA )dΩ
2μ
Ω
1
+
∫ qu B2u FPM (qA )dΩ
2μ
(A.31)
Ω
The coupling matrices for permanent magnet materials can be derived analog to the derivation for the linear magnetic material in,
starting from (A.21) and (A.23).
Derivation of Coupling Matrices
In the last section, Maxwells stress tensor was derived from the
principle of virtual work. For the monolithic formulation in (2.170),
mag
the stiffness coupling matrices, KuA , KAu and Kuu , need to be derived from the energy. This can be done in two ways. The first way,
Appendix A - Magnetic Energy in Deformable Structure
253
the one most FE packages use, takes the force computed according
to (2.100) and differentiate it once with respect to qA . Here, the approach of the local virtual work is taken, which was introduced in
Sec. 2.5.8. As stated in (2.125) KuA can be computed by deriving the
magnetic energy once with respect to qA and once with respect to
qu .
∂Fmag
1
T ∂F
=
dΩ
(A.32)
KuA =
∫ B2u
∂qA
2μ
∂qA
Ω
defining F2 as
F2 =
∂F
B
=[ x
⃗
−B
y
∂B
By
Bx
By
Bx
−Bx
]
By
(A.33)
(A.32) can be written as
KuA = −
⃗
1
∂B
T
dΩ
∫ B2u F2
2μ
∂qA
(A.34)
Ω
introducing the approximation (2.135) yields
KuA =
1
T
∫ B2u F2 BA dΩ
2μ
(A.35)
Ω
which is the same equation as (2.158).
Analog, KAu can be derived by first differentiating Wmag with respect to qA yielding the internal current densities, and then taking
the derivative with respect to qu .
mag
The other stiffness coupling matrix, Kuu is derived by taking the
derivative of the magnetic energy with respect to virtual displacements twice. For that, a second virtual displacement
⃗ξ = δ2 u
⃗ +X
⃗
⃗(X)
(A.36)
⃗ +X
⃗
⃗(X)
⃗(⃗ξ) + δ2 u
⃗ + ⃗ξ = δ1 u
⃗x = δ1 u
(A.37)
is introduced, so that
⃗.
To avoid confusion, the first virtual displacement is denoted by δ1 u
It is then possible to write
2
⃗ Kmag
⃗ = δ2 (δ1 Wmag )
δ1 u
uu δ u
mag
(A.38)
The matrix Kuu can thus be derived by deriving how the energy
change of the first displacement changes with the second displacement. For that the change of the first displacement with respect
to the second displacement is needed. Using the Jacobian of the
254
Appenix
second displacement, defined by J2 = I+∇δ⃗
u, this can be expressed
by
⃗) = (∇X δ1 u
⃗) − (∇ξ δ1 u
⃗)
δ2 (∇δ1 u
1
⃗)
⃗) − (∇ξ δ1 u
= J2 (∇ξ δ u
(A.39)
2
1
⃗)(∇ξ δ u
⃗)
= (∇X δ u
⃗)(∇ξ δ1 u
⃗)
= J2 (∇ξ δ2 u
neglecting higher order terms and retaining only squared derivatives yields
⃗) = (∇ξ δ2 u
⃗)(∇ξ δ1 u
⃗)
δ2 (∇δ1 u
⎡ ∂δ1 ux ∂δ2 ux ∂δ1 uy ∂δ2 ux
+
⎢
= ⎢⎢ ∂δ∂ξ1 u ∂δ∂ξ2 uy ∂δ∂ξ1 uy ∂δ∂η2 uy
⎢ ∂ξ x ∂ξ + ∂ξ ∂η
⎣
∂δ1 ux ∂δ2 ux
∂η
∂ξ
2
∂δ1 ux ∂δ uy
∂η
∂ξ
+
+
∂δ1 uy ∂δ2 ux ⎤
⎥
∂η
∂η ⎥
∂δ1 uy ∂δ2 uy ⎥
⎥
∂η
∂η ⎦
(A.40)
For the change of the trace of the first displacement, the derivation
is analog.
⃗))
⃗) = tr(δ(∇ξ δ1 u
δ2 tr(∇ξ δ1 u
2
⃗)(∇ξ δ1 u
⃗))
= tr((∇X δ u
=
2
1
2
1
∂δ2 ux ∂δ1 ux ∂δ2 ux ∂δ uy ∂δ1 ux ∂δ uy ∂δ uy ∂δ uy
+
+
+
)
∂ξ
∂ξ
∂η
∂ξ
∂η
∂ξ
∂η ∂η
(A.41)
with the second displacement. Furthermore, the change of the domain’s volume with respect to the displacement δ2 u is
⃗)
δ2 V = Vtr(∇X δ2 u
⃗)
= Vtr(J2 ∇ξ δ2 u
(A.42)
Starting at the expression for the perturbed energy for a displacement (A.7) and introducing the other perturbation yields
δ2 (δ1 Wmag ) = δ2 (V
⃗ T (∇δ1 u
⃗
⃗⋅B
⃗
⃗)B
B
B
⃗)
− tr(∇δ1 u
V)
μ
2μ
(A.43)
developing (A.43) by terms, keeps the formulas managable. The
first term in (A.43) yields:
1st term (A.43) =
δ2 V ⃗ T
2⃗ T
⃗ (A.44)
⃗ B
⃗ T (∇δ1 u
⃗ B
⃗ T δ2 (∇δ1 u
⃗
⃗ )T δ 2 B
⃗)B+V
⃗)B+V
⃗)B+V(δ
B) (∇δ1 u
B (∇δ1 u
2μ
Inserting (A.40), (A.42) and (A.7) into (A.44) yields:
V
⃗
⃗ T (∇ξ δ1 u
⃗ )B
⃗)B
[tr(∇X δ2 u
2μ
2
⃗
⃗ − Btr(∇
⃗
⃗ )B
⃗))T (∇ξ δ1 u
⃗ )B
+ ((∇X δ2 u
Xδ u
1st term (A.43) =
⃗
⃗ T (∇δ2ξ u
⃗ )B
⃗)(∇ξ δ1 u
+B
2
⃗ T (∇ξ δ1 u
⃗ − Btr(∇
⃗
⃗)T ((∇X δ2 u
⃗ )B
⃗))]
+B
Xδ u
(A.45)
Appendix A - Magnetic Energy in Deformable Structure
255
⃗ and neglecting second order terms,
⃗ = J2 ∇ ξ δ 2 u
Inserting ∇X δ2 u
(A.45) can be rewritten as a matrix vector multiplication, where
⃗) are expressed as vectors according to (A.14).
⃗) and (∇δ1 u
(∇δ2 u
⎡ 4B2ξ
⎢
⎢ 0
V
⎢
1
st
⃗) ⎢
1 term (A.43) =
(∇δ u
⎢2Bξ Bη
2μ
⎢
⎢ −2B2
⎣
η
2Bξ Bη
2B2ξ
2(B2ξ + B2η )
4Bξ Bη
4Bξ Bη
2(B2ξ + B2η )
2B2η
2Bξ Bη
−2B2ξ ⎤⎥
2Bξ Bη ⎥⎥
⃗)
⎥ (∇δ2 u
0 ⎥⎥
4B2η ⎥⎦
(A.46)
The second term of (A.43) reads
⃗)
2nd term (A.43) = δ2 (−Vtr(∇δ1 u
⃗⋅B
⃗
B
)
2μ
V
⃗⋅B
⃗
⃗)B
⃗)tr(∇δ2 u
tr(∇δ1 u
2μ
V
⃗
⃗ T δ2 B
⃗)B
− tr(∇δ1 u
μ
V ⃗T ⃗ 2
⃗)
Bδ tr(∇δ1 u
− B
2μ
=−
(A.47)
Inserting (A.7) and (A.41) into (A.47) yields
V
⃗⋅B
⃗
⃗)tr(∇δ2 u
⃗)B
tr(∇δ1 u
2μ
V
2
⃗ − Btr(∇δ
⃗
⃗ T ((∇δ2 B
⃗))
⃗)B
u
tr(∇δ1 u
μ
V ⃗T ⃗
⃗))
⃗)(∇δ1 u
B Btr((∇δ2 u
2μ
V
⃗⋅B
⃗
⃗)tr(∇δ2 u
⃗ )B
tr(∇δ1 u
2μ
V
⃗ T (∇δ2 u
⃗
⃗)B
⃗ )B
tr(∇δ1 u
μ
V ⃗T ⃗
⃗)(∇δ1 u
⃗))
B Btr((∇δ2 u
2μ
2nd term (A.43) = −
−
−
=
−
−
(A.48)
⃗) in
⃗) and (∇δ1 u
This can be rewritten as a multiplication of (∇δ2 u
vector form with a matrix F3 , which contains the components of
the magnetic flux density
⎡ −2B2ξ
⎢
⎢
0
V
⎢
⃗) ⎢
(∇δ1 u
2nd term (A.43) =
⎢
2μ
⎢ 20 2
⎢−B + B
⎣ ξ
η
−2Bξ Bη
0
−B2ξ − B2η
−2Bξ Bη
−2Bξ Bη
−B2ξ − B2η
0
−2Bξ Bη
B2ξ − B2η ⎤⎥
0 ⎥⎥
⃗)
⎥ (∇δ2 u
0 ⎥⎥
−2B2η ⎥⎦
Adding (A.49) and (A.46) yields the final result which can be used
(A.49)
256
Appenix
mag
to determine Kuu as shown in (2.159)
⎡ 2B2x
0
⎢
2
⎢
0
2B
V
⎢
1
2
x
⃗
⃗
⃗Kmag
⎢
(∇
δ
u
)
∇
δ
∇ξ δ 1 u
u
=
ξ
ξ
2
uu
⎢ 2Bx By
B
+
B2y
2μ
x
⎢ 2
⎢−B − B2 2Bx By
⎣ x
y
1
T mag
≈
∫ B2u Kuu B2u dΩ
2μ
Ω
2Bx By
B2x + B2y
2B2y
0
−B2x − B2y ⎤⎥
2Bx By ⎥⎥
⃗)
⎥ (∇ξ δ2 u
⎥
0
⎥
2B2y ⎥⎦
(A.50)
Additional Measurement
b
258
Appenix
During the operational measurements, other quantities related to
the generator were measured. It was investigated, how the bearing
monitoring could be improved. For that, the current output of the
generator as well as vibration measurements on the static side of
the bearings, were conducted.
1,000
Time [s]
800
600
400
200
0
0
4
2
−4
−2
6
8
Normalised Frequency [-]
0
2
4
log(Acceleration) [
Figure B.1
Spectrogram of the current during
the operation of the turbine
6
m
]
s2
10
8
14
12
10
12
14
Fig. B.1 shows the spectrogram of one phase of the current, recorded during operation. At the beginning and end of the measurement, the turbine started up and shut down. The fundamental
current frequency is clearly visible. At higher frequencies, the time
harmonic of the frequency converter can be seen.
No structural frequencies are visible in the current measurements.
The displacements of the structure are either so small that they play
no role or the controller of the frequency converter reacts too fast.
In either case, this measurement supports the theory that the two
way coupling can be neglected for the XD-115.
Fig. B.2 shows the vibration measurement on the static side of the
bearing. In the lower frequency range, the characteristic bearing
frequencies, such as ball pass frequency, can be measured. It is also
possible to measure the first mode at ω/ωref = 1. Therefore, it would
be possible to conduct a structural monitoring of the rotor, with
sensors that are placed on the stator.
In the higher frequency range, the vibrations induced by the frequency harmonic can be measured again. The switching frequen-
Appendix B - Measurements
259
1,000
Time [s]
800
600
400
200
0
0
−10
4
2
−8
−6
6
8
Normalised Frequency [-]
−4
−2
log(Acceleration) [
0
m
]
s2
cies of the converter have thus an influence on the structure. If
there was a global mode with a resonance frequency in that frequency range, this mode could get excited by the converter frequency.
Further research was done towards bearing monitoring in directdrive wind turbine generators using current probes. This research
however has not lead to significant results. The details of the research can be found in [142]
10
14
12
2
4
6
Figure B.2
Spectrogram of the bearing during
the operation of the turbine
260
Appenix
Magnetic Torque Harmonic
c
262
Appenix
The analysis presented in this appendix is based on [64, 115]
In an electric machine, various sources for the space harmonics
present in the stator and rotor fields exist. The various sources give
the space harmonics unique properties, that have an influence on
the torque ripple they create. This part of the appendix analyses the
source of the harmonic content of torque ripple that does not originate from the interaction between the permanent magnets and
the stator slotting.
Let us consider an electric machines with a homogenous air gap
length g(φ) = g0 . The magneto motive fore for the rotor can be
expanded as a Fourier series. Because the MMF of the rotor has
roughly a square shape, only the odd terms of the Fourier series
contribute to the total MMF
FPM =
∑
ck sin(kθ + ωm t)
(C.1)
k=1,3,5...
where ck denotes the Fourier coefficient, ωm the rotational velocity
of the rotor and θ circumferential coordinate in a cylindrical coordinate system.
To generate a torque, the two harmonics in stator and rotor need
to have the same order.
2π
∫ sin(kθ)sin(hθ) = 0 for h ≠ k
(C.2)
0
This integral describes if the product of stator field and rotor field
interact and produce a torque. Because the rotor only has odd harmonics, only odd harmonics are of interest for the stator. All other
harmonics will not produce a torque.
For the stator, the MMF is a combination of the current and the
winding distribution
FM = nk (θ)ia (t) + nk (θ)ib (t) + nk (θ)ic (t)
(C.3)
where nk , nk and nk denote the winding distributions of the phases
a, b and c, respectively. ia , ib and ic represent the coil currents of
phase a,b and c respectively. The winding distribution can be expanded to a Fourier series again, yielding
nk = ∑ nk sin(kθ)
k
2
nk = ∑ nk sin(k(θ − π))
3
k
4
nk = ∑ nk sin(k(θ − π))
3
k
(C.4)
Appendix C - Magnetic Torque Harmonics
263
where nk denotes the Fourier coefficient for the winding distribution. In this case, all coefficients can appear. In fact, for fractional
windings even coefficients for value of k that are non integer are
possible.
The coil current is influence by the switching frequency of the inverter and usually also carries some higher harmonics. In this case
we assume for simplicity that the currents are ideal and can be expressed by
ia (t) = îk sin(ωe t)
2
ib (t) = îk sin(ωe t − π)
3
4
ic (t) = îk sin(ωe t − π)
3
(C.5)
Inserting (C.5) and (C.4) into (C.3) yields
FM = ∑ nk sin(kθ)îk sin(ωe t)
k
2
+ nk sin(k(θ − π))îk sin(ωe t −
3
4
+ nk sin(k(θ − π))îk sin(ωe t −
3
2
π)
3
4
π)
3
(C.6)
Using the trigonometric identity sin(θ) sin(φ) = 21 (cos(θ − φ) −
cos(θ + φ) yields
1
FM = ∑ nk îk ( (cos(kθ − ωe t) − cos(kθ + ωe t))
2
k
1
2
2
2
2
+ ∑ nk îk (cos(kθ − ωe t − k π + π) − cos(kθ + ωe t − k π − π))
2
3
3
3
3
k
1
4
4
4
4
+ ∑ nk îk (cos(kθ − ωe t − k π + π) − cos(kθ + ωe t − k π − π))
2
3
3
3
3
k
1
= ∑ nk îk (cos(kθ − ωe t) − cos(kθ + ωe t))
2
k
1
2
2
+ ∑ nk îk (cos(kθ − ωe t − (k − 1) π) − cos(kθ + ωe t − (k + 1) π))
2
3
3
k
1
2
4
+ ∑ nk îk (cos(kθ − ωe t − (k − 1) π) − cos(kθ + ωe t − (k + 1) π))
2
3
3
k
The trigonometric identity
cos(α + β) = cos(α) cos(β) − sin(α) sin(β)
let us take the constant terms out of the trigonometric functions
(C.7)
264
Appenix
1
FM = ∑ nk îk [cos(kθ − ωe t) − cos(kθ + ωe t)
2
k
2
2
+ cos(kθ − ωe t) cos(−(k − 1) π) − sin(kθ − ωe t) sin(−(k − 1) π))
3
3
2
2
− cos(kθ + ωe t) cos(−(k + 1) π) + sin(kθ + ωe t) sin(−(k + 1) π)
3
3
4
4
+ cos(kθ − ωe t) cos(−(k − 1) π) − sin(kθ − ωe t) sin(−(k − 1) π)
3
3
4
4
− cos(kθ + ωe t) cos(−(k + 1) π) + sin(kθ + ωe t) sin(−(k + 1) π)]
3
3
(C.8)
At this point the equation is split up in three different parts for various k. For k = 1, 7, 13, ... the term (k − 1) 32 π a multiple of 2π and
thus sine of these terms are zero and the cosine equal to one. The
terms cos(−(k + 1) 23 π) and cos(−(k + 1) 34 π) are always −0.5 and
the terms sin(−(k + 1) 23 π) and sin(−(k + 1) 43 π) have opposite presigns. That yields for k = 1, 7, 13, ...:
FM,k=1,7,13,... =
1
nk îk [cos(kθ − ωe t) − cos(kθ + ωe t)
2
k=1,7,13,...
∑
+ cos(kθ − ωe t)
2
2
− cos(kθ + ωe t) cos(−(k + 1) π) + sin(kθ + ωe t) sin(−(k + 1) π)
3
3
+ cos(kθ − ωe t)
4
4
− cos(kθ + ωe t) cos(−(k + 1) π) + sin(kθ + ωe t) sin(−(k + 1) π)]
3
3
1
= ∑ nk îk [3 cos(kθ − ωe t)]
2
k=1,7,13,...
(C.9)
For k = 5, 11, 17, ..., the term (k + 1) 23 π is a multiple of 2π. The
terms cos(−(k − 1) 32 π) and cos(−(k − 1) 34 π) are always −0.5 and
the terms sin(−(k − 1) 23 π) and sin(−(k − 1) 43 π) have opposite presigns. That yields for k = 5, 11, 17, ...:
1
nk îk [cos(kθ − ωe t) − cos(kθ + ωe t)
2
k=5,11,17,...
2
2
+ cos(kθ − ωe t) cos(−(k − 1) π) − sin(kθ − ωe t) sin(−(k − 1) π))
3
3
− cos(kθ + ωe t)
4
4
+ cos(kθ − ωe t) cos(−(k − 1) π) − sin(kθ − ωe t) sin(−(k − 1) π)
3
3
− cos(kθ + ωe t)
1
=
nk îk [−3 cos(kθ + ωe t)]
∑
2
k=5,11,17,...
FM,k=5,11,17,... =
∑
(C.10)
For k = {3, 9, 15, ...}, the terms cos(−(k+1) 32 π), cos(−(k+1) 43 π),
Appendix C - Magnetic Torque Harmonics
265
cos(−(k − 1) 34 π) and cos(−(k − 1) 32 π) are all equal to −0.5. The
terms sin(−(k+1) 23 π) and sin(−(k−1) 43 π) are identical. The same
is true for the terms sin(−(k − 1) 32 π) and sin(−(k + 1) 43 π). Considering all this, some simplifications can be applied.
FM,k=3,9,15,... =
1
nk îk [cos(kθ − ωe t) − cos(kθ + ωe t)
2
k=3,9,15,...
∑
− 0.5 cos(kθ − ωe t)
+ 0.5 cos(kθ + ωe t)
(C.11)
− 0.5 cos(kθ − ωe t)
+ 0.5 cos(kθ + ωe t)
=0
Assembling (C.11), (C.10) and (C.9) yields
1
nk îk [3 cos(kθ − ωe t)]
2
k=1,7,13,...
1
+
nk îk [3 cos(kθ + ωe t)]
∑
2
k=5,11,17,...
FM =
∑
(C.12)
for the total magneto motive force. (C.12) shows that the odd harmonics, which are not dividable by three travel either forward or
backward around the stator. The rotation speed at which they travel
n
is the electrical rotation speed, which is poles
higher than the mech2
anical rotation speed. Therefore they create a pulsating torque,
which is zero when the two fields are aligned and highest when
○
they are rotated by 2⋅90
. Because of the rotation of the rotor the
npoles
pulsating frequency is either at k − 1 times the electrical frequency
or at k + 1, depending on the order.
In this case, the rotation of the fundamental k = 1 is in negative
direction. The rotor will thus rotate in negative direction too. The
7th , 13th , 19th , ... harmonics will thus create a pulsating torque at
n
ωm . The same is true for the 5th , 11th and 17th
6, 10,13 times poles
2
harmonic.
266
267
Curiculum Vitae
Michael Kirschneck was born on 9th of December 1984 in Hamburg. He completed his secondary education at the Gymnasium
Eppendorf in Hamburg in 2004. Afterwards he did his civilian service at the ‘Hauspflegestation Barmbek-Uhlenhorst’, an outpatient
nursery service. In 2005 he started studying mechanical engineering at the Technische Universität München with the specialisation Engineering Fundamentals and Thermo-Fluid Dynamics. He
graduated in 2011, being awarded the degree of Diplom-Ingenieur.
Since October 2011 he has been working as a researcher at the Delft
University of technology in a project together with XEMC-Darwind under the supervision of prof. dr. Daniel J. Rixen and the
co-supervisors Henk Polinder and Ron A.J. van Ostayen. The results of this project are compiled in this thesis.
268
References
[1] A. Abrahamsen et al. “Feasibility study of 5MW superconducting wind turbine generator”. Physica C: Superconductivity 471.21-22 (2011), pp. 1464–1469. doi: 10.1016/
j.physc.2011.05.217.
[2] A. Andreykiv and D. J. Rixen. “Numerical modelling of electromechanical coupling
using fictitious domain and level set methods”. International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering 80.4 (2009), pp. 478–506. doi: 10.1002/nme.2636.
[3] A. C. Antoulas and D. C. Sorensen. “Approximation of large-scale dynamical
systems: An overview”. Applied Mathematics and Computer Science 11.5 (2001),
pp. 1093–1122.
[4] E. Balmès. “Frequency domain identification of structural dynamics using the
pole/residue parametrization”. Proceedings of the International Modal Analysis Conference.
[5] E. Balmes. “Integration of existing methods and user knowledge in a MIMO identification algorithm for structures with high modal densities”. Proceedings of SPIE The International Society for Optical Engineering. 1, pp. 613–619. isbn: 0912053410.
[6] E. Balmes. SDTools Vibration Software. url: http://www.sdtools.com/.
[7] M. Balser. Bayerns lange Leitung. url: http://www.sueddeutsche.de/bayern/
energiewende-bayerns-lange-leitung-1.2331870.
[8] M. C. C. BAMPTON and R. R. CRAIG, JR. “Coupling of substructures for dynamic
analyses.” en. AIAA Journal 6.7 (1968), pp. 1313–1319. doi: 10.2514/3.4741.
[9] D. Bang et al. “Review of generator systems for direct-drive wind turbines”. European
Wind Energy Conference & Exhibition, pp. 1–11. isbn: 9781615671151.
[10] A. van Beek. Advanced engineering design : lifetime performance and reliability. TU
Delft, 2006, 499 p. isbn: 9081040618.
[11] A. Belahcen. “Magnetoelastic coupling in rotating electrical machines”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 41.5 (2005), pp. 1624–1627. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2005.846123.
[12] A. Belahcen. “Magnetoelasticity, Magnetic Forces and Magetostriction in Electrical Machines”. PhD thesis. Helsinki University of Technology, 2004, p. 115. isbn:
9512271850.
[13] A. Belahcen. “Vibrations of rotating electrical machines due to magnetomechanical coupling and magnetostriction”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 42.4 (2006),
pp. 971–974. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2006.871469.
[14] M. P. Bendsøe. “Optimal shape design as a material distribution problem”. Structural
Optimization 1.4 (1989), pp. 193–202. doi: 10.1007/BF01650949.
[15] N. Bianchi and S. Bolognani. “Design techniques for reducing the cogging torque
in surface-mounted PM motors”. IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications 38.5
(2002), pp. 1259–1265. doi: 10.1109/TIA.2002.802989.
[16] K. J. Binns, P. J. Lawrenson and C. Trowbridge. The Analytical and Numerical Solution of Electric and Magnetic Fields. John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 1993. isbn: 0471924601.
[17] A. Bossavit. “Edge-element computation of the force field in deformable bodies”.
IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 28 (1992), pp. 1263–1266. doi: 10.1109/20.123919.
[18] G. E. P. Box and N. R. Draper. Empirical model-building and response surfaces. Wiley,
1987. isbn: 0471810339.
269
[19] A. Brandt and A. Linderholt. “A periodogram-based method for removing harmonics in operational modal analysis”. ISMA.
[20] R. Brincker, L. Zhang and P. Andersen. “Modal Identification from Ambient Responses using Frequency Domain Decomposition”. Proceedings of the Internation
Modal Analysis Conference, IMAC XVIII, pp. 625–630.
[21] M. Bruggi and M. Verani. “A fully adaptive topology optimization algorithm with
goal-oriented error control”. Computers and Structures 89.15-16 (2011), pp. 1481–1493.
doi: 10.1016/j.compstruc.2011.05.003.
[22] H. B. Callen. Thermodynamics and an Introduction to Thermostatistics. Wiley, 1985.
isbn: 978-0471862567.
[23] P. Campbell. “Comments on ”Energy stored in permanent magnets””. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 36.1 (2000), pp. 401–403. doi: 10.1109/20.822554.
[24] Chang-Hwan Im, Hyun-Kyo Jung and Yong-Joo Kim. “Hybrid genetic algorithm for
electromagnetic topology optimization”. English. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics
39.5 (2003), pp. 2163–2169. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2003.817094.
[25] N. Chestney and G. D. Clercq. Global nuclear decommissioning cost seen underestimated, may spiral. url: http://www.reuters.com/article/2015/01/19/
nuclear-decommissioning-idUSL6N0UV2BI20150119.
[26] J. S. Choi et al. “Rotor pole design of IPM motors for a sinusoidal air-gap flux density
distribution”. Structural and Multidisciplinary Optimization 46.3 (2012), pp. 445–455.
doi: 10.1007/s00158-012-0774-8.
[27] J. Coulomb. “A methodology for the determination of global electromechanical
quantities from a finite element analysis and its application to the evaluation of
magnetic forces, torques and stiffness”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 19.6 (1983),
pp. 2514–2519. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.1983.1062812.
[28] J. Coulomb and G. Meunier. “Finite element implementation of virtual work principle for magnetic or electric force and torque computation”. IEEE Transactions on
Magnetics 20.5 (1984), pp. 1894–1896. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.1984.1063232.
[29] R. Craig, Jr. “Coupling of substructures for dynamic analyses - An overview”. 41st
Structures, Structural Dynamics, and Materials Conference and Exhibit. Structures,
Structural Dynamics, and Materials and Co-located Conferences.
[30] The Philosopher’s Tree: Michael Faraday’s life and work in his own words. Ed. by P.
Day. Taylor & Francis, 1999. isbn: 978-0750305716.
[31] K. Delaere et al. “Coupling of Magnetic Analysis and Vibrational Modal Analysis
using local Forces”. Proceedings of the Xth International Symposium on Theoretical
Electrical Engineering. 10, pp. 417–422.
[32] K. Delaere et al. “Coupling of numerical magnetic and experimental vibration analysis for electrical machines”. 3rd Chinese International Conference on Electrical Machines, pp. 0–3.
[33] E. Di Lorenzo et al. “Dynamic characterization of wind turbine gearboxes using
Order-Based Modal Analysis”. ISMA.
[34] J. M. Dickens and A. Stroeve. “Modal truncation vectors for reduced dynamic substructure models”. AIAA/ASME/ASCE/AHS/ASC Structures, Structural Dynamics,
and Materials Conference and Exhibit, 41 st.
[35] J. Donkers and A. Brand. Offshore wind atlas of the Dutch part of the North Sea. Tech.
rep. EWEA, 2011, pp. 29–31.
270
[36] L. Dorfmann and R. W. Ogden. Nonlinear Theory of Electroelastic and Magnetoelastic
Interactions. Springer US, 2014. isbn: 9781461495963.
[37] M. R. Dubois and H. Polinder. “Study of TFPM machines with toothed rotor applied
to direct-drive generators for wind turbines”. Proceedings of the Nordic workshop on
power and industrial electronics.
[38] O. Duque, M. Perez and D. Morinigo. “Detection of Bearing Faults in Cage Induction Motors Fed by Frequency Converter using Spectral Analysis of Line Current”. IEEE International Conference on Electric Machines and Drives, 2005. Pp. 17–
22. isbn: 0-7803-8987-5.
[39] R. Eberhart and J. Kennedy. “A new optimizer using particle swarm theory”.
MHS’95. Proceedings of the Sixth International Symposium on Micro Machine and
Human Science, pp. 39–43. isbn: 0-7803-2676-8.
[40] M. S. Eldred, V. B. Venkayya and W. J. Anderson. “Mode tracking issues in structural
optimization”. en. AIAA Journal 33.10 (1995), pp. 1926–1933. doi: 10.2514/3.12747.
[41] S. Engström et al. “Development of NewGen - a New Type of Direct-Drive Generator”. European Wind Energy Conference. Vol. 4, pp. 22–25.
[42] EWEA. The European offshore wind industry –key trends and statistics 2014. Tech.
rep. January. European Wind Energy Association, 2015.
[43] EWEA. Wind in our Sails - The coming of Europe‘s offshore wind energy industry.
Tech. rep. EWEA, 2011, p. 93.
[44] C. Farhat et al. “Dimensional reduction of nonlinear finite element dynamic models
with finite rotations and energy-based mesh sampling and weighting for computational efficiency”. International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering 98.9
(2014), pp. 625–662. doi: 10.1002/nme.4668.
[45] S. Faulstich, B. Hahn and P. J. Tavner. “Wind turbine downtime and its importance
for offshore deployment”. Wind Energy 14.3 (2011), pp. 327–337. doi: 10.1002/we.
421.
[46] A. E. Fitzgerald, C. Kingsley and S. D. Umans. Electric Machinery. 7th ed. McGrawHill Education, 2013, p. 704.
[47] B. Flemisch et al. “Coupling scalar and vector potentials on nonmatching grids for
eddy currents in a moving conductor”. Journal of Computational and Applied Mathematics 168.1-2 (2004), pp. 191–205. doi: 10.1016/j.cam.2003.05.017.
[48] K. Fonteyn et al. “Simulated results and experimental verification of a novel
magneto-mechanical coupled method”. Electrical Machines and Systems (ICEMS),
pp. 1743–1748.
[49] E. Fröde and W. Fröde. Windmühlen in Deutschland, Holland und Belgien. Energiespender und ästhetische Architektur. Studio Dumont Buchverlag, 1981. isbn:
3770112229.
[50] W. Fu et al. “Magnetic Force Computation in Permanent Magnets Using a Local Energy Coordinate Derivative Method”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 40.2 (2004),
pp. 683–686. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2004.824774.
[51] M. Furlan, A. Cernigoj and M. Boltezar. “A coupled electromagnetic‐mechanical‐acoustic model of a DC electric motor”. COMPEL - The
international journal for computation and mathematics in electrical and electronic
engineering 22.4 (2003), pp. 1155–1165. doi: 10.1108/03321640310483075.
[52] M. Géradin and D. Rixen. Mechanical Vibrations : Theory and Applications to Structural Dynamics. 3rd ed. Wiley, 2015, p. 444. isbn: 047197546X.
271
[53] M. van der Giet et al. “Comparison of 2-D and 3-D Coupled Electromagnetic and
Structure-Dynamic Simulation of Electrical Machines”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 44.6 (2008), pp. 1594–1597. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2007.916121.
[54] P Gipe. Wind in power - 2014 European statisctics. Tech. rep. February. EWEA, 2015,
p. 12.
[55] R. Girgis and S. Verma. “Resonant Frequencies and Vibration Behaviour of Stators
of Electrical Machines as Affected by Teeth, Windings, Frame and Laminations”.
IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems PAS-98.4 (1979), pp. 1446–1455.
doi: 10.1109/TPAS.1979.319347.
[56] C. Golovanov et al. “3D mesh connection techniques applied to movement simulation”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 34.5 (1998), pp. 3359–3362. doi: 10.1109/20.
717790.
[57] R. J. GUYAN. “Reduction of stiffness and mass matrices”. en. AIAA Journal 3.2
(1965), pp. 380–380. doi: 10.2514/3.2874.
[58] E. Hau. Wind Turbines. Berlin, Heidelberg: Springer Berlin Heidelberg, 2013. isbn:
978-3-642-27150-2.
[59] W. H. Hayt. Engineering electromagnetics. 5th. McGraw-Hill, 1989. isbn: 0-07027406-1.
[60] O Heaviside. “On the Forces, Stresses, and Fluxes of Energy in the Electromagnetic
Field”. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London 183 (1892), pp. 423
–480.
[61] H. Helmholtz. Über die auf das Innere magnetisch oder dielectrisch polarisirter Körper
wirkenden Kräfte. Barth Leipzig, 1881.
[62] F. Henrotte and K. Hameyer. “Computation of electromagnetic force densities: Maxwell stress tensor vs. virtual work principle”. Journal of Computational and Applied
Mathematics 168.1-2 (2004), pp. 235–243. doi: 10.1016/j.cam.2003.06.012.
[63] Hokyung Shim et al. “Topology Optimization for Compliance Reduction of Magnetomechanical Systems”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 44.3 (2008), pp. 346–351.
doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2007.914670.
[64] S. R. Holm, H. Polinder and J. a. Ferreira. “Analytical modeling of a permanentmagnet synchronous machine in a flywheel”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 43.5
(2007), pp. 1955–1967. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2007.892791.
[65] G. A. Holzapfel. Nonlinear Solid Mechanics: A Continuum Approach for Engineering.
Wiley, 2000, p. 455. isbn: 0471823198.
[66] P. G. Huray. Maxwell’s Equation. Wiley-IEEE Press, 2009, p. 312. isbn: 978-0-47054276-7.
[67] W. C. HURTY. “Dynamic analysis of structural systems using component modes”.
en. AIAA Journal 3.4 (1965), pp. 678–685. doi: 10.2514/3.2947.
[68] W. Hurty. “Vibrations of Structural Systems by Component Mode Synthesis”. eng.
Journal of the Engineering Mechanics Division 86.4 (1960), pp. 51–70.
[69] T. Ishikawa, P. Xie and N. Kurita. “Topology Optimization of Rotor Structure in
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors Considering Ease of Manufacturing”. IEEJ
Journal of Industry Applications 4.4 (2015), pp. 469–475. doi: 10.1541/ieejjia.
4.469.
272
[70] R. Islam et al. “Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor Magnet Designs With Skewing for Torque Ripple and Cogging Torque Reduction”. English. IEEE Transactions
on Industry Applications 45.1 (2009), pp. 152–160. doi: 10 . 1109 / TIA . 2008 .
2009653.
[71] N.-J. Jacobsen, P. Andersen and R. Brincker. “Using Enhanced Frequency Domain Decomposition as a Robust Technique to Harmonic Excitation in Operational
Modal Analysis”. ISMA.
[72] Jeonghoon Yoo and N. Kikuchi. “Topology optimization for reduction of vibration caused by magnetic harmonic excitation”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 38.6
(2002), pp. 3643–3649. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2002.804806.
[73] M. Kaltenbacher. Numerical Simulation of Mechatronic Sensors and Actuators.
Springer Verlag, 2007. isbn: 978-3-540-71359-3.
[74] G. Kerschen et al. “The Method of Proper Orthogonal Decomposition for Dynamical Characterization and Order Reduction of Mechanical Systems: An Overview”.
Nonlinear Dynamics 41.1-3 (2005), pp. 147–169. doi: 10.1007/s11071-005-28032.
[75] T. S. Kim and Y. Y. Kim. “Mac-based mode-tracking in structural topology optimization”. Computers & Structures 74.3 (2000), pp. 375–383. doi: 10.1016/S00457949(99)00056-5.
[76] F. Klinger and L. Müller. “State of the Art and new Technologies of Direct-Drive
Wind Turbines”. IRENEC.
[77] K. Komeza et al. “Comparative computation of forces and torques of electromagnetic devices by means of different formulae”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 30.5
(1994), pp. 3475–3478. doi: 10.1109/20.312687.
[78] F. von König. Windenergie in praktischer nutzung: räder, rotoren, mühlen, windkraftwerke. Udo Pfriemer, 1978. isbn: 3-7906-0077-6.
[79] D. J. Korteweg. “Ueber die Veränderung der Form und des Volumens dielectrischer
Körper unter Einwirkung electrischer Kräfte”. Annalen der Physik und Chemie 245.1
(1880), pp. 48–61. doi: 10.1002/andp.18792450103.
[80] C. Kost. Levelized Cost of Electricity Renewable Energy Technologies. Tech. rep.
November. Fraunhofer Institute for Solar Energy Systems ISE, 2013.
[81] D. Kostopoulos, H. Polinder and A. van den Brink. “High Temperature Superconducting generators for direct drive wind turbines: A review”. Proc. Eur. Wind Energy
Assoc. Conf, pp. 1–10. isbn: 9781627482912.
[82] B. Lalanne and M. Touratier. “Aeroelastic Vibrations and Stability in Cyclic Symmetric Domains”. International Journal of Rotating Machinery 6.6 (2000), pp. 445–
452. doi: 10.1155/S1023621X00000403.
[83] E Lantz et al. “The Past and Future Cost of Wind Energy Preprint”. World Renewable
Energy Forum. August.
[84] B. S. Lazarov and O. Sigmund. “Filters in topology optimization based on
Helmholtz-type differential equations”. International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering 86.6 (2011), pp. 765–781. doi: 10.1002/nme.3072.
[85] A. Lazarus, B. Prabel and D. Combescure. “A 3D finite element model for the vibration analysis of asymmetric rotating machines”. Journal of Sound and Vibration
329.18 (2010), pp. 3780–3797. doi: 10.1016/j.jsv.2010.03.029.
273
[86] J. Le Besnerais et al. “Characterization and Reduction of Audible Magnetic Noise
Due to PWM Supply in Induction Machines”. IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics 57.4 (2010), pp. 1288–1295. doi: 10.1109/TIE.2009.2029529.
[87] C.-W. Lee et al. “Modal analysis of periodically time-varying linear rotor systems”.
Journal of Sound and Vibration 303.3-5 (2007), pp. 553–574. doi: 10.1016/j.jsv.
2007.01.041.
[88] J. Lee and N. Kikuchi. “Structural Topology Optimization of Electrical Machinery to
Maximize Stiffness With Body Force Distribution”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics
46.10 (2010), pp. 3790–3794. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2010.2052365.
[89] T. H. Lee. “Adjoint Method for Design Sensitivity Analysis of Multiple Eigenvalues
and Associated Eigenvectors”. AIAA Journal 45.8 (2007), pp. 1998–2004. doi: 10.
2514/1.25347.
[90] T. H. Lee. “An Adjoint Variable Method for Structural Design Sensitivity Analysis
of a Distinct Eigenvalue Problem”. KSME International Journal 13.6 (1999), pp. 470–
476.
[91] J. Leuridan et al. “High Resolution Order Tracking Using Kalman Tracking Filters Theory and Applications”. SAE Transactions: Journal of Passenger Cars, p. 291.
[92] H. Lovatt and P. Walterson. “Energy stored in permanent magnets”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 35.1 (1999), pp. 505–507. doi: 10.1109/20.737473.
[93] R. H. MacNeal. “A hybrid method of component mode synthesis”. Computers &
Structures 1.4 (1971), pp. 581–601. doi: 10.1016/0045-7949(71)90031-9.
[94] N. M. M. Maia and J. M. M. Silva. Theoretical and Experimental Modal Analysis.
Research Studies Press, 1997. isbn: 0863802087.
[95] M. Mair et al. “Numerical and experimental investigation of the structural characteristics of stator core stacks”. COMPEL - The international journal for computation
and mathematics in electrical and electronic engineering 32.5 (2013), pp. 1643–1664.
doi: 10.1108/COMPEL-04-2013-0122.
[96] Y. Marechal et al. “A general purpose tool for restoring inter-element continuity”.
IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 28.2 (1992), pp. 1728–1731. doi: 10 . 1109 / 20 .
124037.
[97] J. Martinez, A. Belahcen and J. Detoni. “A 2D magnetic and 3D mechanical coupled
finite element model for the study of the dynamic vibrations in the stator of induction motors”. Mechanical Systems and Signal Processing 66-67 (2016), pp. 640–656.
doi: 10.1016/j.ymssp.2015.06.014.
[98] K. Maute, S. Schwarz and E. Ramm. “Adaptive topology optimization of
elastoplastic structures”. Structural Optimization 15.2 (1998), pp. 81–91. doi: 10 .
1007/BF01278493.
[99] J. C. Maxwell and J. C. Maxwel. “A Dynamical Theory of the Electromagnetic Field”.
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London 155 (1865), pp. 459–512.
[100] W. Miller et al. “Recent development in aluminium alloys for the automotive industry”. Materials Science and Engineering: A 280.1 (2000), pp. 37–49. doi: 10 .
1016/S0921-5093(99)00653-X.
[101] P. Mongeau. “High Torque Density Propulsion Motors”. Naval Engineers Journal 117.4
(2005), pp. 53–57. doi: 10.1111/j.1559-3584.2005.tb00384.x.
[102] F. C. Moon. Applied Dynamics: With Applications to Multibody and Mechatronic Systems. Wiley, 1998. isbn: 0-471-13828-2.
274
[103] K. Motte et al. “Operational Modal Analysis in the Presence of Harmonic Excitations: A Review”. Proceedings of the Internation Modal Analysis Conference.
[104] M. Mueller, A. Zavvos and A. McDonald. “Optimisation tools for large permanent
magnet generators for direct drive wind turbines”. IET Renewable Power Generation
7.2 (2013), pp. 163–171. doi: 10.1049/iet-rpg.2012.0135.
[105] W. Muller. “Comparison of different methods of force calculation”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 26.2 (1990), pp. 1058–1061. doi: 10.1109/20.106503.
[106] J. A. Nelder and R. Mead. “A Simplex Method for Function Minimization”. The Computer Journal 7.4 (1965), pp. 308–313. doi: 10.1093/comjnl/7.4.308.
[107] I. Nishiguchi, A. Kameari and K. Haseyama. “On the local force computation of
deformable bodies in magnetic field”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 35.3 (1999),
pp. 1650–1653. doi: 10.1109/20.767323.
[108] S. Oh, S. Min and J. P. Hong. “Air gap flux density waveform design of surfacemounted permanent magnet motor considering magnet shape and magnetization
direction”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 49.5 (2013), pp. 2393–2396. doi: 10 .
1109/TMAG.2013.2246142.
[109] P. van Overschee and B. de Moor. Subspace Identification for Linear Systems: Theory
- Implementation - Applications. Springer, 2011, p. 272. isbn: 1461380618.
[110] M. Ozbek. “Optical Monitoring and Operational Modal Analysis of Large Wind
Turbines”. PhD thesis. TU Delft, 2013, p. 178.
[111] E. Pedersen and K. Persson Waye. “Perception and annoyance due to wind turbine
noise—a dose–response relationship”. The Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 116.6 (2004), p. 3460. doi: 10.1121/1.1815091.
[112] P. Pellerey, V. Lanfranchi and G. Friedrich. “Coupled Numerical Simulation
Between Electromagnetic and Structural Models. Influence of the Supply Harmonics for Synchronous Machine Vibrations”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 48.2
(2012), pp. 983–986. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2011.2175714.
[113] V. Piefort. “Finite Element Modelling of Piezoelectric Active Structures”. PhD thesis.
Free University of Brussels, 2001, p. 154.
[114] M. Pirnat, G. Čepon and M. Boltežar. “Introduction of the linear contact model
in the dynamic model of laminated structure dynamics: An experimental and numerical identification”. Mechanism and Machine Theory 64 (2013), pp. 144–154. doi:
10.1016/j.mechmachtheory.2013.02.003.
[115] H Polinder and M. J. Hoeijmakers. “Analytic calculation of the magnetic field in PM
machines”. Industry Applications Conference, 1997. Thirty-Second IAS Annual Meeting, IAS ’97., Conference Record of the 1997 IEEE. Vol. 1, 35–41 vol.1. isbn: 0-78034067-1.
[116] H. Polinder. “Overview of and Trends in Wind Turbine Generator Systems”. EEE
Power Engineering Society General Meeting, pp. 1–8.
[117] H. Polinder et al. “Trends in Wind Turbine Generator Systems”. IEEE Journal of
Emerging and Selected Topics in Power Electronics 1.3 (2013), pp. 174–185. doi: 10.
1109/JESTPE.2013.2280428.
[118] J. H. J. Potgieter. “Optimal topology and critical evaluation of slip synchronous permanent magnet wind generator”. PhD thesis. Stellenbosch University, 2014.
[119] M. J. D. Powell. The BOBYQA algorithm for bound constrained optimization without
derivatives. Tech. rep. Department of Applied Mathematics and Theoretical Physics,
2009.
275
[120] A Preumont. Mechatronics Dynamics of Electromechanical and Piezoelectric Systems.
1st ed. Springer Netherlands, 2006, p. 208. isbn: 9781402046957.
[121] A. Rabl and J. Spadaro. Externalities of Energy: Extension of accounting framework
and Policy Applications. Tech. rep. August 2005. ARMINES/Ecole des Mines de
Paris, 2005.
[122] C. Rainieri and G. Fabbrocino. Operational Modal Analysis of Civil Engineering
Structures. New York, NY: Springer New York, 2014. isbn: 978-1-4939-0766-3.
[123] Z. Ren. “Comparison of different force calculation methods in 3D finite element
modelling”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 30.5 (1994), pp. 3471–3474. doi: 10 .
1109/20.312686.
[124] Z. Ren and A. Razek. “A strong coupled model for analysing dynamic behaviours of
non-linear electromechanical systems”. Magnetics, IEEE Transactions on 30.5 (1994),
pp. 3252–3255. doi: 10.1109/20.312631.
[125] Z. Ren and A. Razek. “Local force computation in deformable bodies using edge
elements”. Magnetics, IEEE Transactions on 28.2 (1992), pp. 1212–1215. doi: 10.1109/
20.123904.
[126] Z. Ren et al. “Simulation of an Electromagnetic Actuator by a Coupled MagnetoMechanical Modeling”. COMPEL - The international journal for computation and
mathematics in electrical and electronic engineering 14.4 (1995), pp. 203 –206.
[127] D. J. Rixen and R. F. Lohman. “Efficient computation of eigenmodes of quasi-cyclic
structures”. Proceedings of the Internation Modal Analysis Conference, pp. 1–13.
[128] D. Rixen. “Generalized mode acceleration methods and modal truncation augmentation”. Structures, Structural Dynamics and Material Conference and Exhibit.
Vol. 1300.
[129] D. Rixen. “High order static correction modes for component mode synthesis”. Fifth
World Congress on Computational Mechanics.
[130] D. J. Rixen. “A dual Craig–Bampton method for dynamic substructuring”. Journal of
Computational and Applied Mathematics 168.1-2 (2004), pp. 383–391. doi: 10.1016/
j.cam.2003.12.014.
[131] V. Rochus, D. J. Rixen and J.-C. Golinval. “Monolithic modelling of electromechanical coupling in micro-structures”. International Journal for Numerical
Methods in Engineering 65.4 (2006), pp. 461–493. doi: 10.1002/nme.1450.
[132] S. Rubin. “Improved Component-Mode Representation for Structural Dynamic
Analysis”. en. AIAA Journal 13.8 (1975), pp. 995–1006. doi: 10.2514/3.60497.
[133] N. Sadowski et al. “Finite element torque calculation in electrical machines while
considering the movement”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 28 (1992), pp. 1410–
1413. doi: 10.1109/20.123957.
[134] A. Saito et al. “Efficient forced vibration reanalysis method for rotating electric machines”. Journal of Sound and Vibration 334 (2015), pp. 388–403. doi: 10.1016/j.
jsv.2014.09.004.
[135] R. Sanchez Grandia et al. “General Formulation for Magnetic Forces in Linear
Materials and Permanent Magnets”. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 44.9 (2008),
pp. 2134–2140. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2008.2000493.
[136] G Shrestha. “Structural flexibility of large direct drive generators for wind turbines”.
PhD thesis. Tu Delft, 2013. isbn: 9789088919992.
276
[137] G. Shrestha, H. Polinder and J. Ferreira. “Scaling laws for direct drive generators
in wind turbines”. 2009 IEEE International Electric Machines and Drives Conference,
pp. 797–803. isbn: 978-1-4244-4251-5.
[138] G. Shrestha et al. “Structural Flexibility: A Solution for Weight Reduction of Large
Direct-Drive Wind-Turbine Generators”. IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion
25.3 (2010), pp. 732–740. doi: 10.1109/TEC.2010.2048713.
[139] O. Sigmund. “Morphology-based black and white filters for topology optimization”.
English. Structural and Multidisciplinary Optimization 33.4-5 (2007), pp. 401–424.
doi: 10.1007/s00158-006-0087-x.
[140] R. K. Singal, K. Williams and S. P. Verma. “The effect of windings, frame and impregnation upon the resonant frequencies and vibrational behavior of an electrical
machine stator”. Experimental Mechanics 30.3 (1990), pp. 270–280. doi: 10.1007/
BF02322822.
[141] R. Singal, K. Williams and S. Verma. “Vibration behaviour of stators of electrical
machines, part II: Experimental study”. Journal of Sound and Vibration 115.1 (1987),
pp. 13–23. doi: 10.1016/0022-460X(87)90489-5.
[142] D. Smet. “Improvement and Adaptation of Bearing Monitoring System”. Master
Thesis. TU Delft, 2014.
[143] E. Spooner et al. “Lightweight ironless-stator PM generators for direct-drive wind
turbines”. IEE Proceedings - Electric Power Applications 152.1 (2005), p. 17. doi: 10.
1049/ip-epa:20041084.
[144] R. Stainko. “An adaptive multilevel approach to the minimal compliance problem in
topology optimization”. Communications in Numerical Methods in Engineering 22.2
(2006), pp. 109–118. doi: 10.1002/cnm.800.
[145] J. N. Stander, G. Venter and M. J. Kamper. “Review of direct-drive radial flux wind
turbine generator mechanical design”. Wind Energy 15.July 2011 (2012), pp. 459–472.
doi: 10.1002/we.
[146] Stephan Hannot. “Modeling Strategies for Electro - Mechanical Microsystems with
Uncertainty Quantification door”. PhD thesis. TU Delft, 2010. isbn: 9789090256801.
[147] R. Strahan. “Energy conversion by nonlinear permanent magnet machines”. IEE
Proceedings - Electric Power Applications 145.3 (1998), p. 193. doi: 10 . 1049 / ip epa:19981863.
[148] J. A. Stratton. Electromagnetic Theory. Mcgraw Hill Book Company, 1941, p. 648.
[149] K. Svanberg. “The method of moving asymptotes – a new method for structural optimization”. International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering 24.2 (1987),
pp. 359–373. doi: 10.1002/nme.1620240207.
[150] D. Tcherniak. “Topology optimization of resonating structures using SIMP method”.
International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering 54.11 (2002), pp. 1605–
1622. doi: 10.1002/nme.484.
[151] H. Tiersten. “Hamilton’s principle for linear piezoelectric media”. Proceedings of the
IEEE 55.8 (1967), pp. 1523–1524. doi: 10.1109/PROC.1967.5887.
[152] P. Tiso, R. Dedden and D. Rixen. “A Modified Discrete Empirical Interpolation
Method for Reducing Non-Linear Structural Finite Element Models”. 9th International Conference on Multibody Systems, Nonlinear Dynamics, and Control. isbn:
978-0-7918-5597-3.
277
[153] D. Torregrossa et al. “Multiphysics Finite-Element Modeling for Vibration and
Acoustic Analysis of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine”. IEEE Transactions
on Energy Conversion 26.2 (2011), pp. 490–500. doi: 10.1109/TEC.2010.2080681.
[154] University of Massachusetts Amherst. Wind Energy Center Alumni and the Early
Wind Industry. url: http://www.umass.edu/windenergy/about/history/
alumni.
[155] M. Valavi, A. Nysveen and R. Nilssen. “Effects of loading on radial magnetic forces
in low-speed permanent magnet machine with concentrated windings”. 2014 International Conference on Electrical Machines (ICEM), pp. 1128–1132. isbn: 978-1-47994389-0.
[156] M. Valavi et al. “Influence of Pole and Slot Combinations on Magnetic Forces and
Vibration in Low-Speed PM Wind Generators”. English. IEEE Transactions on Magnetics 50.5 (2014), pp. 1–11. doi: 10.1109/TMAG.2013.2293124.
[157] M. Valavi et al. “Slot Harmonic Effect on Magnetic Forces and Vibration in LowSpeed Permanent-Magnet Machine With Concentrated Windings”. English. IEEE
Transactions on Industry Applications 50.5 (2014), pp. 3304–3313. doi: 10 . 1109 /
TIA.2014.2309717.
[158] P. L. C. van der Valk and D. J. Rixen. “An Effective Method for Assembling Impulse
Response Functions to Linear and Non-linear Finite Element Models”. Proceedings
of the Internation Modal Analysis Conference. Conference Proceedings of the Society
for Experimental Mechanics Series, pp. 123–135. isbn: 978-1-4614-2421-5.
[159] N. Van Dijk. “Pushing the Boundaries: Level-set Methods and Geometrical Nonlinearities in Structural Topology Optimization”. en. PhD thesis. Delft University of
Technology, 2012. isbn: doi:10.4233/uuid:4d9aa813-6d51-4a01-83f8-bb8ed6bcc274.
doi: 10.4233/uuid:4d9aa813-6d51-4a01-83f8-bb8ed6bcc274.
[160] A. Verbart. “Topology Optimization with Stress Constraints”. en. PhD thesis. 2015.
isbn: urn:isbn:9789462597396. doi: 10 . 4233 / uuid : ee24b186 - 5db6 - 4c57 aa50-3b736110ff2a.
[161] S. Verma, R. Singal and K. Williams. “Vibration behaviour of stators of electrical machines, part I: Theoretical study”. Journal of Sound and Vibration 115.1 (1987), pp. 1–
12. doi: 10.1016/0022-460X(87)90488-3.
[162] S. Verma, K. Williams and R. Singal. “Vibrations of long and short laminated stators
of electrical machines Part I: Theory, experimental models, procedure and set-up”.
Journal of Sound and Vibration 129.1 (1989), pp. 1–13. doi: 10.1016/0022-460X(89)
90531-2.
[163] W. Voigt. Lehrbuch der Kristallphysik. Wiesbaden: Vieweg+Teubner Verlag, 1966.
isbn: 978-3-663-15316-0.
[164] S. N. Voormeeren, P. L. C. Van Der Valk and D. J. Rixen. “Generalized Methodology
for Assembly and Reduction of Component Models for Dynamic Substructuring”.
AIAA Journal 49.5 (2011), pp. 1010–1020. doi: 10.2514/1.J050724.
[165] S. N. Voormeeren. “Dynamic Substructuring Methodologies for Integrated Dynamic Analysis of Wind Turbines door”. PhD thesis. TU Delft, 2012. isbn:
9789491104107.
[166] H. Wang and K. Williams. “Effects of Laminations on the Vibrational Behaviour of
Electrical Machine Stators”. Journal of Sound and Vibration 202.5 (1997), pp. 703–715.
278
[167] M. Y. Wang, X. Wang and D. Guo. “A level set method for structural topology optimization”. Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and Engineering 192.1-2 (2003),
pp. 227–246. doi: 10.1016/S0045-7825(02)00559-5.
[168] H Weh and H May. “Achievable force densities for permanent magnet excited machines in new configurations”. Proc. Int. Conf. on Electrical Machines, pp. 1107–1111.
[169] B. Weilharter et al. “Experimental investigation of the vibration behaviour of a laminated stack with winding”. IECON 2013 - 39th Annual Conference of the IEEE Industrial Electronics Society, pp. 2816–2820. isbn: 978-1-4799-0224-8.
[170] F. Wein. “Topology Optimization of Smart Piezoelectric Transducers”. PhD thesis.
University of Erlangen, 2011.
[171] M. F. While. “Rolling Element Bearing Vibration Transfer Characteristics : Effect of
Stiffness”. Journal of Applied Mechanics 46.September 1979 (2013), pp. 677–684.
[172] Wikipedia. Wikipedia.com - Lists of offshore wind farms by country. url: http://
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lists_of_offshore_wind_farms_by_country.
[173] H. H. Woodson and J. R. Melcher. Electromechanical Dynamics Part I: Discrete Systems. Wiley, 1968. isbn: 0471959855.
[174] XEMC-Darwind. XEMC-Darwind Web page. url: http://www.darwind.nl/
Wind-turbines/XD115-5MW.
[175] A Zavvos et al. Structural comparison of permanent magnet direct drive generator
topologies for 5MW wind turbines.
[176] A. Zavvos. “Structural Optimisation of Permanent Magnet Direct Drive Generators
for 5MW Wind Turbines”. PhD thesis. The University of Edinburgh, 2013.
[177] O. C. Zienkiewicz, R. L. Taylor and J. Z. Zhu. The Finite Element Method: Its
Basis and Fundamentals. Vol. 1. The Finite Element Method. Elsevier ButterworthHeinemann, 2005, p. 733. isbn: 0750663200.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement